Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout1.02 Plans & Maps Maps and Plans Tab Table of Contents 1. Garfield County Location Map 2. Vicinity Map 3. Zoning Map 4. Legal Description 5. Public Roads Map 6. Laramie Access Roads Map 7. Hauling Road Map 8. Water Supply and Management Plan 9. Wastewater Management and System Plan 10. Floodplain Analysis and Figure 11. ACF Reclamation, Revegetation, and Noxious Weed Plan 12. Weed Management and Reclamation Plan 13. ACF Contingency Plan (Emergency Action Plan, Emergency Access Maps, and Laramie Health and Safety Manual) Maps and Plans - Table of Contents Garfield County Administrative Review, 2020 LARAMIEENERGY LLCAPN: 216921400026 PUCKETTLAND COMPANY PUCKETTLAND COMPANY COUEYFAMILY LLLP COUEYFAMILY LLLP COUEY FAMILY L L L P APN: 216914100029 APN: 2169 0 2 2 0 0 0 3 0 APN: 216910100020 APN: 241101300001 APN: 216927200017 HIGH LONESOMERANCH LLCLARAMIEENERGY LLCAPN: 216904400003APN: 216904100951 BLM APN: 213725300007 CHEVRONUSA INC APN: 216906100028 MOUNTAIN LLC TEP ROCKY APN: 216736200023 RESOURCES LLC MAHOGANY ENERGY APN: 241104100002 JOJO PROPERTIES LLC APN: 241108200011 APN: 241108200954 BLM APN: 241311200951 BLM CO RD213 CO RD213 CO RD204 T 6 S T 7 S T 5 S T 6 S T 5 S T 6 S R 97 WR 96 WR 97 WR 98 WR 97 WR 98 WR 97 WR 97 WT 6 S T 7 S LARAMIE PROPERTY ACCESS POINT BLM APN: 241108100953 SAVAGE LIMITED PARTNERSHIP I & ANDERSON, GEORGE M REVOCABLE TRUST APN: 241108200019 1414 ELK ST., ROCK SPRINGS, WY 82901 RIFFIN & ASSOCIATES, INC. (307) 362-5028 ZONING DRAWN: 6/29/2020 - DEH DRG JOB No. 21379REVISED: 9/8/2020 - DEH SCALE: 1" = 4000' ADDED PARCELS ZONING PARCEL MAP LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC. CC 697-15-54 ANNEX SWSE, SECTION 15, T.6 S., R.97 W., 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADOGARFIELD CO., COLORADOCC 697-15-54 ANNEX SUBJECT PARCEL ADJACENT PARCEL PROPOSED LOCATION DRG 21379 CC 697-15-54 ANNEX LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC. CUTTINGS STORAGE AREA SE¼, SECTION 15, T6S, R97W, 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO LEGAL DESCRIPTION: THE BASIS OF BEARINGS FOR THIS DESCRIPTION IS THE EAST LINE OF SECTION 15, TOWNSHIP 6 SOUTH, RANGE 97 WEST, OF THE 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO, BEING MONUMENTED WITH 1917 USGLO BRASS CAPS, AND BEARING SOUTH 01°44'51” WEST AND WITH ALL OTHER BEARINGS CONTAINED HEREIN RELATIVE THERETO. CUTTINGS TREATMENT AREA: A TRACT OF INTEREST FOR A CUTTINGS TREATMENT SITE IN THE SOUTHEAST QUARTER OF SECTION 15, TOWNSHIP 6 SOUTH, RANGE 97 WEST, OF THE 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO, BEING MORE PARTICULARLY DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: COMMENCING AT THE SOUTHEAST CORNER OF SAID SECTION 15, BEING A 1917 USGLO BRASS CAP; THENCE NORTH 48°13'21" WEST, 1438.86 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING; THENCE NORTH 70°00'00" WEST, 570.00 FEET; THENCE NORTH 20°00'00" EAST, 560.00 FEET; THENCE SOUTH 70°00'00" EAST, 570.00 FEET TO A POINT FROM WHICH THE NORTHEAST CORNER OF SAID SECTION 15, BEING A 1917 USGLO BRASS CAP, BEARS NORTH 15°23'15” EAST, A DISTANCE OF 3928.17 FEET; THENCE SOUTH 20°00'00" WEST, 560.00 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING. SAID CUTTINGS TREATMENT AREA CONTAINING 7.328 ACRES MORE OR LESS. DE BEQUE COLOR A D O R I V E R CO RD213 CO RD213 CO RD492 CO RD202 CO RD200 CO RD213 CO RD213 3.9 MILESCO RD45.5 I-70 CO RD204 CO RD204 CO RD45 RD T 7 S T 8 S R 98 WR 97 W8 . 3 M ILES LARAMIE PROPERTY ACCESS POINT GARFIELD COUNTY MESA COUNTY 1414 ELK ST., ROCK SPRINGS, WY 82901 RIFFIN & ASSOCIATES, INC. (307) 362-5028 PUBLIC ACCESS DRAWN: 6/29/2020 - DEH DRG JOB No. 21379REVISED: 7/7/2020 - DEH SCALE: 1" = 4000' MISCELLANEOUS EDITS PUBLIC ACCESS ROUTE MAP LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC. CC 697-15-54 ANNEX SWSE, SECTION 15, T.6 S., R.97 W., 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADOGARFIELD CO., COLORADOCC 697-15-54 ANNEX PROPOSED ROUTE EXISTING ROAD QUADRANGLE CIRCLE DOT GULCH LONG POINT MOUNT BLAINE RED PINNACLE DEBEQUE WAGON TRACK RIDGE 2.4 MILES6.4 MILES0.4 MILES 0.4 M I L E S 0.1 MILES ±741 FEET T 7 S T 6 SR 97 WLARAMIEENERGY LLCAPN: 216921400026 LARAMIE PROPERTY ACCESS POINT 1414 ELK ST., ROCK SPRINGS, WY 82901 RIFFIN & ASSOCIATES, INC. (307) 362-5028 LARAMIE ACCESS DRAWN: 6/29/2020 - DEH DRG JOB No. 21379REVISED: 7/7/2020 - DEH SCALE: 1" = 2000' MISCELLANEOUS EDITS LARAMIE ACCESS ROUTE MAP LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC. CC 697-15-54 ANNEX SWSE, SECTION 15, T.6 S., R.97 W., 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADOGARFIELD CO., COLORADOCC 697-15-54 ANNEX PROPOSED ROUTE EXISTING ROAD QUADRANGLE CIRCLE DOT GULCH LONG POINT MOUNT BLAINE RED PINNACLE DEBEQUE WAGON TRACK RIDGE PROPOSED LOCATION CC 603-23-32 2.65 MILES CC 610-21-41 2.20 MILES CC 697-15-08 0.56 MILES CC 697-15-54 ANNEX CUTTINGS STORAGE R 97 WT 6 S 1414 ELK ST., ROCK SPRINGS, WY 82901 RIFFIN & ASSOCIATES, INC. (307) 362-5028 PROPOSED CUTTINGS HAUL ROUTE CC 697-15-08 ROUTE EXISTING ROAD LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC. CC 697-15-54 ANNEX CUTTINGS STORAGE SECTION 3, 10 & 15, T.6 S, R.97 W., 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO CUTTINGS HAUL ROUTE DRAWN: 06/16/2020 - TCM 21379REVISED: N/A - . SCALE: 1" = 1000' . GARFIELD CO., COLORADO PROPOSED CUTTINGS HAUL ROUTE CC 603-23-32 2.65 MILES CC 610-21-41 2.20 MILES CC 697-15-05 0.56 MILES PAD NAME MILES CC 697-15-08 ROUTE CC 603-23-32 ROUTE Laramie Energy, LLC. Article 4 Section 203.M - Water Supply and Management Plan Garfield County Administrative Review, 2020 Annex Cuttings Facility Article 4 Section 203.M. Water Supply and Management Plan Water Supply and Management Plan Narrative The Water Management Plan, Section 4-203(M) of the Garfield County Land Use and Development Code is not applicable to the proposed site or use. The proposed facility will not require water for personnel or water to be supplied to the site for daily operations. During operations, personnel will not be required to be manned at the site other than during grading and treatment activities. The ACF will not be accessed daily. Drinking water will be provided in the form of bottled water. Due to the minimal presence of personnel onsite, water use will not be required onsite. Water will not be stored or used at the ACF. Laramie Energy, LLC. Article 4 Section 203.N. - Wastewater Management and System Plan Garfield County Administrative Review, 2020 Annex Cuttings Facility Article 4 Section 203.N. Wastewater Management and System Plan Wastewater Management and System Plan Narrative The Wastewater Management and System Plan, Section 4-203(N) of the Garfield County Land Use and Development Code is not applicable to the proposed site. The subject use is not served by an existing public collection system or treatment facility. The proposed site will not require an on-site wastewater treatment system. During operations, personnel will not be required to be manned at the site other than during grading and treatment activities. Due to the minimal presence of personnel onsite, a wastewater use will not be required onsite. A portable toilet is located north of the proposed location at an approved storage yard. Laramie Energy, LLC. Article 4 Section 203.O. – Floodplain Analysis Garfield County Administrative Review, 2020 Annex Cuttings Facility Article 4 Section 203.O. Floodplain Analysis Floodplain Analysis Narrative The Floodplain Analysis, Section 4-203(O) of the Garfield County Land Use and Development Code is not applicable to the proposed site. The subject use is not located within a floodplain. Floodplains are located well outside the vicinity of the site perimeter. The ACF Floodplain Map is located in the Maps and Plans tab. R 97 WT 6 S 1414 ELK ST., ROCK SPRINGS, WY 82901 RIFFIN & ASSOCIATES, INC. (307) 362-5028 FLOODPLAIN MAP EXISTING ROAD LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC. CC 697-15-54 ANNEX SWSE, SECTION 15, T.6 S., R.97 W., 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO FLOODPLAIN DRAWN: 6/29/2020 - DEH DRG JOB No. 21379 SCALE: 1" = 2000'GARFIELD CO., COLORADOQUADRANGLE CIRCLE DOT GULCH LONG POINT MOUNT BLAINE RED PINNACLE DEBEQUE WAGON TRACK RIDGE PROPOSED LOCATION CC 697-15-54 ANNEX REVISED: 7/7/2020 - DEH MISCELLANEOUS EDITS LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC CC 697-15-54 ANNEX CUTTINGS FACILITY RECLAMATION, REVEGETATION AND NOXIOUS WEED MANAGEMENT PLAN GARFIELD COUNTY LAND USE AND DEVELOPMENT CODE 2013 Cover photo: View of the existing CC 697-15-54 well pad. Prepared for: Laramie Energy, LLC Denver, CO Prepared by: WestWater Engineering, Inc. 2516 Foresight Cr. #1 Grand Junction, CO 81505 Leah Weckworth, Environmental Scientist/Project Manager October 2020 WestWater Engineering Page 1 of 13 October 2020 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Project Description At the request of Laramie Energy, LLC (Laramie), WestWater Engineering (WestWater) has prepared this reclamation, revegetation, and noxious weed management plan for the proposed CC 697-15-54 Annex Cuttings Facility that would be located on privately owned lands in Garfield County, Colorado. This document reports the results and analysis of the findings that are pertinent to Section 9-102-M of the Garfield County Land Use and Development Code (as amended) as it applies to this project. Laramie proposes to re-disturb the reclaimed CC 697-15-54 Annex Pad and utilize a portion of the existing CC 697-15-54 pad in Section 15, Township 6 South, Range 97 West in order to construct a new cuttings management facility for cuttings from wells drilled on nearby well pads (Figure 1). This project will occur entirely on an existing disturbance area, and no new disturbance would occur as a result of this project. This reclamation, revegetation and noxious weed management plan applies to the area disturbed for the cuttings facility. The current land uses include rangeland, wildlife habitat, and oil and gas development. 1.2 General Survey Information Pedestrian surveys of the project area were conducted by WestWater biologists on September 22, 2020 within 30 meters of the area proposed for re-disturbance (Figure 1). Surveys were conducted late in the growing season for noxious weeds. Identification of plant species was aided by using pertinent published field guides (Ackerfield 2015, Kershaw et al. 1998, Whitson et al. 2001, CWMA 2007, Weber and Wittmann 2012). Noxious weed locations were recorded with the aid of handheld global positioning system (GPS) receivers using NAD83 map datum, with all coordinate locations based on the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinate system in Zone 12. Mapped soil types, as published by the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA), were reviewed to determine the soil types and vegetation characteristics at the project site (NRCS 2020). 2.0 LANDSCAPE SETTING 2.1 Terrain The proposed cuttings facility would be located on the gently rolling hills on top of the Roan Plateau between Cascade Canyon to the west and McKay Gulch to the east. The area of proposed disturbance was previously utilized as an annex pad but has since been reseeded and recontoured to approximately it’s natural slope. 2.2 Soils The proposed site occupies a single soil type derived from on-site sandstone and shale (Table 1) (Natural Resources Conservation Service [NRCS] 2020). Table 1. Soils found in the project area. Map Unit Symbol Soil Series Description 56 Parachute-Irigul-Rhone association, 25 to 50 percent slopes Not prime farmland. This soil type is well drained with a high runoff class, and occurs on mountains. WestWater Engineering Page 2 of 13 October 2020 2.3 Vegetation There are three main vegetation community types present surrounding the project area: mountain shrublands, sagebrush shrublands, and aspen woodlands. The mountain shrublands are composed primarily of Utah serviceberry (Amelanchier utahensis) intermixed with mountain snowberry (Symphoricarpos oreophilus), Gambel oak (Quercus gambelii), and Mountain big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata ssp. wyomingensis). Sagebrush shrublands are composed primarily of Mountain sagebrush and mountain snowberry with an understory of native perennial grasses and forbs. North-facing slopes in the surrounding area support patchy aspen woodlands composed of quaking aspen (Populus tremuloides), mountain snowberry, and chokecherry (Prunus virgiiana). Common plants observed throughout the survey area are described in Table 2. Table 2. Common plants observed throughout the survey area. Common Name Scientific Name Abundance* Habitat Type Grasses and Grass-like plants Intermediate wheatgrass Thinopyrum intermedium xxx Reclaimed/disturbed area Kentucky bluegrass Poa pratensis xx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland Muttongrass Poa fendleriana xx Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrubland, aspen woodland Sandberg bluegrass Poa secunda xx Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrubland, aspen woodland Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus xx Reclaimed/disturbed area Smooth Brome Bromus inermis xxx Reclaimed/disturbed area Tall Wheatgrass Thynopyrum ponticum xx Reclaimed/disturbed area Forbs American vetch Vicia americana xxx Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrubland Arrowleaf balsamroot Balsamorhiza sagitta x Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrubland, aspen woodland Badlands mule-ears Scabrethia scabra xxx Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrublands Bluntseed sweetroot Osmorhiza depauperata xxx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland Canadian white violet Viola canadensis xxx Aspen woodland Common dandelion Taraxacum officinale xx Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrublands, aspen woodland Common yarrow Achillea millefolium xxx Reclaimed/disturbed area, mountain shrub, aspen woodland WestWater Engineering Page 3 of 13 October 2020 Table 2. Common plants observed throughout the survey area. Common Name Scientific Name Abundance* Habitat Type Lambstongue ragwort Senecio integerrimus xxx Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrublands Larkspur Delphinium sp. xxx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland Silvery lupine Lupinus argenteus xxx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland, sagebrush shrublands Stinging nettle Urtica dioica xx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland Western valerian Valeriana occidentalis xxx Mountain shrub Woods’ Rose Rosa woodsii xxx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland Shrubs/Trees Chokecherry Prunus virginiana xx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland Gambel’s oak Quercus gambelii xx Mountain shrub Mountain mahogany Cercocarpus montanus xxx Mountain shrub Mountain snowberry Symphoricarpos oreophilus xxx Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrublands Quaking aspen Populus tremuloides xxx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland Rocky mountain maple Acer glabrum xx Mountain shrub, aspen woodland Rubber rabbitbrush Ericameria nauseosa x Reclaimed/disturbed area, mountain shrub Utah serviceberry Amelanchier utahensis xxx Mountain shrub Mountain sagebrush Artemisa tridentata ssp. vaseyana x Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrublands Yellow rabbitbrush Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus x Mountain shrub, sagebrush shrublands * x= uncommon in project area. xx= moderate frequency throughout project area. xxx = common frequency throughout project area. WestWater Engineering Page 4 of 13 October 2020 3.0 REVEGETATION, RECLAMATION, & SOILS RECOMMENDATIONS Successful reclamation of the project area is dependent upon soil type and texture, slope gradient and aspect, proper weed control, available water, and revegetation with suitable plant species. Site-specific reclamation plans utilizing native species should be developed with a qualified reclamation contractor. Reclamation services using multiple seed bin range drills and specialized equipment are available and should be used for reclamation seeding projects. 3.1 Soil Preparation Compaction can reduce water infiltration and also hinder the penetration of the sprouting seed. Practices that will reduce compaction and prepare the seedbed include: scarification, tillage, or harrowing. In areas with slope greater than three percent or where laminar flows from runoff could affect reseeding success, imprinting of the seed bed is recommended. Imprinting can be in the form of dozer tracks or furrows perpendicular to the direction of slope. When utilizing hydro-seeding followed by mulching, imprinting should be done prior to seeding unless the mulch is to be crimped into the soil surface. If broadcast seeding and harrowing, imprinting should be done as part of the harrowing. Furrowing can be done by several methods, the simplest of which is to drill seed perpendicular to the direction of slope in a prepared bed. Other simple imprinting methods include deep hand raking and harrowing, always perpendicular to the direction of slope. 3.2 Soil Amendments The addition of soil amendments in rangeland reclamation projects can create more optimal growing conditions for non-native or invasive plant species, with which native plants compete poorly. There is potential that the use of soil amendments (fertilizer) containing nitrogen will disproportionately benefit undesirable annual plants (Perry et al. 2010). If the company determines the use of soil amendments to be beneficial, the type and rate should be based on results from lab analysis of soil samples collected at the site. A potentially beneficial alternative method to enhance reclamation success, particularly where there is poor or destroyed topsoil, is the application of vesicular-arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi (AMF). These fungi, mostly of the genus Glomus, are symbiotic with about 80 percent of all vegetation. Endo- mycorrhizal fungi are associated mostly with grasses and forbs and could be helpful in reclamation. In symbiosis, the fungi can increase water and nutrient transfer capacity of the host root system (Barrow and McCaslin 1995). Over-the-counter commercial products are available, and the best products should contain more than one fungus species. Compacted soils respond well to fossilized humic substances and by-products called humates. These humates, including humic and fulvic acids and humin were formed from pre-historic plant and animal deposits and can benefit reclamation efforts on compacted soils when applied as directed. 3.3 Seed Mixture The recommended seed mix below (Table 3) is adapted from the Bureau of Land Management’s Colorado River Valley Field Office seed menu recommendations (BLM 2013). The seed mix is well suited for the vegetation communities that occupied the site prior to disturbance. The mixes include perennial native grasses and forbs that should establish well, protect topsoil, and provide a basis for rehabilitation of the site upon reclamation. WestWater Engineering Page 5 of 13 October 2020 Table 3. Recommended seed menu for mixed mountain shrubland, including oakbrush. Common Name Scientific Name Variety Season Form PLS lbs/acre* Plant Both of the Following (20% Each, 40% Total) Bottlebrush Squirreltail Elymus elymoides, Sitanion hystrix VNS Cool Bunch 2.7 Bluebunch Wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria spicata, Agropyron spicatum Secar, P-7, Anatone, Goldar Cool Bunch 3.7 and Two of the Following (15% Each, 30% Total) Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. lanceolatus, Agropyron dasystachyum Critana, Bannock, Schwendimar Cool Sod- forming 2.5 Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus, Agropyron trachycaulum San Luis Cool Bunch 2.5 Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum [Agropyron] smithii Arriba, Rosana Cool Sod- forming 3.6 and One of the Following (10% Total) Big Bluegrass Poa ampla Sherman Cool Bunch 0.3 Canby Bluegrass Poa canbyi, P. secunda Canbar Cool Bunch 0.3 Muttongrass Poa fendleriana VNS Cool Bunch 0.3 and One of the Following (10% Total) Letterman Needlegrass Achnatherum [Stipa] lettermanii VNS Cool Bunch 1.7 Columbia Needlegrass Achnatherum [Stipa] nelsonii, Stipa columbiana VNS Cool Bunch 1.7 Green Needlegrass Nassella [Stipa] viridula Lodorm, Cucharas Cool Bunch 1.4 and One of the Following (10% Total) Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum [Oryzopsis] hymenoides Nezpar, Paloma, Rimrock Cool Bunch 1.9 Junegrass Koeleria macrantha, K. cristata VNS (North American origin) Cool Bunch 0.1 OPTIONAL: Any combination from the following species may be substituted for up to 10% of the above grasses. Silvery Lupine Lupinus argenteus VNS Arrowleaf Balsamroot Balsamorhize sagittata VNS Sulfur Flower Eriogonum umbellatum VNS Yarrow Achillea millifolium VNS Utah Sweetvetch Hedysarum boreale VNS Rocky Mountain Beeplant Cleome serrulata VNS Utah Serviceberry Amelanchior utahensis VNS Mountain Snowberry Symphoricarpus oreophilus VNS WestWater Engineering Page 6 of 13 October 2020 Table 3. Recommended seed menu for mixed mountain shrubland, including oakbrush. Common Name Scientific Name Variety Season Form PLS lbs/acre* Wood’s Rose Rosa woodsii VNS White Sage Artemisia ludoviciana VNS *Based on 60 pure live seeds (PLS) per square foot, drill-seeded. Double this rate (120 PLS per square foot) if broadcast or hydroseeded For best results and success, reseeding should be done in late autumn. The seed application rate should be doubled for broadcast applications such as hydroseeding or hand broadcasting of seed (CNHP 1998). 3.4 Seeding Methods Typically, the preferred seeding method would be with a multiple-seed-bin range drill with no soil preparation other than simple grading to slope and imprinting and water bars where applicable. This method would likely be the most economical method. Hydroseeding or hand-broadcast seeding at twice the recommended drill seed rate will be required for steep slopes or for smaller areas where drill seeding would be impractical or dangerous. Alternative seeding methods include, but are not limited to: • harrow with just enough soil moisture to create a rough surface, broadcast seed and re-harrow, preferably at a 90 degree angle to the first harrow; • hydroseeding; and • hand raking and broadcast followed by re-raking at a 90 degree angle to the first raking. These are not the only means of replanting the site. However, these methods have been observed to be effective in similar landscapes. After desired grasses are established and control of target weed species is successful, then shrubs, forbs, and trees can be planted without concern for herbicide damage. Few native forb seeds are available commercially as cultivars. Most are collected from natural populations. Native shrubs and forbs often do not establish well from seed, particularly when mixed with grasses. Past experience has shown that stabilizing the soil with grasses, accomplishing weed control, and then coming back to plant live, containerized woody species in copses has been the most cost-effective method for establishing the woody species component of the plant community. For sites where soil disturbance will be temporary, grasses should be seeded after construction activities cease and the equipment is removed from the site. After two years of controlling weeds (with herbicides) and allowing the grasses to become established, forbs and woody species should be inter-seeded or hand- planted to increase the diversity and value of the reclamation plantings. 3.5 Mulching Crimped straw mulch is the most cost effective and practical method of mulching areas prone to erosion after drill seeding this site. No mulching is recommended for areas that are hydroseeded. Potential detrimental effects of mulching include the introduction of weed species and the establishment of non- native cereal grains. Use of a certified weed-free sterile wheat hybrid straw mulch would limit these effects. On steeper slopes where crimping is impractical, wood straw mulch would be an alternative to crimped straw mulch that might stand up better to wind and rain that could blow or wash uncrimped straw mulch off of seeded areas. 3.6 BMPs Excelsior wattles or straw bales at the toe of steep slopes and water discharge points are appropriate to help control water velocity flowing off the alignment during storms and spring runoff. Terracing slopes WestWater Engineering Page 7 of 13 October 2020 near or exceeding 3:1 will reduce erosion, benefitting topsoil and seed retention and thereby improving revegetation success. 4.0 NOXIOUS WEEDS 4.1 Introduction to Noxious Weeds Most noxious weed species in Colorado were introduced, mostly from Eurasia, either unintentionally or as ornamentals that established wild populations. These plants compete aggressively with native vegetation and tend to spread quickly because the environmental factors that normally control them are absent. Disturbed soils, altered native vegetation communities, and areas with increased soil moisture often create prime conditions for weed infestations. The primary vectors that spread noxious weeds include humans, animals, water, and wind. The Colorado Noxious Weed Act (State of Colorado 2005) requires local governing bodies to develop noxious weed management plans. Both the State of Colorado and Garfield County maintain a list of plants that are considered to be noxious weeds (Garfield County 2020). The State of Colorado noxious weed list segregates noxious weed species based on priority for control: 1. List A species must be eradicated whenever detected. 2. List B species spread should be halted; may be designated for eradication in some counties. 3. List C species are widespread and the State will assist local jurisdictions which choose to manage those weeds. The Garfield County Weed Advisory Board has compiled a list of 40 plants considered to be noxious weeds within the county (Appendix A). The Garfield County Weed Advisory Board has duties to: 1. Develop a noxious weed list; 2. Develop a weed management plan for designated noxious weeds; and, 3. Recommend to the Board of County Commissioners that identified landowners submit an integrated weed management plan for their properties (Garfield County 2016). 4.2 Observations Weed species listed by the State of Colorado (2005) detected during surveys of the project area include common mullein (Verbascum thapsus) and houndstongue (Cynoglossum officinale). Houndstongue and common mullein locations are depicted on Figure 2. In areas where soil disturbances have created growing conditions that favor non-native vegetation, several unlisted nuisance weed species are present as well. These plants can impact revegetation efforts and cause financial losses due to decreased seeding success and associated costs of replanting. The presence of these plants creates increased competition for resources and can negatively affect desirable native plant species. 4.3 Integrated Weed Management Control of invasive species is a difficult task and requires intensive on-going control measures. Care must be taken to avoid negatively impacting desirable plant communities and inviting infestation by other pioneer invaders. Weed management is best achieved by employing varied methods over several growing seasons, including inventory (surveys), direct treatments, prevention through best management practices, monitoring of treatment efficacy, and subsequent detection efforts. Weed management is often limited to controlling existing infestations and prevention of further infestations, rather than eradication, but through effective weed management practices eradication can be possible in small to medium sized weed populations. WestWater Engineering Page 8 of 13 October 2020 Assessment of the existence and extent of noxious weeds in an area is essential for the development of an integrated weed management plan. This report provides an initial assessment of the occurrence of noxious weeds for the project area. In order to continue effective management of noxious weeds, further inventory and analysis is necessary to 1) determine the effectiveness of the past treatment strategies; 2) modify the treatment plan, if necessary; and 3) detect new infestations early, which would result in more economical and effective treatments. 4.4 Prevention of Noxious Weed Infestations Weed management can be costly, and heavy infestations may exceed the economic threshold for practical treatment. Prevention is an especially valuable and economical strategy for noxious weed management. Several simple practices should be employed to prevent weed infestations. The following practices will prevent infestation and thereby reduce costs associated with noxious weed control: • Prior to delivery to the site, all equipment and vehicles, including maintenance vehicles, should be thoroughly cleaned of soils from previous sites which may be contaminated with noxious weeds. • If working in sites with weed-seed contaminated soil, equipment should be cleaned of potentially seed-bearing soils and vegetative debris at the infested area prior to moving to uncontaminated terrain. • Avoid driving vehicles through areas where weed infestations exist. • Use of weed-seed-free reclamation materials such as mulch and seed. 4.5 Treatment and Control of Noxious Weed Infestations The treatment method and timing will be determined by the project proponent and their contracted licensed pesticide applicators. The recommendations provided in this report will be considered when developing annual treatment plans. General control methods for the species detected in the project area are provided for reference in Table 4. Table 4. General noxious weed control methods for species in the project area. Common Name Scientific Name USDA Symbol Type Control Methods Common mullein Verbascum thaspus VETH Biennial Hand grubbing (pulling), hoeing, tillage, herbicide application at rosette stage before flowering and bolting. Houndstongue Cynoglossum officinale CYOF Biennial Early Spring tillage before weed emergence in existing disturbance to a depth of 2 to 4 inches. Herbicide application in Spring while plants are small and, in the fall, bagging the seed heads. Bold = Garfield County List 4.6 Recommended Treatment Strategies The following treatment strategies are presented for reference. It is important to know whether the weed species being managed is an annual, biennial, or perennial to select strategies that effectively control and eliminate the target. Treatment strategies vary depending on plant type, which are summarized in Tables 5 and 6. Herbicides should not always be the first treatment of choice when other methods can be effectively employed. WestWater Engineering Page 9 of 13 October 2020 Table 5. Treatment Strategies for Annual and Biennial Noxious Weeds Target: Prevent Seed Production 1. Hand grub (pull), hoe, till, cultivate in rosette stage and before flowering or seed maturity. If flowers or seeds develop, cut and bag seed heads. 2. Cut roots with a spade 2”-3” below soil level. 3. Treat with herbicide in seedling, rosette or bolting stage, before flowering. 4. Mow biennials after bolting stage but before seed set. Mowing annuals will not prevent flowering but can reduce total seed production. (Sirota 2004) Table 6. Treatment Strategies for Perennials Target: Deplete nutrient reserves in root system, prevent seed production 1. Allow plants to expend as much energy from root system as possible. Do not treat when first emerging in spring but allow growth to bud/bloom stage. If seeds develop cut and bag if possible. 2. Herbicide treatment at bud to bloom stage or in the fall (recommended after August 15 when natural precipitation is present). In the fall plants draw nutrients into the roots for winter storage. Herbicides will be drawn down to the roots more efficiently at this time due to translocation of nutrients to roots rather than leaves. If the weed patch has been present for a long period of time another season of seed production is not as important as getting the herbicide into the root system. Spraying in fall (after middle August) will kill the following year’s shoots, which are being formed on the roots at this time. 3. Mowing usually is not recommended because the plants will flower anyway, rather, seed production should be reduced. Many studies have shown that mowing perennials and spraying the regrowth is not as effective as spraying without mowing. Effect of mowing is species dependent therefore it is imperative to know the species and its basic biology. Timing of application must be done when biologically appropriate, which is not necessarily convenient. 4. Tillage may or may not be effective or practical. Most perennial roots can sprout from pieces only 0.5 inch – 1.0 inch long. Clean machinery thoroughly before leaving the weed patch. 5. Hand pulling is generally not recommended for perennial species unless you know the plants are seedlings and not established plants. Hand pulling can be effective on small patches but is very labor intensive because it must be done repeatedly. (Sirota 2004) Some weeds, particularly annuals and biennials, can develop resistance to herbicides. The ability to quickly develop immunity to herbicides, especially when they are used incorrectly, makes it imperative to use the proper chemicals at the correct time in the specified concentration according to the product label. Excessive application, either in frequency or concentration, can result in top kill without significantly affecting the root system. Repeated excessive applications may result in resistant phenotypes. 4.7 Noxious Weed Management – Best Management Practices Construction: The following practices should be adopted for any construction project to reduce the costs of noxious weed control and aid in prevention efforts. The practices include: • Prior to delivery to the site, equipment should be cleaned of soils remaining from previous construction sites which may be contaminated with noxious weeds. • Equipment and material handling should be done on established sites to reduce the area and extent of soil compaction. • In all cases, temporary disturbance should be kept to an absolute minimum. WestWater Engineering Page 10 of 13 October 2020 • Topsoil, where present, should be segregated from deeper soils and replaced as topsoil on the final grade, a process known as live topsoil handling. • If stored longer than one growing season, topsoil stockpiles should be seeded with non-invasive sterile hybrid grasses. • Wetland vegetation, if encountered, should be live handled like sod, temporarily watered if necessary, and placed over excavated sub-soil relative to the position from which the wetland sod was removed. • Cut-off collars should be placed on all wetland and stream crossings to prevent back washing (seed vector) and to ensure that soil moisture conditions are not impacted after construction so that native plants can re-establish from the existing seed bank. • If working in weed infested sites, equipment should be cleaned of potentially seed-bearing soils and vegetative debris prior to moving to uncontaminated terrain. • After construction, disturbed areas outside the footprint of the development should be immediately reseeded with an appropriate seed mix. Herbicides: Many of the listed noxious weed species in Colorado can be controlled with commercially available herbicides. Annual and biennial weeds are best controlled at the pre-bud stage after germination or in the spring of the second year. Selective herbicides are recommended to minimize damage to desirable grass species. It is important that applicators adhere to concentrations specified on herbicide containers. Herbicides generally do not work better at higher concentrations. Herbicide failures are frequently related to high concentrations that result in top kill before the active ingredient can be transported to the roots through the nutrient translocation process. If directed on the herbicide label, a surfactant or other adjuvant should be added to the tank. Grazing: In the event grazing is allowed in the project area, it should be deferred in reclaimed areas until revegetation of desirable species has been successfully established and seeded plants have had opportunity to reproduce. Monitoring: Areas where noxious weed infestations are identified and treated should be inspected over time to ensure that control methods are working to reduce and suppress the identified infestation. The sites should be monitored until the infestations are eliminated. These inspections can then be used to prioritize future weed control efforts. 4.8 Commercial Applicator Recommendations A certified commercial pesticide applicator licensed in rangeland and/or right-of-way/industrial weed control (depending on site characteristics) is a necessary choice for herbicide control efforts. An applicator has the full range of knowledge, skills, equipment, and experience desired when dealing with tough noxious weeds. In addition, the purchase and use of restricted use herbicides requires a Colorado pesticide applicator license. WestWater Engineering Page 11 of 13 October 2020 5.0 REFERENCES Ackerfield, J. 2015. Flora of Colorado. Botanical Research Institute of Texas, Fort Worth, Texas. Barrow, J. R., and Bobby D. McCaslin. 1995. Role of microbes in resource management in arid ecosystems. In: Barrow, J. R., E. D. McArthur, R. E. Sosebee, and Tausch, R. J., comps. 1996. Proceedings: shrubland ecosystem dynamics in a changing environment. General Technical Report, INT-GTR-338, Ogden, Utah: U.S. Department of Agriculture, U.S. Forest Service, Intermountain Resource Station, 275 pp. BLM. 2013. Revised Revegetation Seed Mix Menus, CRVFO Energy Team. U.S. Bureau of Land Management, Colorado River Valley Field Office. Silt, Colorado. CWMA. 2007. S. Anthony, T. D’Amato, A. Doran, S. Elzinga, J. Powell, I. Schonle, K. Uhing. Noxious Weeds of Colorado, Ninth Edition. Colorado Weed Management Association, Centennial. Garfield County. 2016. Garfield County Vegetation Management and Garfield County Weed Advisory Board. Garfield County Noxious Weed Management Plan, Adopted by Board of County Commissioners Feb. 16, 2016. Garfield County. 2020. Vegetation Management Section – Noxious Weed List. Available online: http://www.garfield-county.com/vegetation-management/noxious-weed-list.aspx. Rifle, CO. Kershaw, L., A. MacKinnon, and J. Pojar. 1998. Plants of the Rocky Mountains. Lone Pine Publishing, Auburn, Washington. NRCS. 2020. Web Soil Survey, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resource Conservation Service, URL: http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov Perry, L.G., D.M. Blumenthal, T.A. Monaco, M.W. Paschke, and E.F. Redente. 2010. Immobilizing nitrogen to control plant invasion. Oecologia: 163:12-24. Sirota, Judith M. 2004. Best management practices for noxious weeds of Mesa County. Colorado State University, Cooperative Extension Tri River Area, Grand Junction, Colorado. URL: http://www.coopext.colostate.edu/TRA/Weeds/weedmgmt.html State of Colorado. 2005. Rules pertaining to the administration and enforcement of the Colorado Noxious Weed Act, 35-5-1-119, C.R.S. 2003. Department of Agriculture, Plant Industry Division, Denver, 78 pp. Weber, William A., and Ronald C. Wittmann. 2012. Colorado Flora, Western Slope. Fourth Edition, University Press of Colorado, Boulder. Whitson, T. D. (editor), L. C. Burrill, S. A. Dewey, D. W. Cudney, B. E. Nelson, R. D. Lee and R. Parker. 2001. Weeds of the West – 9th edition. Western Society of Weed Science in cooperation with Cooperative Extension Services, University of Wyoming, Laramie. WestWater Engineering Page 12 of 12 WestWater Engineering Appendix A-1 May 2018     GARFIELD COUNTY NOXIOUS WEED MANAGEMENT PLAN       Adopted by Board of County Commissioners February 16, 2016                                                      Prepared by Garfield County Vegetation Management and the Garfield County Weed Advisory Board i GARFIELD COUNTY NOXIOUS WEED MANAGEMENT PLAN TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I: Introduction 1.01 Executive Summary ....................................................................... 1 1.02 Purpose of the Plan ..........................................................................1 1.03 Enactment Authority ........................................................................2 1.04 Garfield County Noxious Weed List ...............................................2 SECTION II: General Information 2.01 Definitions........................................................................................6 2.02 Importation and Cultivation of County and State-Listed Noxious Weeds.............................................................................................11 2.03 Integrated Management – Treatment Methods ..............................11 2.04 Cost Share Program .......................................................................14 2.05 Description of Designated Noxious Weeds ...................................15 2.06 Identification of Native and Noxious Thistles ...............................43 SECTION III: Jurisdictional Overview of Areas of Infestation 3.01 Overview ........................................................................................45 3.02 County Land...................................................................................45 3.03 State Land ......................................................................................45 3.04 Federal Land ..................................................................................46 3.05 Municipalities ................................................................................47 3.06 Unincorporated Battlement Mesa ..................................................48 3.07 Railroad..........................................................................................49 SECTION IV: Implementation of Weed Management Plan 4.01 Objectives and Goals .....................................................................50 4.02 Prevention and Detection ...............................................................51 4.03 Garfield County Gravel Purchase Guidelines ................................52 4.04 Education and Awareness ..............................................................52 4.05 Land Stewardship...........................................................................53 4.06 Revegetation .................................................................................53 4.07 Requirements (Revegetation Plan, Soil Plan & Security) .............54 4.08 Reclamation Standards...................................................................55 4.09 Mapping and Inventory..................................................................57 ii SECTION V: Enforcement 5.01 Compliance: Private Lands ............................................................58 5.02 Compliance: Public Lands .............................................................62 5.03 County Rights-of-Way...................................................................65 SECTION VI: Plan Evaluation 6.01 Plan Evaluation ..............................................................................66 APPENDIX A: Noxious Weed Fact Sheets 1 SECTION I INTRODUCTION 1.01 Executive Summary A. The health of our environment is a high priority for residents of Garfield County. The health and productivity of natural plant communities and agricultural lands is threatened by the introduction of numerous invasive alien plants. Without an effective integrated weed management plan these aggressive plants will continue to infest and degrade the lands we value so highly. B. Rapid expansion of noxious weeds is an obstacle to maintaining healthy ecosystems and restoring disturbed native plant communities and habitats. Because noxious weeds tend to be highly invasive and harmful to native vegetation, they can quickly dominate many sites and often cause permanent damage to plant communities. Estimates indicate that 100 million acres of private, state, and federal land are infested with noxious weeds in just 11 western states. This is occurring in both disturbed and relatively undisturbed areas. C. The intent of the Colorado Noxious Weed Act and the goal of the Garfield County Weed Advisory Board is to curb the degradation of our valued environment by implementing an Integrated Weed Management Plan designed to stop the spread of noxious weeds. D. Management of weeds may seem overwhelming, but through developing partnerships at all levels – local, regional and national – we hope to achieve our weed management goals. The challenge for all involved is to develop management systems, support and direction for the prevention of the spread of weeds before the situation becomes even more serious and economically unfeasible. 1.02 Purpose of the Plan A. The purpose of the Plan is to provide guidelines for managing designated noxious weeds which represent a threat to the continued economic, environmental and agricultural value of lands in Garfield County. This plan provides for the implementation of the Colorado Noxious Weed Act by detailing integrated management options for designated noxious weeds. Options include education, preventive measures, good stewardship, and control techniques. B. The intent is to incorporate those options that are the least environmentally damaging and are practical, timely and economically feasible. It is the responsibility of all landowners to use integrated methods to manage noxious weeds, and the responsibility of local governing bodies to ensure that these plants are managed on public and private lands. 2 1.03 Enactment Authority A. The Colorado Weed Management Act (C.R.S. 35-5.5-101) was signed into state law in 1990 and last amended in 2014. Now known as the Colorado Noxious Weed Act, it states that noxious weeds pose a threat to the natural resources of Colorado. B. This plan is designed in accordance with the statutory provisions of the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. The Act directs the Board of County Commissioners (BOCC) of each county to adopt a Noxious Weed Management Plan for all unincorporated land within its jurisdiction. C. Municipalities shall adopt a weed management plan for all lands within their boundaries. The county and municipalities may cooperate, through an intergovernmental agreement, for the powers and authorities of the act. D. The Act directs the Board of County Commissioners to appoint a Weed Advisory Board, whose power and duties are: 1. Develop a noxious weed list. 2. Develop a Weed Management Plan for managing designated noxious weeds. 3. Declare noxious weeds and any state noxious weeds designated by rule to be subject to integrated management. 4. Recommend to the Board of County Commissioners that identified landowners be required to submit an integrated weed management plan for managing designated noxious weeds on their properties. 1.04 Colorado and Garfield County Noxious Weed Lists The Colorado Department of Agriculture’s Noxious Weed Program has three noxious weed lists: A, B and C, plus a Watch List. A. Species are assigned to one of three State weed lists through the rule-making authority of the Department of Agriculture. The Commissioner of the Department of Agriculture uses a mandatory administrative process to create the lists, subject to the public notice and publication requirements of the State Administrative Procedure Act. B. The Colorado Noxious Weed Act requires the Commissioner to review and revise the lists at least once every 3 years, using this public process. Updated State weed lists and notices of departmental rule-making are available electronically through the State of Colorado’s websites: www.state.co.us; www.ag.state.co.us and www.sos.state.co.us and through the Office of the Garfield County Vegetation Manager. C. State A, B and C Lists. The Colorado Department of Agriculture has determined that “an organized and coordinated effort must be made to stop the spread of noxious weeds.” (C.R.S. 35-5.5-102). The rules designate and classify noxious weeds into four categories: 3 1. The State’s A list is made up of rare noxious weed species that are subject to eradication, as a matter of law, wherever they are detected in the State, including Garfield County. 2. The B list includes species that have differing distributions throughout the State. Specified populations of B list species are subject to eradication, containment, or suppression in identified areas of the state, including portions of Garfield County. 3. The State’s C list includes weed species that are widespread and well-established, for which the State recommends but does not require control, although Garfield County’s Weed Management Plan may require control. 4. The Watch List was established in 2011 and is non-regulatory and advisory only. It is designed to increase awareness of new invasive species to the State. D. Garfield County follows the dictates of the State’s rules as to which species on the A and B lists must be eradicated, contained or suppressed and manages those species and the species on its own locally-designated list in accordance with the Weed Management Plan contained in the following Sections II-V and the State Department of Agriculture’s administrative rules. 1. The County’s management plan for species on the State’s lists is subject to review every 3 years. 2. The Board of County Commissioners may also adopt a revised Weed Management Plan that includes designated noxious weeds not previously included on any list. E. In addition to the weeds designated on the State’s A, B and C lists, the BOCC has the authority to declare plants as noxious weeds if the plant meets one or more statutorily defined criteria (C.R.S. 35-5.5-104 (16), 35-5.5-107, and 35-5.5-108 (3)). 1. The BOCC can also declare those weed species and the weeds on the State’s weed lists to be subject to integrated management within unincorporated Garfield County. 2. The County list is subject to change as the State amends the A, B and C lists and as the BOCC declares species not included on the State’s list as noxious. F. Garfield County Noxious Weed List as recommended by the Garfield County Weed Advisory Board on February 24, 2014, with Colorado designations listed as A, B or C or NL (Not Listed by the State). The list is current as of adoption of this regulation by the BOCC. Common Name Absinth wormwood Scientific Name Artemisia absinthium Colorado Weed List B Black henbane Hyoscyamus niger B Bouncing Bet Saponaria officinalis B Bull thistle Cirsium vulgare B Canada thistle Cirsium arvense B 4 Chicory Cichorium intybus C Chinese clematis Clematis orientalis B Common burdock Arctium minus C Common tansy Tanacetum vulgare B Common teasel Dipsacus fullonum B Corn chamomile Anthemis arvensis B Curl y dock Rumex crispus NL Cutleaf teasel Dipsacus laciniatus B Cypress spurge Euphorbia cyparissias A Dalmatian toadflax Linaria dalmatica B Dame’s rocket Hesperis matronalis B Diffuse knapweed Centaurea diffusa B Hoar y cress Cardaria draba B Houndstongue Cynoglossum officinale B Jointed goat grass Aegilops cylindrica B Leaf y spurge Euphorbia esula B Mayweed chamomile Anthemis cotula B Meadow knapweed Centaurea nigrescens A Mediterranean sage Salvia aethiopsis A Musk thistle Carduus nutans B Myrtle spurge Euphorbia myrsinites A Oxeye dais y Leucanthemum vulgare B Perennial pepperweed Lepidium latifolium B Plumeless thistle Carduus acanthoides B Poison hemlock Conium maculatum C Purple loosestrife Lythrum salicaria A Russian knapweed Acroptilon repens B Russian olive Elaeagnus angustifolia B Salt cedar Tamarix parviflora B Salt cedar Tamarix ramosissima B Scentless chamomile Tripleurospernum perforata B Scotch thistle Onopordum acanthium B Spotted knapweed Centaurea stoebe B Sulfur cinquefoil Potentilla recta B Yellow starthistle Centaurea solstitialis A Yellow toadflax Linaria vulgaris B G. The BOCC has the statutory authority to adopt standards that are more stringent than those set by the State Commissioner of Agriculture. 5 1. The Weed Advisory Board will request such action of the BOCC if and when a species presents a local threat which requires such action. 2. The BOCC also has the authority to apply to the State Commissioner of Agriculture for a Waiver of Compliance if and when the State Department of Agriculture’s mandate that a species be eradicated in a portion of or all of Garfield County is deemed unfeasible. 3. If the Commissioner of Agriculture, in consultation with the BOCC, determines that the most cost-effective manner to eradicate designated noxious weeds is for the state to implement an eradication program, the Commissioner may implement such a program through the Department of Agriculture (C.R.S. 35-5.5- 108.5(3)(d)). 6 SECTION II GENERAL INFORMATION 2.01 Definitions Act: The Colorado Noxious Weed Act, Title 35 C.R.S., Article 5.5, as amended. Adjacent: Having a common boundary that meets or touches at some point. Aggressive: Fast growing, tending to spread quickly. Agriculture: Uses involving the cultivation of land, production of crops, and/or the keeping of livestock and the preparation of these products for man’s use and disposal. Alien Plant: A plant species that is not indigenous to the State of Colorado. Annual: A plant that lasts one growing season, completing its life cycle from seed to seed in one year. Biennial: A plant that lives in 2 calendar years. The first year is usually a vegetative form, such as a rosette of leaves. The second year the plant grows a flowering shoot, sets seeds and dies. Biological Control: The deliberate introduction of living agents such as insects, vertebrate predators, grazing animals and plant diseases to reduce a noxious weed population. Biological Management: The use of organisms to disrupt the growth of noxious weeds. Bolt: To flower or produce seeds prematurely or develop a flowering stem from a rosette. Bract: A reduced or modified leaf often surrounding the base of a flower. Browse: Tender shoots, twigs and leaves of trees and shrubs fit for food for wildlife. Chemical Management: The use of agents or plant growth regulators to disrupt or inhibit the growth of noxious weeds. Commissioners: The Garfield County Board of Commissioners. 7 Containment: “…maintaining an intensively managed buffer zone that separates infested regions, where suppression activities prevail, from largely uninfested regions, where eradication activities prevail.” (C.R.S. 35-5.5-103(11.7)(b)). County: The unincorporated areas of Garfield County. Cultural Management: Methods or management practices which favor the growth of desirable plants over noxious weeds, including maintaining optimum fertility and plant moisture status in an area, planting at optimum density and spatial arrangement in an area, and planting species most suited to a particular area. Designated Noxious Weed: A non-native, invasive plant or plant parts that are identified as a threat to native plant communities and included on the Garfield County Noxious Weed List. Desirable Plants: Plants considered to be advantageous and beneficial to the environmental viability of the County. Elimination: Removing and destroying live plants of List A or List B species designated for eradication and preventing seed production until the seed source is depleted; considered the first step in the eradication process. Eradication: “…reducing the reproductive success of a noxious weed species or specified noxious weed population in largely uninfested regions to zero and permanentl y eliminating the species or population within a specified period of time. Once all specified weed populations are eliminated or prevented from reproducing, intensive efforts continue until the seed bank is exhausted.” (C.R.S. 35-5.5-103(11.7)(a)). Escaped Ornamental: A plant originally intended for horticultural or landscape planting that has escaped its intended boundaries. Exotic Plant: A plant that is not a regular member of the native or natural community in which it is found. Forb: A broad-leafed, non-woody plant other than grass that dies back to the ground after each growing season. Forage: Food for animals, especially when taken by browsing or grazing. 8 Garfield County Weed Advisory Board: A group of individuals appointed by the BOCC to advise on matters of management of noxious weeds. Herbaceous: Applies to plants of soft texture whose stems die back to the ground after each growing season; green and leaf-like, not woody. Infestation: Growth of an undesirable plant which has become harmful or bothersome. There are 3 types of infestation: 1. Heavy: Dense; 25-100% canopy cover. 2. Moderate: Widely scattered plants; 5-25% canopy cover. 3. Light: Occasional plant per acre; less than 5% canopy cover. Insectary: The Colorado Department of Agriculture Biological Pest Control Division operates the Palisade Insectary, which imports, rears, establishes and colonizes new beneficial organisms for control of specific plant and insect pests. Integrated Management: The planning and implementation of a coordinated program utilizing a variety of methods for managing noxious weeds, in order to achieve desirable plant communities. Such methods may include but are not limited to education, preventive measures, good stewardship and biological, cultural, herbicide and mechanical management. Invasive: Aggressive, capable of invading a plant community and creating a monoculture. Invasive Ornamental: A plant originally intended for horticultural or landscape planting that has escaped its intended boundaries and is capable of invading a plant community and creating a monoculture. Landowner: Any owner of record of state, municipal or private property including an owner of any easement, right-of-way, or estate within the county. List A Species: “…rare noxious weed species with discrete statewide distributions that are subject to eradication wherever detected statewide in order to protect neighboring lands and the state as a whole.” (C.R.S. 35-5.5-108(2)(a)(I)). List B Species: “…noxious weed species with discrete statewide distribution that are subject to eradication, containment or suppression in portions of the state designated b y the commissioner in order to stop the continued spread of these species.” (C.R.S. 35-5.5- 108(2)(a)(II)). 9 List C Species: “…widespread and well-established noxious weed species for which control is recommended but not required by the state, although local governing bodies may require management.” (C.R.S. 35-5.5-108(2)(a)(III)). Lobe: A division or segment of a leaf or other plant part, especially a rounded one. Local Noxious Weed: Any plant of local importance which has been declared an invasive or undesirable plant by the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners. Management: Any activity that presents a plant from establishing, reproducing or dispersing itself. Management Plan: A plan developed by the Garfield County Weed Advisory Board and implemented by the BOCC in order to control the spread of noxious weeds. Mechanical Management: Methods or management practices that physically disrupt plant growth, including tilling, mowing, burning, flooding, mulching, hand-pulling, shoveling, hoeing and chopping. Monoculture: A single homogeneous crop without diversity. Native Plant: A plant species that is indigenous to a particular locale. Noxious Weed: An alien plant or parts of an alien plant that has been designated as being invasive and undesirable and has been declared a noxious weed by the Garfield County Weed Advisory Board and meets one or more of the following criteria: 1. Aggressively invades or is physically destructive to economic crops or native plant communities. 2. Detrimental directly or indirectly to the environmentally sound management of natural or agricultural ecosystems. 3. Poisonous to livestock. 4. Carrier of detrimental insects, diseases or parasites. Noxious Weed Management: The planning and implementation of an integrated program to manage undesirable or problematic plant species. Ornamental: A decorative, aggressive, non-native plant often sold through nurseries, seed catalogues, or spread through seed collection. A threat to native plant species because it has no natural predators and thus competes against the plants of the natural ecosystem. 10 Perennial: A plant that grows for 3 years or more; usually flowers and produces fruit each year. The above-ground part of the plant may die, but new growth comes from the roots or crown each spring. Petiole: A slender stem that supports the blade of a foliage leaf. Rhizome: An elongated subterranean plant stem that produces shoots above and roots below, and is distinguished from a true root by possessing buds, nodes and scale-like leaves. Rosette: A cluster of closely-crowded leaves in a compact circle, usually at ground level. State Noxious Weed: Any weed identified by the Colorado Commissioner of Agriculture by rule after notifying and consulting with the State Noxious Weed Advisory Committee. Subject Lands: All public and private lands within unincorporated Garfield County with the exception of: 1. Any municipal property owned or leased to an incorporated municipality. 2. Any land managed or administered by a federal agency. Suppression: “…reducing the vigor of noxious weed populations within an infested region, decreasing the propensity of noxious weeds species to spread to surrounding lands, and mitigating the negative effects of noxious weed populations on infested lands.” (C.R.S. 35-5.5-103(11.7)(c)). Surfactant: A compound that improves the emulsifying, dispersing, spreading, wetting or other surface modifying properties of liquids. Watch List: The State Watch List, which is advisory and for educational purposes, includes plant species that have been determined to pose a potential threat to the agricultural productivity and environmental values of the lands of the state. Weed Inspector: The agent or employee appointed to conduct the duties and functions as defined under this Plan. Weed Office: The office of the Weed Inspector, or Vegetation Manager, out of which all noxious weed administration and enforcement activities are conducted. 11 Wildflower: The flower of a wild or uncultivated plant or the plant bearing it. Xeriscape: Landscaping with water conservation as a major objective. 2.02 Importation and Cultivation of County and State Listed Noxious Weeds. Persons are prohibited from importing seeds, propagating plant parts or live plants and cultivating Garfield County and State of Colorado listed weed species within Garfield County except as provided for in C.R.S. 35-5.5-104.5(a). All listed species are non- native and problematic in Garfield County and the State of Colorado. A. Threat of Escaped Ornamentals. Most plants used for landscaping purposes cannot proliferate outside the cultivated environment of the home garden. Certain exotic plants and seeds were imported to the United States for their aggressive growth habits, xeriscape potential or re-seeding capabilities. 1. The escaped ornamentals include bouncing bet, chicory, cypress spurge, the chamomiles, Dalmatian toadflax, dame’s rocket, myrtle spurge, oxeye daisy, purple loosestrife, Russian olive, yellow toadflax. The very traits that make these plants desirable for a garden or landscape may also enable them to thrive outside cultivated areas and become fierce competitors with native vegetation. 2. Because they exist here without the presence of any natural predators, these plants have the ability to spread extensively and pose a severe threat to the delicate balance of our native ecosystems. B. Since various invasive ornamental plants are attractive and establish themselves quickly, they are popular with landscapers and gardeners and may be purchased through certain nurseries in Colorado, in seed catalogues and on the Internet. 1. It is imperative to educate landscape architects, gardeners and nursery growers about the need to eliminate such plants from their landscape plans. Otherwise these plants will inevitably escape from the cultivated garden and jeopardize natural wildflower and plant communities. 2. Native grasses and forbs, as well as agricultural plantings, cannot compete with invasive ornamental plants for nutrients, sunlight and water. As a result, biologically diverse mountain meadows, grasslands, wetlands and agricultural lands are in danger of being overrun by non-native invasive ornamental plants. 2.03 Integrated Weed Management – Treatment Methods An integrated approach to noxious weed management is important because no single technique will be effective. A. Prevention should always be practiced and is effective on all species of weeds. It is accomplished through good land stewardship, planting weed-free seed, avoiding planting invasive weed species, using weed-free seed mulch and erosion control, using clean equipment and taking legal measures such as quarantines and weed laws. 12 1. Cultural management includes methods or management practices which favor the growth of desirable plants over noxious weeds, including maintaining optimum fertility and plant moisture status in an area, planting at optimum density and spatial arrangement in an area, and planting species most suited to a particular area. Techniques include dense seeding, fertilization, mulching, careful irrigation practices, sensible grazing regimes and improved land management practices. 2. Mechanical management methods or practices that physically disrupt plant growth and include tilling, mowing, burning, flooding, mulching, hand-pulling, shoveling, hoeing and chopping. Mechanical methods are most effective for annual and biennial weeds and less effective for perennials. Equipment should be cleaned thoroughly before moving to uninfested areas to prevent the spread of weeds. 3. Biological management involves the use of organisms such as insects and animals to disrupt the growth of noxious weeds. It rarely provides 100% control and must be incorporated with other methods for successful management. Insect species developed to mitigate specific noxious plants are available to the public free of charge from the Colorado Department of Agriculture Conservation Services Division, Biological Control Program, 750 37.8 Rd., Palisade, CO 81526; 866- 324-2963 or 970-464-7916. 4. Herbicide application. It is extremely important to treat small infestation of certain weeds (List A and B species to be eradicated) as soon as possible. Herbicides are most effective when sprayed at specific stages during the life cycle of the weed. To ensure that small infestations of noxious weeds are controlled or eradicated effectively, it is extremely important to take immediate action on certain weed patches. B. The optimum method or methods for weed management will vary depending on a number of site-specific variables: 1. Factors to be considered should include soil type and stability, grade, associated vegetation, existing and proposed land use, proximity to water, availability of irrigation water, weed type and stage of growth and severity of infestation. 2. The management method selected should be the least environmentally damaging, yet practical and reasonable in achieving the desired results. 3. When considering weed management on a property, work on the areas that may transport weed seeds. These areas include ditches, streams, roadsides, driveways, trails, livestock-concentrated areas and equipment storage sites. C. The Colorado Department of Agriculture has prepared fact sheets for most State- listed noxious weeds. They feature detailed descriptions and photographs of the plants, as well as integrated management for each species. (See Appendix A). D. Herbicide application. It is the County’s philosophy to minimize the use of herbicides and impacts to desirable vegetation. However, for some species of noxious weeds 13 herbicide application is the only effective method of control. It is extremely important to treat small infestation of certain weeds (List A and B species to be eradicated) as soon as possible. To ensure that small infestations of noxious weeds are controlled or eradicated effectively, it is extremely important to take immediate action on certain weed patches. The County uses hand gun, hand-held or backpack sprayers, utility task vehicles or truck-mounted equipment for selective spot spraying. 1. No Spray Areas. Anyone living adjacent to a County right-of-way who does not want spraying in front of their property can call the Garfield County Vegetation Department and request it be listed as a no-spray property. However, the property owner is responsible for elimination of noxious weeds. Only noxious weeds on the A and B State and County Lists need to be controlled. Land owners must dig up or mow any noxious weeds before they go to seed. If weeds are not properly managed, the County must resume spraying in order to comply with the Colorado Noxious Weed Act (C.R.S 35-5.5-101). Owners of organic farms or who have pesticide-sensitive crops can also call the County to request no-spray listing. Landowners may place “No Spray” signs on their property adjacent to County rights-of-way. Signs should be readable from the roadside and not impact county road maintenance operations. 2. Registry of Pesticide-Sensitive Persons. The registry is maintained by the State of Colorado under the regulatory requirements of the Pesticide Applications Act. Notification to registered individuals must be given in accordance with C.R.S 35- 10-112, and Part 12 of the PAA rules. Pesticide applicators are required to notify registered individuals prior to application of pesticides on adjacent properties. For information about the registry, call the Colorado Department of Agriculture, 303- 239-4146. 3. Source Water Protection. A Source Water Protection Plan was developed in 2013 for community drinking water systems in Garfield County. A current list of systems covered under the Source Water Protection Plan is available through the Garfield County Public Health Department. The plan prioritizes source water protection concerns and identifies local source water management approaches that can be implemented to protect the source of drinking water for these communities. It delineates areas around these communities as source water protection areas. Pesticide application was identified a potential source of water contamination. Garfield County Vegetation Management is committed to using best management practices when applying herbicides to control noxious weeds. These practices include following label directions and selective spot spraying to ensure direct treatment of noxious weeds and protection of native vegetation and water resources. 4. Changes in herbicide registrations occur constantly. The herbicide label is the legal document on herbicide use. Read and follow all directions carefully. The 14 use of an herbicide in a manner not consistent with the label can lead to injury of crops, humans, animals and the environment. 5. Specific chemical recommendations are available from the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department and/or licensed applicators and are not listed in the Plan. Before using any chemical, thoroughly read the label. Any use of an herbicide inconsistent with the label is neither legal nor recommended. E. The optimum method or methods for weed management will vary depending on a number of site-specific variables. Factors to be considered should include soil type and stability, grade, associated vegetation, existing and proposed land use, proximity to water, availability of irrigation water, weed type and stage of growth and severity of infestation. F. The management method selected should be the least environmentally damaging, yet practical and reasonable in achieving the desired results. When considering weed management on a property, work on the areas that may transport weed seeds, including ditches, streams, roadsides, driveways, trails, livestock-concentrated areas and equipment storage sites. 2.04 Cost Share Program Garfield County offers two cost-share programs – the noxious weed cost-share program and the tamarisk/Russian olive program. A. The noxious weed program is a partnership between the three local Conservation Districts based in Glenwood Springs and Garfield Count y. 1. Applications are reviewed and approved by a review committee of representatives of the Conservation Districts and the Weed Advisory Board. 2. The program provides partial reimbursement to private landowners for noxious weed treatments on lands within Garfield County. For current program information, go to www.mountsopriscd.org, phone 970-945-5495, ext. 105; www.garfield- county.com, phone 970-945-1377, ext. 4305. B. The tamarisk/Russian olive program is administered through the Garfield County Vegetation Management office and is designed to partially assist landowners with management of tamarisk and Russian olive through the coordination of cutting crews and treatment methods. For more information, contact Garfield County Vegetation Management, 970-945-1377, ext. 4305. 15 2.05 Description of Designated Noxious Weeds GARFIELD COUNTY NOXIOUS WEED LIST The Garfield County Weed Advisory Board encourages all county residents to be knowledgeable about noxious weeds. Below are general descriptions of the County’s listed noxious weeds. Locations of some weeds are provided in general terms under their descriptions. Not all locations are listed. ABSINTH WORMWOOD (Artemesia absinthium) Description: A member of the Sunflower family native to Eurasia, the Middle East and Africa. A long-lived perennial. Reproduces from seed. Grows to roughly 3 feet tall and 2 feet across, with silver-grey leaves and yellow flowers. Smells strongly of sage. Comments: It is commonly found in disturbed sites with moist soils. Considered poor forage for all but sheep and will taint milk of cows. Location: Common between Glenwood Springs and Carbondale. Infested sites include the Missouri Heights and Crystal Springs areas. Also spread to South Canyon, Peach Valley and Rulison. Cultural Control: Cultural controls are possible but time-consuming and expensive. Complete removal of any seedling or newly established plants by continual hand-pulling is possible. Chemical Control: Treat when plant is 12 inches tall through flowering growth stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Absinth wormwood (Appendix A). BLACK HENBANE (Hyoscyamus niger) Description: A member of the Nightshade family originally introduced from Europe as an ornamental and medicinal herb. Annual or biennial; reproduces from seed. Recognized by its rosettes, shallowly-lobed leaves with sticky hairs and brownish-yellow flowers with purple veins and a distinctly unpleasant smell. Grows up to 3 feet. 16 Comments: Poisonous due to alkaloids in all parts of the plant. It is important to protect threatened areas from over-grazing. Location: Relatively rare. Found in Gibson Gulch west of Divide Creek; reported just west of the West Fork of Stewart Gulch on the Roan Plateau near the Rio Blanco County line. Mechanical Control: Complete removal of any seedling or newly established plants by continual hand-pulling. Chemical Control: Treat plants in spring to early summer prior to seed production, in rosette stage. Follow up treatments are recommended to pick up missed or late bolting plants. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Black henbane (Appendix A). BOUNCING BET (Saponaria officinalis) Description: Member of the Pink family originally introduced from Europe as a garden plant. Perennial. Reproduces from seed and rhizomatous swollen nodes. Stout oppositely branching and leaved stems. Leaves smooth and narrow. Flowers have 5 light pink to white petals with notches at the end. Comments: Grows most commonly in wet areas which may restrict the use of certain herbicides. Poisonous. Location: No Name, Glenwood Springs and New Castle. Cultural Control: Eliminate seed production while depleting nutrient reserves in the roots. Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over-grazing. Chemical Control: Treat at bolting to bud-growth stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Bouncing Bet (Appendix A). 17 BULL THISTLE (Cirsium vulgare) Description: Member of the Sunflower family introduced from Eurasia as a seed contaminant. Biennial. Reproduces from seed. Only thistle species with leaves that are prickly hair above and cottony below. Heads hairy with composite purple flowers. Comments: Commonly found in dry to moist environments in full sun. Thrives in highly disturbed, nitrogen-rich, gravelly to clay-textured soils. Cultural Control: Prevention is the most effective control. Maintain healthy plant communities and monitor for new infestations. Limit seed production. Plants with buds or flowers should be immediately disposed of or destroyed. Biological Control: Urophora stylata, a fly predator lays its eggs in the seed head, then larvae consume the seeds. Crown weevils, Trichosirocalus horridus, lay eggs in rosettes and consume the seeds. Chemical Control: Treat rosettes in spring or fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Bull thistle (Appendix A). CANADA THISTLE (Cirsium arvense) Description: A member of the Aster family introduced from Europe. Creeping perennial. Reproduces from seeds and fleshy horizontal roots. Grows 1-4 feet tall. Flowers pink to purple. Leaves lance-shaped, spine-topped lobes. The root is extensive and creeping, forming colonies. Comments: One of the most widespread and economically damaging noxious weeds in Colorado. Infestations are found in cultivated fields, riparian areas, pastures, rangeland, forests, lawns and gardens, roadsides and in waste areas. Because of its seeding habits, vigorous growth and extensive underground root system, control and eradication are difficult. Location: Common in Garfield County. 18 Cultural Control: Best managed through integrated management system that emphasizes competitive, desirable plants. Maintain soil fertility and moisture at optimum levels to favor grass growth. Biological Control: It is best to release a complex of insects that will stress different parts of the plant: Ceutorhyncus litura weevil that stresses the crown of the plant; Urophora carduii, a stem and shoot gall fly; Cassidia rubiginosa, leaf beetle. Mechanical Control: Mowing may be effective when repeated at 2 week intervals over a period of several years. Pulling and digging up is ineffective as the plant has an extensive root system. Chemical Control: Treat in spring during bud to bloom stage or during fall regrowth after the first light frost. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Canada thistle (Appendix A). CHICORY (Chicorium intybus) Description: Member of the Sunflower family. Perennial; reproduces from seed. Deep fleshy root and tufted basal leaves that resemble those of a dandelion. Stem multi-branched and can reach over 5 feet tall. Flowers bright blue, purple or occasionally white. Location: Well established in western Garfield County (Parachute) and is spreading rapidly in other parts of the County. Cultural Control: Reseed disturbed areas adjacent to chicory infestations with appropriate perennial grasses. Biological Control: Close grazing by sheep will control chicory in pastures. Chemical Control: Treat at early growth stage in early spring. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Chicory (Appendix A). 19 CHINESE CLEMATIS (Clematis orientalis) Description: Member of the Buttercup family introduced from Asia as a garden ornamental. Herbaceous to wood-vined perennial; reproduces b y seed. Native clematis, C. ligusticifolia, distinguished from the noxious weed species by groups of small white flowers. Chinese clematis has single yellow flowers. Comments: Found in well-drained, sunny areas with basic soils. Prefers roadsides, riparian corridors and rocky slopes. Known to cause death in young trees. Entire plant is poisonous, causing internal bleeding when ingested in large amounts. Location: Glenwood Canyon on both sides of the Colorado River; along the Roaring Fork River south of Glenwood Springs. Cultural Control: Eradication requires intensive and persistent control efforts to effectively eliminate weed infestations and soil seed reserves. Site must be monitored for 10 years after last flowering plant is destroyed. Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over- grazing. Chemical Control: Treat at flower stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Chinese clematis (Appendix A). COMMON BURDOCK (Arctium minus) Description: A member of the Aster family. Biennial. Prolific seed producer. Grows to 6 feet tall with very large leaves and a prickly bur. Flowers are purple and white. Comments: Grows along roadsides, ditch banks and neglected areas. A ver y serious threat to sheep as the burs can significantly damage the quality of their wool. May cause severe infections in cattle. Location: Found throughout Garfield County. Cultural Control: Minimize soil disturbances, encourage desirable plant growth. 20 Mechanical Control: Top growth removal through mowing or cutting is effective as is pulling or digging out the plant at flowering or early seed formation. Chemical Control: Treat rosettes in late spring or early fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Common burdock (Appendix A). COMMON TANSY (Tanacetum vulgare) Description: A member of the Sunflower family introduced from Europe as a medicinal herb. Perennial. Reproduces from seed and creeping rootstalks. Button-shaped flower heads that lack petals. Foliage has a strong smell when crushed. Comments: Poisonous. Found most commonly in full sun on fertile, well- drained soils along roadsides, streams, irrigation ditch banks and pastures. Undesirable forage for livestock. Location: Roaring Fork Valley along irrigation ditch banks. Isolated patches have been found along Elk Creek west of New Castle, and along the Colorado River south of Silt. Cultural Control: Preventing establishment and seed production, and minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal are the most effective. Keep native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over- grazing. Chemical Control: Treat when bolting to bud growth stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Common tansy (Appendix A). COMMON TEASEL (Dipsacus fullonum) Description: A member of the Teasel family introduced from Europe. Biennial or sometime perennial forb; reproduces from seeds. Egg-shaped purple or white flowers at the top of each stem. Can grow to over 6 feet in height. 21 Comments: Commonly found in open, sunny areas. Prefers moist habitats such as ditches and rivers, however it appears to be moving to drier areas. Each plant can produce 2,000 seeds that remain viable for 2 years. Location: Found in one location in Garfield County in Battlement Mesa at the golf course. Cultural Control: The key to controlling is to eliminate seed production and exhaust the seed bank. Prevent the establishment of new infestation by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over- grazing. Chemical Control: Treat spring or fall rosettes. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Common teasel (Appendix A). CORN CHAMOMILE (Anthemis arvensis) Description: A member of the Sunflower family. Annual. Reproduces from seed. Small daisy-like flowers. Bushy branched plant that grows 10 to 30 inches. Comments: Most commonly found in moist, poorly-drained soils. Tends to increase in abundance in years of above-average precipitation. Location: While rare, it is found in Beaver Creek and throughout the County in small numbers. Cultural Control: Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and eliminating seed dispersal. Continue to deplete seed bank from 4 to 6 years. Reseed infested areas to reduce infestation. Chemical Control: Treat when plant is in rosette or bolting growth stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Corn chamomile (Appendix A). 22 CURLY DOCK (Rumex crispus) Description: A member of the Buckwheat family native to Eurasia. Robust, tap- rooted perennial. Grows 2 to 5 feet tall. Stems are erect; leaves basal with curly or wavy margins. Flowers small and in dense green, spike-like clusters. Comments: Common in wet meadows and along ditch banks. Location: Scattered throughout the County, in particular the Roaring Fork and Colorado River valleys. Cultural Control: Treating before the plant seeds is the key to control. Maintain range and pasture in good condition. Promote healthy grass growth through proper irrigation and fertilization. Do not over-graze. Chemical Control: Apply when plant is in rosette stage, in spring or fall, prior to bolting to eliminate seed production. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, contact Garfield County Vegetation Management. CUTLEAF TEASEL (Dipsacus laciniatus) Description: A member of the Teasel family introduced from Europe. Biennial, Reproduces from seed. Egg-shaped purple or white flowers at the top of each stem. Can grow to over 10 feet in height. Comments: Commonly found in open, sunny habitats. Prefers moist areas such as ditches and rivers, however it appears to be moving to drier areas. Each plant can produce 2,000 seeds that remain viable for 2 years. More aggressive than common teasel. Location: Not known in Garfield County at this time. Cultural Control: The key to removing cutleaf teasel is to eliminate seed production and exhaust seed bank. Chemical Control: Treat spring or fall rosettes. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Cutleaf teasel (Appendix A). 23 CYPRESS SPURGE (Euphorbia cyparissias) Description: A member of the Spurge family introduced from Eurasia; an invasive ornamental. Low-growing perennial that overwinters as root and crown tissue. Reproduces from seed. Leaves are stalkless, alternate, narrow and linear to lance-shaped. Flowers are yellowish-green usually turning reddish-green towards maturity. Comments: Leaves and stems emit a milky, toxic sap when broken. Sap is an irritant and may cause dermatitis or rashes. The soil seed reserve is estimated to be at least 8 years. Location: Found in the Crystal Springs area and in landscaping situations in Carbondale and Glenwood Springs. Cultural Control: The most important consideration is replacing it in nurseries with alternative native or non-invasive cultivated plants. Remove plants before seed is set, in moist conditions. Be sure to wear gloves due to the toxic milky sap. Prevent establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over-grazing. Chemical Control: Treat at flowering stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Cypress spurge (Appendix A). DALMATIAN TOADFLAX (Linaria dalmatica) Description: A member of the Figwort family introduced as an ornamental from Europe. A creeping, aggressive perennial and escaped ornamental with stems from 2 to 4 feet tall. Flowers are snapdragon-shaped, bright yellow, with orange centers; leaves are waxy and heart- shaped. Comments: Especially well-adapted to arid sites and can spread rapidly once established. Because of its deep, extensive root system, and heav y seed production, this plant is difficult to manage. 24 Location: Common in Glenwood Springs, Three Mile Creek, Four Mile Creek and one isolated patch up Slaughter Gulch north of Peach Valley. Biological Control: The defoliating moth, Calophasia lunula, has been released on Dalmatian and yellow toadflax. It may defoliate up to 20% of the leaves of the plant. Mecinus janthinus, a stem-boring weevil, is capable of killing a large portion of the above-ground plant by boring into and killing stems where the larvae feed and live. Cultural Control: Reseed disturbed areas adjacent to toadflax infestation with appropriate perennial grasses. Mechanical Control: Repeated mowing 2 to 3 times a year will slow spread and reduce seed production. Chemical Control: Treat at flower stage or in the fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Dalmatian toadflax (Appendix A). DAME’S ROCKET (Hesperis matronalis) Description: A member of the Mustard family from Eurasia. Biennial or short- lived perennial forb; a prolific seed producer. Flowers have 4 white or purple petals on terminal stalks. Leaves are lance-shaped with toothed margins and are 2 to 4 inches long and slightly hairy. Comments: Found most commonly in areas that have moist, well-drained soils and full sun to light shade. Location: No Name and along Midland Avenue in Glenwood Springs. Cultural Control: Locate and remove plants before seeds are allowed to set. The seed bank must be monitored until it is depleted. Check wildflower seed mix to make sure this plant is not included. Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over-grazing. 25 Chemical Control: Treat when plant is in rosette or bolting stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Dame’s rocket (Appendix A). DIFFUSE KNAPWEED (Centaurea diffusa) Description: A member of the Aster family introduced from Europe. Biennial or short-lived perennial forb; reproduces from seed. Usually produces a single main, multi-branched stem that is 1½ to 2 feet tall. Flower is white or pink with bracts. Location: The largest infestation in Garfield County is located west of the Riverbend subdivision southeast of New Castle; scattered along Interstate 70 between Rifle and Parachute and south of Glenwood Springs at the Glenwood Airport and old rodeo grounds and Rifle Creek Golf Course. Cultural Control: Reseeding of disturbed sites with fast growing grasses helps prevent diffuse knapweed establishment. Mechanical Control: Hand-pulling has been effective, if repeated persistently over time. Biological Control: A root-boring weevil, Cyphocleonus achates, weakens plants by destroying the root system. The weevil larvae of Larinus minutus feed within the seedhead and cause defoliation. Chemical Control: Apply to spring to early rosette or bolt stage of growth, or fall rosettes. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Diffuse knapweed (Appendix A). HOARY CRESS (Cardaria draba) Description: Also known as whitetop. A member of the Mustard famil y probably introduced from Europe in alfalfa seed. A very competitive, deep-rooted perennial that reproduces by root segments and seed. Grows erect from 10 to 18 inches high and has a grey-white colored leaf. Flowers are white and numerous in compact, flat-topped clusters which give the plant its name. 26 Comments: One of the earliest perennial weeds to emerge in the spring, producing flowers in May or June. Grows in waste places, cultivated fields and pastures, and is capable of vigorous growth. Location: Common in Garfield County. Cultural Control: Mowing or cultivation effectiveness will be increased if other plants like perennial native grasses or alfalfa are seeded in the hoary cress stand as competitors. Maintain range and pasture in good condition. Promote healthy grass growth through proper irrigation and fertilization. Do not over-graze. Mechanical Control: Removal of top growth is somewhat effective. Repeated treatments may reduce seed production and spread. Chemical Control: Treat at the early bud stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Hoary cress (Appendix A). HOUNDSTONGUE (Cynoglossum officinale) Description: A member of the Borage family introduced from Europe. Biennial. Prolific seed producer. Grows 1½ to 3 feet high with reddish- purple flowers. Basal leaves resemble a dog’s tongue in shape. Comments: Its small nutlets attach to and are rapidly spread by people, domestic animals, wildlife and vehicles. Grows on ranges, pastures, trails and roadsides and is toxic to horses and cattle, as it contains alkaloids that may cause liver cells to stop reproducing. Location: Widespread throughout Garfield County. Cultural Control: Reseed disturbed sites with fast-growing native grasses. Maintain range and pasture in good condition. Promote healthy grass growth through proper irrigation and fertilization. Do not over-graze. Mechanical Control: Physical removal of the plant at flowering or in early seed formation, by pulling or digging, will break the cycle of the plant. 27 Chemical Control: Treat in spring or fall rosettes. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Houndstongue (Appendix A). JOINTED GOATGRASS (Aegilops cylindrica) Description: A member of the Grass family, Barley tribe. A non-native grass introduced from Turkey. Winter annual, reproduces from seed. Grows 15 to 30 inches tall in erect stems which branch at the base to give the plant a tufted appearance. Comments: Established in many winter wheat-growing areas of North America. The seeds are very similar in size and shape to wheat seed and therefore are difficult to screen out. Found along roadsides, in waste areas, fields and pastures. Location: Found in the Harvey Gap area, in West Mamm Creek, in fields adjacent to Parachute Creek, in scattered locations along county roadsides in the Silt and New Castle areas, and in Wallace and Spring Creeks. Cultural Control: The key to control is to prevent the grass from becoming established in fields by cleaning equipment. Plant competitive native grasses. Mechanical Control: Tillage can be effective when plants are in the seeding stage. The main goal is to prevent seed production and spread. Chemical Control: Treat in early spring, late summer, or early fall when the plant is germinating, to prevent seed production. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Jointed goatgrass (Appendix A). LEAFY SPURGE (Euphorbia esula) Description: A member of the Spurge family, introduced from Europe. A creeping perennial that grows up to 3 feet tall and reproduces b y vigorous root stalks and seed. Roots can extend as deep as 30 feet from a plant that grows 1 to 3 feet tall, with pale green shoots and small yellow-green flowers. 28 Comments: The plant, including the root, has milky latex that is damaging to eyes and sensitive skin. Extremely difficult to control because of its extensive sprouting root. Adapted to a wide variety of Colorado habitats and very competitive with other plants species. If it becomes established in rangeland, pasture and riparian sites, it may exclude all other vegetation due to its competitive nature. Location: Primarily found in Wallace and Spring Creeks in western Garfield County. Individual plants have been located throughout Garfield County. Biological Control: Sheep or goats will graze leafy spurge. If livestock graze it after seed formation, hold animals in a corral for at least 7 days before moving them to an uninfested area to avoid seed spread. Several flea beetles, Apthona spp., produce larvae that bore into roots and the adults feed on the leaves. Oberea erythrocephala, a stem and root crown-mining, long-horned beetle, and Spurgia esulae, a shoot tip gall midge, are also available. The leafy spurge hawk moth, Hyles euphorbiae, deposits its eggs which then consume the leaves and bracts of the plant. Cultural Control: Any activity that encourages vigorous grass growth is very important. Over-grazing stresses grasses and makes them less competitive to leafy spurge. Mechanical Control: Mowing leafy spurge at 14 to 21-day intervals may cause higher susceptibility to fall-applied herbicides. Chemical Control: Treat after full bloom or in the fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Leafy spurge (Appendix A). MAYWEED CHAMOMILE (Anthemis cotula) Description: A member of the Sunflower family introduced from Europe. A bushy annual that reproduces prolifically from seed. Mature plants are one-half to 2 feet tall with finely dissected alternate leaf structures. White ray flowers. 29 Comments: Each plant is capable of producing 960,000 seeds that are viable for up to 6 years. The most distinguishing feature is the unpleasant odor it emits. Most commonly found in a wide range of soils but prefers moist poorly-drained soils. Increases in abundance in years of above-average precipitation. Can cause skin rashes, blistering of livestock muzzles, and irritation to the mucous membranes of grazing livestock. Can impart a strong flavor to the milk of dairy animals. Location: While rare, may be found in Beaver Creek and throughout the County in small numbers. Cultural Control: Prevent establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over-grazing. Mowing is an effective method before the seed is set. Perennial grasses should be reseeded for several years. Seed bank must be monitored for 4 to 6 years. Chemical Control: Treat from rosette to bolting stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Mayweed chamomile (Appendix A). MEADOW KNAPWEED (Centaurea nigrescens) Description: A member of the Sunflower family introduced from Europe as a forage species. Perennial. Reproduces from seed. Pink to purple flower heads that are solitary at the tips of branches. Grows 20 to 40 inches with many branches. Leaves up to 6 inches long and 1 inch wide. Comments: When disturbed, has the ability to re-sprout from root and crown fragments. Found most commonly in moist sites, irrigated pastures, moist meadows, river banks, streams, irrigation ditches, roadsides and openings in forested area. Location: Found in the upper Dry Hollow area south of Silt. 30 Cultural Control: Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over-grazing. Since meadow knapweed has only been found in small quantities in Colorado, preventing populations from spreading is the most important consideration. Eradication requires intensive work to eliminate seed dispersal and deplete the seed bank. An integrated management plan utilizing hand-pulling, herbicides and cultural remediation is the most effective method. Chemical Control: Treat in spring to early summer during bolting to bud growth stages or in fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Meadow knapweed (Appendix A). MEDITERRANEAN SAGE (Salvia aethiopsis) Description: A member of the Mint family introduced from northern Africa. Biennial or shot-lived perennial. Reproduces from seed. Very hair y rosette of leaves during both the first and second years. During the second year the plant bolts and sends up stems that end in white to yellowish-white flower clusters. Flowers will eventually form 4 nutlets with dark veins. Comments: When crushed, the leaves have a pungent odor. Most commonly found on rangeland but will invade riparian areas, forests, roadsides and dry pastures. Prefers south-facing slopes in loose, gravelly, well-drained soils. Once established, has the capability to adapt to numerous conditions and form dense monocultures. In the fall of the second year, the stem breaks off and forms a tumbleweed, dispersing 100,000 seeds. Unpalatable to livestock. Location: The only known County location is on the south-facing slope surrounding the No Name Tunnel on Interstate 70 and along the Colorado River bikepath. Cultural Control: Prevent establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over-grazing. Hand pull or shovel when soil is moist, before flowering, and turn over 31 to dry out. If flowering, collect specimens and bag them carefull y to collect all seeds. Seed bank must be monitored for years. Sites must be monitored for 10 years after plant is eradicated. Chemical Control: Apply in spring during rosette to bolting growth stages. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Mediterranean sage (Appendix A). MUSK THISTLE (Carduus nutans) Description: A member of the Aster family introduced from Eurasia. A winter annual or biennial; reproduces from seed. First year growth is a large, compact rosette from a large, fleshy, corky taproot. Second year stem is erect, spiny, 2 to 6 feet tall and branched at the top. Waxy leaves dark green with light green midrib and mostly white margins; flowers purple or occasionally white. Comments: Commonly found in pastures, roadsides and waste places. Prefers moist bottomland soil, but can also be found on drier uplands. Location: Scattered throughout the County; heaviest in the Crystal River Valley. Cultural Control: Musk thistle, like other biennial thistles, thrives on disturbance. The best management is to minimize disturbance. If it does occur, be certain to revegetate with competitive grasses. Biological Control: A weevil, Trichosirocalus horridus, attacks the crown area of the rosettes and weakens the plant before it bolts. This weevil has reduced stand density in areas where it has become well established. Chemical Control: Treat rosettes in spring or fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Musk thistle (Appendix A). 32 MYRTLE SPURGE (Euphorbia myrsinites) Description: A member of the Spurge family introduced from Eurasia as an ornamental. Perennial. Reproduces from seed. Capable of projecting seeds up to 15 feet. Blue-green waxy leaves. Plants emit a toxic milky latex when stems are broken. Flowers yellow-green petal-like bracts that appear from March to May. Comments: A popular plant in xeriscapes and rock gardens. Prefers sunny to partly sunny areas in well-drained soils. Poisonous if ingested; milky sap causes blisters upon contact. Most important consideration is replacing it in nurseries with alternative native or non-invasive cultivated plants. Remove plants before seed is set, in moist conditions. Location: Fairly common in Glenwood Springs and Battlement Mesa. Isolated patches have been found in Westbank, Peach Valley and New Castle. Cultural Control: Area must be monitored for 9 years after last flowering plant is eradicated. Prevent the establishment of new infestation by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, while keeping native community healthy. Maintain healthy pastures and avoid over- grazing. Mechanical Control: Hand pull or dig when soil is moist. Make certain to pull all the roots and wear rubber gloves and eye protection to protect yourself from the toxic milky sap. Treatment follow-up is important to check root fragment re-sprouts that will occur when the taproot is not completely removed. Chemical Control: Treat at flowering stage in spring or fall regrowth. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Myrtle spurge (Appendix A). OXEYE DAISY (Chrysanthemum leucanthemum) Description: A member of the Aster family; a native of Eurasia. Rhizomatous perennial, escaped ornamental. White ray and yellow disk flowers, which bloom from June through August. 33 Comments: Commonly sold in wildflower seed mixes or transplanted as an ornamental despite its tendency to crowd out more desirable vegetation. Location: A rapidly spreading weed in Garfield County on the increase along Main Elk Creek, East Elk Creek, Canyon Creek, Crystal Springs, Missouri Heights and Four Mile Creek. Mechanical Control: Hand pull or dig when soil is moist. Chemical Control: Treat at flowering stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Oxeye daisy (Appendix A). Education: The key to oxeye daisy management is to create an awareness among homeowners, nurseries, landscapers and landscape architects that oxeye is a noxious weed and therefore should not be specified in plantings, sold in nurseries or planted in home gardens or large-scale landscape projects. PERENNIAL PEPPERWEED (Lepidium latifolium) Description: A member of the Mustard family introduced from southern Europe and western Asia as a contaminant in sugar beet seed. Perennial. Reproduces from seed, roots and shoots. One to over 3 feet in height and has waxy leaves with a white midrib. White flowers in dense round clusters at branch tips. Comments: Can grow in a variety of habitats but frequently found in moist soils such as riparian areas, wetlands, marshes, irrigation ditches, canals and floodplains. Alters ecosystems by acting as a “salt pump,” pulling salts from deep in the soil and excreting them on the surface. Change in soil pH alters biodiversity drastically and deceases agriculture and pasture production. Extremely invasive. The best method is prevention. In order to control this plant intensive use of herbicides and revegetation must be utilized. Location: Scattered throughout central to western Garfield County, with the largest infestation found along Parachute Creek. 34 Cultural Control: Prolonged spring flooding of new growth will kill pepperweed. Reestablishment of native and desired plants can take years. Re- plantings must be repeated. Chemical Control: Apply when plant is in bolting to early flower growth stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Perennial pepperweed (Appendix A). PLUMELESS THISTLE (Carduus acanthoides) Description: A member of the Aster family introduced from Eurasia. Winter annual or biennial; prolific seed producer. Distinguished from musk thistle by smaller flowers from ½ to 1 inch in diameter. Leaves lack prominent white margin present on musk thistle leaves. May grow to 5 feet or more. Flowers reddish-purple, either solitary or clustered. Comments: Found in pastures, river valleys and along roadsides. Location: Common in southern Garfield County; rapidly spreading south of Battlement Mesa. Biological Control: A weevil, Trichosirocalus horridus, attacks the crown area of rosettes and weakens the plant before it bolts. This weevil has reduced stand density in areas where it has become well established. Cultural Control: Like other biennial thistles, it thrives on disturbance. The best management is to minimize disturbance and revegetate with competitive species. Mechanical Control: Mowing is generally not effective due to the plant’s capacity for rapid regrowth. Hand cutting is not effective unless there are repeated follow-up treatments and should only be conducted if there is a commitment to follow-up efforts. Plumeless tends to branch out where it is cut and then re-flowers. Pulling can be ver y effective, especially after a light rain. Hand-pulling with a good set 35 of gloves is preferable to shoveling which disturbs the ground creating a potential seedbed for future infestations. Chemical Control: Treat rosettes in spring or fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Plumeless thistle (Appendix A). POISON HEMLOCK (Conium maculatum) Description: A member of the Parsley family. A biennial forb native to Europe. Grows 4 to 10 feet tall. Has white flowers in an umbrella-like cluster. Leaves are shiny green and finely divided, with a musty odor. Comments: Seeds may remain viable in soil for about 3 years. All parts of the plants are highly poisonous. Found along streams, ditch banks and pasture borders. Highly poisonous. Location: Garfield and Baldy Creeks. Cultural Control: The key to control is containment and prevention. Pulling the taproot when the soil is moist can be effective. When the plants are present, the use of herbicides is critical. Biological Control: Larvae of the hemlock moth, Agonopterix alstroemericana, feed on the leaves, stem, flowers and seeds causing severe defoliation and death of the plant. Mechanical Control: Deplete root reserves and reduce seed production with repeated mowing. Chemical Control: Treat in early spring. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Poison hemlock (Appendix A). PURPLE LOOSESTRIFE (Lythrum salicaria) Description: A member of the Loosestrife family introduced from Europe; an escaped ornamental. Prolific seed producer, able to produce over 36 10,000 seeds per square yard. Erect, square stem; can reach 1½ to 8 feet tall. Magenta-colored flowers. Comments: Highly aggressive invader species found in most wetland sites throughout the state. If left unchecked, a wetland will eventually become a monoculture of loosestrife, posing a severe threat to waterfowl habitat and impeding water flow in irrigation ditches. Location: Tara Park in Silt and the Westbank subdivision in Glenwood Springs. Mechanical Control: Include hand-pulling, mowing and flooding. Hand-pulling is effective only on small plants, when infestations are detected early. The root system must be completely removed, since the root sections can sprout and form new plants. Chemical Control: Cut and properly dispose of flower heads before chemical treatment. Treat in summer. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Purple loosestrife (Appendix A). RUSSIAN KNAPWEED (Acroptilon repens) Description: A member of the Aster family introduced from Europe. Perennial that reproduces from seed with an extensive underground root system. Ridged stems are stiff and 1 to 3 feet high, with thistle-like flowers that are lavender to white. Comments: Very difficult to control or eradicate once it becomes established. Grows in cultivated fields, along ditch banks, fence rows, roadsides and in waste places. Toxic to horses, and will cause death if consumed over a period of time. Location: Very common in Garfield County; most common in Dry Hollow, Silt Mesa and Missouri Heights. Cultural Control: A single control strategy such as mowing or an herbicide usually is not sufficient. Tends to form monocultures by eliminating other plants. Sowing desirable plant species is necessary after the weed is controlled. Research indicates that the native grasses, 37 streambank wheatgrass and thick-spike wheatgrass will establish in an area after Russian knapweed is suppressed with herbicides. If the stand is not too old and grasses are still present, stimulating grass growth by irrigation, where possible, should increase grass competition with knapweed and keep it under continual stress. Mechanical Control: Repeated mowing combined with herbicide applications will gradually stress the plant. Chemical Control: Treat in spring to bud stage or to dormant plants in fall after the first freeze. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Russian knapweed (Appendix A). RUSSIAN OLIVE (Elaeagnus angustifolia) Description: Member of the Oleaster family. A hardy, fast-growing tree from Europe, Russian olive has been promoted for windrow and ornamental plantings. Many reach heights from 10 to 25 feet. Trunks and branches armed with 1 to 2 inch woody thorns. Leaves covered with small scales which give the foliage a distinctive silvery appearance. Fruit berry-like and silvery when first formed but turns brown at maturity. Comments: Once imported as a wind-break, it has spread to riparian areas throughout the County where it is becoming the dominant plant. It has invaded cottonwood areas along streams, and impacted wildlife and bird habitat. Location: Very common along the Colorado River and other drainages especially between Silt and Rifle in western Garfield County. Cultural Control: Plant native trees or less aggressive introduced trees. In riparian areas, establish native riparian vegetation. Mechanical Control: Small trees may be controlled mechanically by using an appropriate tool or shovel. Chemical Control: Treatments include cut-stump, foliar or basal bark. Timing varies; avoid late spring and early summer during heavy sap flow. For 38 specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Russian olive (Appendix A). SALT CEDAR (Tamarix ramosissima, Tamarix parviflora) Description: A member of the Tamarisk family. Deciduous or evergreen shrub or small tree, 5 to 25 feet tall. Comments: May live 50 to 100 years. Tolerance to saline and alkaline soil and water. Copes with high concentrations of dissolved solids by absorbing them through its roots and excreting salts through glands in its stem and leaves which eventually form a saline crust on the soil. A single plant of salt cedar will use about 200 gallons of water a day while it is actively growing. Leaves small and scale-like, on highly branched slender stems. Ramosissima flowers are 5-petaled and pink to white; Parviflora flowers are 4-petaled. Location: Widespread throughout Garfield County in riparian areas. Biological Control: Tamarisk leaf beetle, Diorhabda carinulata, has been released along the mainstem of the Colorado River in western Garfield County and some tributaries, and is now established. Adult and larvae cause defoliation. Cultural Control: Establish native riparian vegetation. Mechanical Control: Historically, salt cedar management projects have included root plowing and raking, dozing, mowing and prescribed burning. These methods provide only short-term benefits and are labor intensive. Chemical Control: Treatments include cut-stump, foliar or basal bark. Timing varies; avoid late spring and early summer during heavy sap flow. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Salt cedar (Appendix A). 39 SCENTLESS CHAMOMILE (Tripleurospernum perforata) Description: A member of the Sunflower family introduced from Europe. Annual, biennial or short-lived perennial forb; reproduces by seed. Flowers are daisy-like with 1 yellow centered flower with white petals for every stem. Leaves are alternate, finely divided, fernlike, odorless when crushed. Stems can grow 3 to 6 feet tall. Location: While rare, may be found throughout the County in small numbers. Comments: Scentless chamomile is most commonly found in moist areas such as hayfields, pastures, roadsides, stream banks, fence lines and drainages. A single plant can produce 300,000 seeds. Has the potential to be devastating in agricultural settings because it causes blistering on livestock muzzles and irritation to mucous membranes. Cultural Control: Any practice that aids in the establishment of forage into a firm moist seedbed will help reduce growth. Integrated management is the most effective method for controlling scentless chamomile. A combination of tillage, herbicide and competitive cropping can be very effective in preventing seed production and crowding out infestations. Chemical Control: Treat in rosette or bolting stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Scentless chamomile (Appendix A). SCOTCH THISTLE (Onopordum acanthium) Description: A member of the Aster family introduced from Europe or eastern Asia. A biennial that can reach a height of 8 feet. Rosette forms the first year and can have leaves up to 2 feet long and 1 foot wide. The second year the plant produces flowers that are reddish-purple to violet. Comments: Found primarily along roadsides and railroads, but can become an impassable obstacle to livestock on rangeland and pastures. Location: Common in the County. The worst infestations are located between Glenwood Springs and New Castle. 40 Cultural Control: Reseed disturbed sites with appropriate perennial grasses. Mechanical Control: Digging the plant at the rosette stage is effective. Chemical Control: Treat rosettes in spring or fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Scotch thistle (Appendix A). SPOTTED KNAPWEED (Centaurea stoebe) Description: A member of the Aster family, native to central Europe. Short- lived, non-creeping perennial that reproduces from seed and forms a new shoot each year from a taproot. One or more shoots up to 4 feet tall. Flowers lavender to purple. Comments: Occupies dry meadows, pastures, stony hills, roadsides and the sandy or gravel flood plains of streams and rivers, where soils are light textured, well-drained and receive summer precipitation. Tolerates dry conditions similar to diffuse knapweed, but will survive in higher moisture areas as well. One of the most invasive, aggressive weeds to plague the western United States. Location: Scattered, isolated patches are increasing in the County. A large infestation is located just west of the Riverbend subdivision southeast of New Castle. Also North Dry Fork northwest of DeBeque, the East Divide area, Cardiff area south of Glenwood Springs, and Battlement Creek. Biological Control: A root-boring weevil, Cyphocleonus achates, weakens plants by destroying the root system. The weevil larvae of Larianus minutus feed within the seedhead and cause defoliation. Cultural Control: If desirable grass competition is evident in spotted knapweed stands, judicious herbicide application that does not injure grasses may release them to compete effectively with the weeds. Irrigation may help stimulate grass competition in these cases. Seeding suitable perennial grasses is necessary to prevent weed reinvasion. 41 Chemical Control: Treat spring or fall rosettes. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Spotted knapweed (Appendix A). SULFUR CINQUEFOIL (Potentilla recta) Description: A member of the Rose family introduced from Eurasia. Perennial, reproduces from seed. Leaves are palmately compound with 5 to 7 toothed leaflets. Flowers light yellow with 5 petals, seeds are coated with a net-like pattern. Comments: Most commonly found in disturbed areas such as roadsides and pastures. Prefers dry, sandy, gravelly and rocky soils that receive 13 to 50 inches of annual precipitation. Unpalatable to livestock due to a high concentration of phenolic tannins. Can live for 20 years. Location: Found in South Canyon. Cultural Control: Small infestations can be controlled by hand pulling while larger infestations are commonly controlled with herbicides. Re- vegetation should focus on improving the competitiveness of native communities. Increasing the competitiveness of native communities can prevent the establishment of sulfur cinquefoil. As with all weeds, disturbance and bare ground should be avoided. Chemical Control: Treat anytime during the growing season. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Sulfur cinquefoil (Appendix A). YELLOW STARTHISTLE (Centaurea solstitialis) Description: A member of the Aster family introduced from Europe. Annual; prolific seed producer. Grows two to 3 feet tall. Flowers are yellow, located singly on ends of branches, armed with sharp straw-colored thorns up to ¾ inches long. Comments; In California alone, this plant has infested more than 20 million acres. “Chewing disease” results when horses are forced to eat yellow starthistle. 42 Location: No known infestations in the County, however there have been reports in the past of single plant infestations. Biological Control: A seed-feeding beetle, Bangasterus orientalis, has been released in California and Idaho. Seed weevils and seed flies have also been released. Cultural Control: Vigorous competitive grass is essential to maintain a plant community’s resistance to starthistle invasion. Mechanical Control: Mowing or cutting is rarely effective. Chemical Control: Treat during rosette growth stage. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Yellow starthistle (Appendix A). YELLOW TOADFLAX (Linaria vulgaris) Description: A member of the Figwort family sometimes called common toadflax or “Butter and Eggs.” Introduced from Europe. Escaped ornamental perennial reproducing by seed and rootstalk. Flowers bright yellow with deep orange centers that resemble the snapdragon. Comment: Has now become a serious problem to rangelands and mountain meadows. Does well in all types of soils. Its displacement of desirable grasses not only reduces ecological diversity, but also reduces rangeland value and can lead to erosion problems. Because of its early vigorous growth, extensive underground root system and effective seed dispersal methods, yellow toadflax is difficult to control. Location: Infests thousands of acres in the Flat Tops Wilderness. Increasing in the Lookout Mountain area above Glenwood Springs. Biological Control: The defoliating moth, Calophasia lunula, has been released on Dalmatian and yellow toadflax. It may defoliate up to 20% of the leaves of the plant. Mecinus janthinus, a stem-boring weevil, is 43 capable of killing a large portion of the above-ground plant by boring into and killing stems where the larvae feed and live. Cultural Control: Attempt to maintain competitive communities of desirable species. Reseed any open ground with perennial grasses to prevent invasion by other weed species. Education: The key to management of escaped ornamentals is to create awareness among homeowners, nurseries, landscapers and landscape architects that yellow toadflax is a noxious weed and therefore should not be specified in plantings, sold in nurseries or planted in home gardens or large-scale landscape projects. Mechanical Control: Digging and pulling where feasible can provide effective control if conducted annually for 10 to 15 years. Chemical Control: Treat at flowering through fall. For specific treatments for rangeland and pasture sites, refer to the Colorado Department of Agriculture Fact Sheets – Yellow toadflax (Appendix A). 2.06 Identification of Native and Noxious Thistles A. Colorado has several species of thistle which are native and do not cause the problems of the noxious species. Some of them are very rare. An excellent reference guide is “Thistles of Colorado,” published by the Larimer County Weed District. Native thistles share these characteristics: 1. They have mostly white, sometimes very pale lavender flowers and are more succulent than the noxious species. The flowers may have a hairy or fuzzy appearance and stems of some species are reddish. 2. They are valuable to pollinators and wildlife and contribute to biodiversity. 3. They are sometimes inadvertently sprayed, pulled, clipped or dug up because they are confused with noxious, non-native thistles. 4. Among the native thistles in Garfield County are Barneby’s thistle (Cirsium barneybi), fringed thistle (Cirsium centaureae), Fish Lake thistle (Cirsium clavatum var. americanum), Rocky Mountain thistle (Cirsium perplexans), and adobe thistle (Cirsium perplexanis). B. Five introduced thistle species include Canada, musk, plumeless, bull and Scotch. 1. Canada thistle is a perennial and has an extensive root system. 2. Plumeless, Scotch and musk thistles are biennials. They are relatively shallow- rooted and reproduce by seed only. 44 3. Canada and plumeless are often mistaken for each other. It is very simple to tell them apart: a) Canada has a smooth stem; plumeless has a spiny stem and leaves. b) The bracts under the flower of Canada are spineless; bracts under the leaves of plumeless appear as sharp spines. c) The flowers of musk thistle are about 3 times larger than those of Canada or plumeless. 4. Musk thistle seedlings have a very prominent white midrib. 5. Scotch thistle leaves are larger than those of the other thistles. They grow up to 2 feet in length and 1 foot wide. The leaves are covered with dense hairs which give them a grey appearance. 6. The leaves of bull thistle are deeply lobed and spiny with prickly hair above and cottony hair below. Canada leaves are smooth above and smooth or hairy below. 7. All of the biennial thistles may grow to heights of greater than 6 feet. Canada thistle may grow from 1 to 4 feet tall. 45 SECTION III JURISDICTIONAL OVERVIEW OF AREAS OF INFESTATION 3.01 Overview It is the goal of Garfield County to develop and implement a comprehensive noxious weed management program on all County-owned property and to be available as a resource for private landowners and public land managers. The County has adopted an “early detection, early treatment” policy for the purpose of establishing priorities. Earl y detection involves identification and documentation of recently introduced weed species into an area. Early treatment is the follow-up that could possible eradicate new infestations. 3.02 County Land: Roads, Airport, Landfill A. Roads: Garfield County has over 900 miles of county roads. Roadsides shall be managed for weeds on the County’s noxious weed list and Colorado listed weeds designated for eradication. 1. A Priority List of roads will be established each growing season based upon input from the Road and Bridge Department, the public and past observations by staff. Roadsides will be selectively spot-treated for noxious weeds. 2. There will be no general herbicide applications to non-listed weeds unless specifically requested by the Road and Bridge Department or the County Commissioners to treat a roadside for safety and sight reasons or to protect new paving. 3. Roadside treatment will start in the warmer, western end of the County in mid- April and move east and south as the growing season progresses. Each road on the Priority List will be treated at least twice. If time and workload allows some of the heavily infested roadsides will be treated a third time. B. Airport: The Airport will be treated on an as-needed basis for noxious weeds. 1. There are scattered infestations of Russian knapweed, musk thistle, whitetop, tamarisk and Russian olive on Airport property. 2. In 2006, ten acres of tamarisk were treated using the cut-stump method with the Rifle Correctional Crew on property along lower Mamm Creek. Annual follow-up is necessary. C. Landfill. The West Garfield County Landfill will be treated on an as-needed basis for noxious weeds. There are isolated patches of musk thistle, Scotch thistle and tamarisk at the Landfill. 3.03 State Land A. Colorado Department of Transportation’s state highways in Garfield County are Highways 13, 82, 133, 139, 325 and U.S. Highway 6&24. These highways are 46 managed for noxious weeds by CDOT through their offices in Glenwood Springs, Grand Junction and Craig. 1. Goals: a. Manage all noxious weeds in accordance with the Garfield County Weed Management Plan and the latest version of State Rules and Regulations Pertaining to the Noxious Weed Act, (8CCR 1206-2). b. Establish an intergovernmental agreement with CDOT that enables the County to perform weed management on a very limited basis. The major responsibility for weed management would still lie with CDOT. 2. Key Species: a. Interstate 70: Diffuse knapweed, spotted knapweed, Russian knapweed, Scotch thistle, Russian olive, tamarisk. b. Glenwood Canyon Bike Path: Chinese clematis, Russian knapweed, hoary cress, tamarisk, common tansy, plumeless thistle, Canada thistle. c. Highway 13: Musk thistle, yellow toadflax, Russian knapweed, Scotch thistle. d. Highway 82: Plumeless thistle, Canada thistle, Russian knapweed. e. Highway 133: Oxeye daisy, yellow toadflax, plumeless thistle, Canada thistle. f. Highway 139: Whitetop, Russian knapweed, spotted knapweed, Canada thistle. g. Highway 325: Diffuse knapweed, Canada thistle, Russian knapweed. h. Highway 6&24: Diffuse knapweed, Russian knapweed, Scotch thistle, Canada thistle, whitetop. B. Colorado Division of Parks and Wildlife 1. The Colorado Division of Parks and Wildlife has a weed management program in place for the Garfield Creek State Wildlife Area. Garfield County partnered with the DPW to map the area for noxious weeds in 2009. 2. The Division has two ponds adjacent to Cottonwood Park in Parachute. Key species are tamarisk and Russian olive. 3. Rifle Gap, Rifle Falls and Harvey Gap have weed management programs for those properties. C. Garfield County is available to provide technical assistance and weed identification upon request. 3.04 Federal Land A. Bureau of Land Management The BLM within Garfield County manages its noxious weeds through the Field Offices in Silt (Colorado River Valley) and Grand Junction. Garfield County has an intergovernmental agreement with the Colorado River Valley Field Office to treat noxious weeds on BLM land as a supplement to the BLM’s own program. This agreement is reviewed and modified on an annual basis. Resources are limited and may provide for approximately 10 sites per year to be treated by County crews. 47 B. White River National Forest The WRNF within Garfield County manages its noxious weeds through its Ranger Districts in Rifle, Carbondale, Eagle and through the Supervisor’s Office in Glenwood Springs. The WRNF has an intergovernmental agreement with Garfield County that supplements the Forest’s program. 3.05 Municipalities The towns and cities within the County include Carbondale, Glenwood Springs, New Castle, Parachute, Rifle and Silt. Municipalities have specific responsibilities as described in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act (See Section 1.03 of this plan). As of December 2015, all municipalities have a representative on the County Weed Advisory Board which serves in an advisory capacity. This cooperation does not preempt the above-stated responsibilities. Listed below are general descriptions of the weed issues in each municipality. The list is meant to provide institutional memory as to where key species are known to occur. The list is not all-inclusive. The suggested goal for each municipality is to manage all noxious weeds in accordance with the latest version of State Rules and Regulations Pertaining to the Noxious Weed Act (8CCR 1206-2). A. Carbondale: 1. Key Species: Absinth wormwood, diffuse knapweed, yellow toadflax, whitetop, Canada thistle, plumeless thistle, oxeye daisy. 2. Locations: a. North Face Park/Roaring Fork High School: Canada thistle, oxeye daisy, plumeless thistle. b. Nature Park: Canada thistle, oxeye daisy, yellow toadflax. c. Bull Pasture Park: Canada thistle, absinth wormwood. d. Carbondale Ditch: Canada thistle, absinth wormwood. e. Weaver Ditch: Absinth wormwood. f. Bowls and Holland Ditch: Absinth wormwood. g. Snowmass and White Hill Trails: Canada thistle. h. River Valley Ranch Golf Course: Absinth wormwood. i. County Road 108: Whitetop. B. Glenwood Springs 1. Key Species: Myrtle spurge (List A), Dalmatian toadflax, diffuse knapweed, tamarisk, Scotch thistle, plumeless thistle, sulfur cinquefoil, oxeye daisy. 2. Locations: a. South Canyon Landfill: Scotch thistle. b. South Canyon Parklands: Scotch thistle, tamarisk, Dalmatian toadflax, sulfur cinquefoil, oxeye daisy. c. Glenwood Springs Airport and rodeo grounds: Dalmatian toadflax, diffuse knapweed. 48 d. Two Rivers Park: Tamarisk, Russian olive. e. Midland Avenue: Dalmatian toadflax. C. New Castle 1. Key Species: Scotch thistle, Russian knapweed, myrtle spurge (List A), tamarisk, oxeye daisy, whitetop. 2. Locations: a. Castle Valley Boulevard: Scotch thistle, whitetop, Russian knapweed. b. 7th Street: Myrtle spurge, absinth wormwood. c. Riverside Park: Oxeye daisy, Russian knapweed. d. Colorow Trail: Russian knapweed, Scotch thistle, whitetop. e. Lakota Canyon subdivision: Scotch thistle. D. Parachute 1. Key Species: Russian knapweed, whitetop, Russian olive, tamarisk, Scotch thistle, diffuse knapweed. 2. Locations: Cottonwood Park: Whitetop, tamarisk. E. Rifle 1. Key Species: Tamarisk, Russian olive, plumeless thistle, Canada thistle, yellow toadflax, Scotch thistle, Russian knapweed. 2. Locations: a. Rifle Mountain Park: Yellow toadflax, plumeless thistle, Canada thistle. b. Centennial Park: Tamarisk, Russian olive, Russian knapweed. F. Silt 1. Key Species: Tamarisk, Russian olive, Russian knapweed, musk thistle, Scotch thistle, hoary cress. 2. Locations: a. River Park: Russian knapweed, hoary cress, tamarisk, Russian olive. b. Stoney Ridge: Tamarisk. c. Tara Park: Russian olive, tamarisk, purple loosestrife. 3.06 Unincorporated Battlement Mesa Battlement Mesa is a community of 4,500 residents in unincorporated Garfield County. Garfield County Vegetation Management has collaborated with the Battlement Mesa Company and the Battlement Mesa Service Association on noxious weed management projects. A. Key Species: Russian olive, Russian knapweed, hoary cress, common teasel, musk thistle, myrtle spurge, chicory, common burdock, tamarisk, Canada thistle, perennial pepperweed, plumeless thistle, houndstongue. B. Locations: 49 1. Battlement Mesa Golf Course: Common teasel, Russian knapweed, common burdock, tamarisk, Canada thistle, perennial pepperweed, plumeless thistle, houndstongue, Russian olive, hoary cress. 2. Monument Gulch: Musk thistle, Russian knapweed, tamarisk, houndstongue, plumeless thistle, cheatgrass. 3. Metro District Water/Sewer Plant and areas along the Colorado River: Russian knapweed, hoary cress, Russian olive, musk thistle. 4. Battlement Mesa neighborhoods and subdivisions: a. Eagle’s Point: Russian knapweed. b. Battlement Reserve: Myrtle spurge. c. Willow Creek: Russian knapweed in vacant lots. d. Spencer Parkway: Russian knapweed on medians and roadsides. e. Stone Corral and areas around County Road 302: Russian knapweed. 3.07 Railroad The Union Pacific Railroad owns the rail line that generally runs parallel to Interstate 70 from Glenwood Canyon to the Mesa County line. Garfield County worked with other Western Slope counties to develop a weed management plan for UP in 2010. Portions of the rail line between Glenwood Springs and Rifle were mapped by the County in 2009 with the cooperation of UP. A. Suggested Goal: Manage all noxious weeds in accordance with the Garfield County Weed Management Plan and the latest version of State Rules and Regulations Pertaining to the Noxious Weed Act (8CCR-1206-2). B. Key Species: Scotch thistle, tamarisk, Russian knapweed, whitetop, Russian olive, common tansy, Chinese clematis. 50 SECTION IV IMPLEMENTATION OF WEED MANAGEMENT PLAN 4.01 Objectives and Goals A. Management Goals for Weed Species. Management goals will vary from species to species, by location and over time. 1. For some species, such as Colorado List A species, complete eradication of existing infestations and total suppression of newly identified infestations is mandated by State law. 2. Containment of existing intentional plantings, exclusion of seed from new wildland or open space mixes and elimination of targeted escaped infestations are goals for certain ornamentals such as oxeye daisy. 3. Russian knapweed, tamarisk and Russian olive infestation are so widespread that they must be managed, in many cases, merely for containment and reduction in the rate of spread. Eradication of these stands may only be viewed as unlikely in some instances or as a long range objective. B. Objectives: 1. Develop and implement a comprehensive noxious weed management program on all County-owned property. 2. Educate the public concerning weed management issues. 3. Foster a spirit of cooperation among federal, state and local government agencies and private landowners. 4. Work with other government agencies and departments to institute Best Management Practices and policies that stress prevention as a weed management tool. 5. Promote and use integrated management techniques. 6. Establish and maintain healthy plant communities with native or beneficial vegetation. 7. Restore and maintain desirable plant communities, healthy ecosystems and productive agricultural lands in Garfield County. 8. Stop the spread of noxious weeds to non-infested lands. 9. Contain heavily weed-infested areas. 10. Implement Title 35, Article 5.5, of the Colorado Weed Management Act (8CCR 1206-2). C. In all cases, revegetation either from the existing seed bank or through supplemental planting must be included as a management goal. Without revegetation, disturbed or denuded soils invite weed infestation. 51 4.02 Prevention and Detection Prevention is the highest priority weed management technique on non-infested lands. Among government officials, land managers, farmers, ranchers and the general public there is a growing recognition that protecting weed-free plant communities is the most economical and efficient land management practice. A. Weed-free plant communities: 1. Provide essential wildlife habitat and forage. 2. Save ranchers and farmers many billions of dollars in labor costs and lost production. 3. Ensure aesthetic and recreational qualities of an area. 4. Prevent soil erosion and improve water quality. The spread of noxious weeds is most likely to occur where soil has been disturbed either by human activities such as road and trail cuts, construction sites, the spread of gravel, road fill and topsoil contaminated with noxious weed seed, or over-grazing. B. Exotic plants and seeds such as oxeye daisy, purple loosestrife, chicory, toadflax and Russian olive escape from our yards and gardens. Since they are attractive and establish themselves quickly, they are popular with landscapers and gardeners for ornamental planting and may be purchased through nurseries. They have the same ability to dominate and spread, however, as other better known noxious weeds. C. Other methods of weed introduction include: 1. Contaminated seed, feed grain, hay, straw and mulch. 2. Movement of contaminated equipment, cars, bikes, etc. across uncontaminated lands. 3. Animal fur, fleece, human clothing. 4. Dried flower arrangements. D. Prevention is best accomplished by ensuring that new weed species seed or vegetative reproductive plant parts are not introduced into new areas, and by early detection of any new weed species before they become widespread. E. Strategies to prevent the introduction or establishment of noxious weeds in areas not already infested include: 1. Identification and eradication of small, new infestations. 2. Continuous monitoring and evaluation to prevent recurrence. 3. Identification of existing conditions, disturbances and activities that represent a potential threat to native habitat. 4. Identification of recently introduced weed species that represent a future threat. 5. Timely revegetation and reclamation of disturbed sites using appropriate native plant species. 6. The use of weed-free seeds and mulch. 7. County-wide promotion of the Colorado Weed Free Hay and Forage program. 8. Prioritization of weed management along areas of entry and dispersal. 52 9. Discouraging the sale of weedy ornamental plants and seed packets that contain weeds. 4.03 Garfield County Gravel Purchase Guidelines A. The County shall require the following before agreeing to purchase any gravel for County projects: 1. The gravel pit shall be inventoried and mapped by the pit operator for all plant species on Garfield County’s noxious weed list on an annual basis. 2. The gravel pit operator shall provide the County with a weed management plan. Noxious weeds shall be treated prior to seed formation. 3. The gravel pit operator must supply the County with a detailed treatment record. 4. The County will inspect the pit, the inventory and the application records 2 weeks prior to the purchase of gravel or other aggregates. 4.04 Education and Awareness A. Education must play a major role in implementing the weed management plan. Groups targeted for public education include farmers and ranchers, golf course managers, homeowner associations, private citizens, housing developers, gardeners, landscapers, nurseries, public and private land management agencies, recreational users, youth groups, schools, oil and gas companies, pipeline companies and other utilities. B. A partnership of the public and private sectors, along with awareness of noxious weeds and the problems they cause, is essential to maintain or create plant communities that are free of noxious weeds. C. Knowledge about how to identify weeds, how and where weeds are spread and what it takes to manage weeds is needed. D. Continuation and expansion of current educational programs as well as the development of new programs is a priority of the Garfield County Noxious Weed Management Plan. E. Garfield County Vegetation Management and other governmental agencies will provide this instruction. Workshops will be held throughout the year to enhance public awareness. F. Opportunities for education include: 1. Updates on County Website. 2. Widespread distribution of informative printed material. 3. Offering weed tours and talks to the public. 4. Private applicator certification, applicator safety and laws and regulations. 5. Proper calibration of spraying equipment. 6. Contacting area nurseries, landscapers and landscape architects to emphasize the problems created by escaped ornamentals. 53 7. Cooperation with local media to disseminate weed information. 8. Custom weed management recommendations for individual landowners. 4.05 Land Stewardship The Colorado Noxious Weed Act requires that all property owners use integrated methods to manage noxious weeds. Weed management must be ongoing, requiring an integrated approach in which proper land stewardship practices are utilized. Most weed species, if detected early, can be managed. A. Strategies for implementing a noxious weed management plan: 1. Identif y your plants. 2. Understand the target weed. Does it reproduce by seed or roots or both? 3. Maintain inventory maps. 4. Develop a noxious weed database. 5. Develop site-specific weed management plans in cooperation with other individual landowners and public agencies. 6. Develop a decision-making process that uses site-specific information to make decisions about treatment choices. 7. Develop a long-term strategy including regular monitoring of treatment areas. 8. Correct the situation or practices that allowed the weeds to spread. 9. Take necessary action. B. Maintaining land that is free of weeds is good stewardship. Landowners who do not manage their weeds place their neighbors’ land at risk. 4.06 Revegetation A crucial part of any weed management plan is the reintroduction of site-appropriate vegetation. A. Establishing a desirable plant community after noxious weeds have been removed from a highly infested area requires timely cultivation and reseeding. B. Since the seeds from noxious weeds may lay dormant for many years, removing all visible signs of the noxious weeds does not ensure against their return. C. Revegetation can help prevent the germination of weed seeds. It is important to inspect the land regularly to identify and treat small, new infestations. D. For proper revegetation, managed irrigation of dry areas and reseeding are essential to establish desirable communities. E. Native plants are most appropriate when the goal is restoration of native habitat. F. Weed-free seeds of native Colorado grasses, wildflowers or plant species appropriate to the site may be purchased, but the best source for seeds is from native species that grow in the immediate vicinity of the infestation. They will be best adapted to local conditions and will help maintain local integrity and genetic viability. 54 G. Using native plants or seeds to revegetate disturbed land reduces degradation of native ecosystems, reduces the need for herbicides and conserves water resources. H. Native plants provide broad biological diversity and help keep the Colorado landscape from being irrevocably altered by non-native species. I. When the goal is reclamation – reseeding for quick ground cover establishment or erosion control – it may be appropriate to use introduced, non-aggressive grasses and forbs. J. Contact the Natural Resources Conservation Service or Colorado State University Extension for specific seeding recommendations. General seeding recommendations: a) Study all vegetation in the area and surrounding areas. b) Preserve plant species native to Colorado. c) Test the soil for pH balance. d) Retain and utilize as much on-site topsoil as possible. e) Select a predominant species that is appropriate to the site. Then choose a few complementary species to provide a balanced plant community. f) Choose plants that are healthy, vigorous and pest-free. g) Use weed-free, non-hybrid seeds. h) Avoid commercial seed packets containing exotic plant species. i) Confirm viability and purity of seed through seed testing from an accredited seed testing lab. j) When choosing seeding rates, consider the guidelines provided by the Natural Resource Conservation Service. Fact sheets are available for individual species at the USDA-NRCS Plants Database website: http://plants.usda.gov/java/factSheet. 4.07 Requirements – Reclamation/Revegetation Plan, Soil Management Plan and Security Various land use change permits processed through the Community Development Departments (e.g. grading, pipeline, and Land Use Change permits) may require a Reclamation/Revegetation and Soil Management Plan which includes a Weed Management Plan. A. Soil Plan to include: 1. Provisions for salvaging on-site topsoil. 2. Timetable for eliminating topsoil and aggregate piles. 3. Provision for soil cover if any disturbances or stockpiles that sit exposed for a period of 90 days or more. B. Reclamation/Revegetation Plan to include: 1. Plant material list and seed mix. Specifically, scientific names and common names and the application rate in terms of Pure Live Seed per acre. 55 2. Planting schedule which includes timing, methods, mulching and provisions for watering, if applicable. 3. A map of the impacted area with a calculation of the surface area of disturbance in acres of the disturbed area, at preliminary plan. 4. A Weed Management Plan for all listed Garfield County noxious weeds and State of Colorado listed noxious weeds that are targeted for statewide eradication. The Plan will include a site specific map and weed inventory. A Weed Management Plan is required if an area 1 acre or greater is disturbed for the purposes of site construction, development or grading but not including areas serving the long- term function of the site such as building footprint, road surface or permanent parking areas. 5. A revegetation security in cash, bond or letter of credit. 6. Agricultural practices are exempt from revegetation requirements unless they are in association with a subdivision or land use proposal. C. A financial security may be required for revegetation if, in the determination of the BOCC, the proposed project has: 1. A potential to facilitate the spread of noxious weeds. 2. A potential to impact watershed areas. 3. A potential for visual impacts from public viewing corridors. 4. Steep slopes of 15% or greater or unstable areas. 5. Disturbs large areas of 1 acre or greater where topsoil is exposed for the purposes of site construction, development or grading but does not comprise the long term functioning of the site (i.e. building footprint, road surface or permanent parking areas). D. The revegetation security will be in an amount to be recommended by the Vegetation Manager to the BOCC that will be site-specific and based on the amount of disturbance. 1. The security shall be held by Garfield County until vegetation has been successfully reestablished, or for a period of time approved by the BOCC, in any specific land use action, according to the Reclamation Standards. 2. The BOCC will designate a member of its staff to evaluate the reclamation prior to the release of the security. E. If a property owner fails to comply with his/her approved Reclamation/Revegetation and Soil Management Plan, the provisions of the County’s adopted land use and development code in regard to enforcement may be in effect. 4.08 Reclamation Standards Areas disturbed during development shall be restored as natural-appearing landforms that blend in with adjacent undisturbed topography within 90 days of completion of construction unless an alternative timeframe is approved by the Vegetation Manager. A. Site Stability. The reclaimed areas shall be stable and exhibit none of the following: 56 1. Large rills or gullies. 2. Perceptible soil movement or head-cutting in drainages. 3. Slope instability on or adjacent to the reclaimed area. 4. Slopes shall be stabilized using appropriate reshaping and earthwork measures, including proper placement of soils and other materials. B. Soil management. Topsoil management shall be salvaged from areas to be disturbed and managed for later use in reclamation. C. Erosion Prevention. The surface area disturbed at any one time during the development of a project shall be kept to the minimum necessary and the disturbed areas reclaimed within 90 days to prevent unnecessary or undue degradation resulting from erosion. 1. The soil surface must be stable and have adequate surface roughness to reduce run-off, capture rainfall and snow melt, and allow for revegetation. 2. Application of certified noxious weed-free mulch or erosion netting may be necessary to reduce soil movement, retain soil moisture and promote revegetation. 3. Soil conservation measures, including surface manipulation, reduction in slope angle, revegetation and water management techniques shall be used. 4. Sediment retention structures or devices shall be located as close to the source of the sediment-generating activities as possible to increase their effectiveness and reduce environmental impacts. D. Contouring and Revegetation. Abrupt transitions and linear placement on visible slopes shall be avoided. Areas disturbed by grading shall be contoured so they can be revegetated and shall be planted and have vegetation established. 1. When final landform is achieved, the surface shall be stabilized by vegetation or other means to reduce further soil erosion from wind or water, provide forage and cover, prevent fugitive dust as required by State Statute, and reduce visual impacts. 2. A uniform vegetative cover shall be established with an individual plant density of at least 70% of pre-disturbance levels within 4 growing seasons. State or county-listed noxious weeds, as well as alien annual invasive species, do not count as part of the 70% cover. 3. Application of topsoil. Topsoil will be stockpiled, placed on disturbed areas and managed for later use in reclamation. Provisions for salvaging on-site topsoil, a timetable for eliminating topsoil and aggregate piles and a plan that provides for soil cover if any disturbances or stockpiles sit exposed for a period of 90 days or more will be reviewed and accepted by the Garfield County Vegetation Manager. 4. Specific criteria for evaluating revegetation success must be site-specific and included as a part of the reclamation plan. 5. Vegetation production, species diversity and cover shall support the post- disturbance land use. 57 6. Areas where post-disturbance land use does not include lawns, gardens and flower beds shall approximate the surrounding undisturbed areas or be revegetated to a desired plant community with a composition of species and plant cover typical to that site. 7. The vegetation shall stabilize the site and support the planned post-disturbance land use, provide natural plant community succession and development, and be capable of renewing itself. This shall be demonstrated by: a. Using certified noxious weed-free seed. b. Successful on-site establishment of the species included in the planting mixture or other desirable species. c. Evidence of vegetation reproduction, either spreading by rhizomatous species or seed reproduction. d. Evidence of overall site stability and sustainability. 8. The revegetation plan shall provide for the greatest probability of success in plant establishment and vegetation development by considering environmental factors such as seasonal patterns of precipitation, temperature and wind, soil texture and fertility, slope stability and direction of slope faces. 9. To ensure the establishment of a diverse and long-lasting vegetative cover, the permittee shall employ appropriate techniques of site preparation and protection. 10. Species diversity should be selected for long-term land uses and provide for a reduction in visual contrast. 11. Where vegetation is to be used, a diversity of vegetation species shall be used to establish a resilient, self-perpetuating ecosystem capable of supporting the post- disturbance land use. 12. Species planted should include those that will provide quick soil stabilization, litter and nutrients for soil building and are self-renewing. 13. Integrated weed management methods shall be employed for all noxious weed species on the Garfield County List. Weed management methods shall be used whenever the infestation of the reclaimed area by noxious weeds threaten nearby areas. 14. Where revegetation is impractical or inconsistent with the surrounding undisturbed areas, other forms of surface stabilization shall be used. 4.09 Mapping and Inventory A. The Vegetation Manager will establish and maintain visual maps of past and present infestations of noxious weeds on County land. This will provide a graphic representation of weed management progress and needs. B. The primary goal of mapping will be to record the noxious weed species present, areas infested, density of infestations and other site factors pertinent to successfully managing the infestation. 58 C. Mapping priorities will be List A species, List B species designated for eradication and support for future grant-funded projects. 59 SECTION V ENFORCEMENT The control of noxious weeds is the responsibility of the subject property’s owner or occupant. The Garfield County Vegetation Manager is available to provide technical assistance. Enforcement of the Garfield County Weed Management Plan is authorized by the Colorado Noxious Weed Act (the Act), C.R.S 35-5.5-101.l, et seq. The Act directs local governments to take the necessary steps to manage noxious weeds in their jurisdiction, and provides specific authorization for local enforcement of duly adopted Weed Management plans. Garfield Count y will manage noxious weeds identified in the Garfield County Weed Management Plan and the Act in accordance with the following procedures: 5.01 Compliance: Private Lands A. Inspection: Garfield County, through its delegates, agents and employees shall have the right to enter upon any premises, lands or places whether public or private, during reasonable business hours for the purpose of inspecting for the existence of noxious weed infestations when at least one of the following has occurred: 1. The landowner had requested an inspection. 2. A neighboring landowner or occupant has reported a suspected noxious weed infestation and requested an inspection. 3. An authorized agent of the County has made a visual observation from a public right-of-way or area and has reason to believe that a noxious weed infestation exists. B. No entry upon any premises, lands or places shall be permitted until the landowner or occupant has been notified by certified mail that such an inspection is pending. Where possible, inspections shall be scheduled and conducted with the concurrence of the landowner or occupant. 1. If after receiving notice that an inspection is pending, the landowner or occupant denies access to the Garfield County inspector, the inspector may seek an inspection warrant issued by a municipal, county or district court having jurisdiction over the land. The court shall issue an inspection warrant upon presentation by Garfield County, through its agent or employee, of an affidavit stating: a. The information which gives the inspector reasonable cause to believe that any provision of the Act or the Garfield County Weed Management Plan is being or has been violated. b. That the occupant or landowner has denied access to the inspector. c. A general description of the location of the affected land. 2. No landowner or occupant shall deny access to such land when presented with an inspection warrant. 60 C. Management 1. If following inspection pursuant to 5.01(A), land is found to contain designated noxious weeds, Garfield County through its agent or employee, will give the landowner written notice, personally or by certified mail. The notice shall: a. Name the noxious weeds. b. Identify the location of the noxious weeds. c. Advise the landowner to control the noxious weeds. d. Specify the best available control methods of integrated management. e. The notice shall include an offer to consult with the landowner in the development of a management plan for the control of noxious weeds on the land. 2. The notice shall also state that the landowner has a reasonable period of time not to exceed 10 days, or 5 days for State List A species and populations of State List B species designated for eradication after receipt of notice to do one of the following: a. Option I: Comply with the terms of the notification. b. Option II: Acknowledge the terms of the notification and submit an acceptable plan and schedule for the completion of the plan for compliance to the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department. c. Option III: Request an arbitration panel to determine the final management plan. 3. If the landowner chooses Option I, the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department or its representative will re-inspect the land to confirm compliance within a reasonable period of time not to exceed 10 days, or 5 days for State List A species and populations of State List B species designated for eradication. 4. If the landowner chooses Option II, the Garfield Vegetation Management Department or its representative will review the proposed weed management plan and determine its efficacy. If the plan is acceptable, the Garfield Count y Vegetation Management Department will monitor the landowner’s compliance with the management plan, and after completion, will re-inspect to ensure that the noxious weeds have been effectively managed. 5. If the landowner chooses Option III, an arbitration panel will be selected by the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners in accordance with C.R.S. 35- 5.5-109(4)(b). a. The arbitration panel shall be comprised of a weed management specialist or weed scientist, a landowner of similar land in the Garfield County, and a third panel member chosen by agreement of the first two panel members. b. The landowner or occupant shall be entitled to challenge any one member of the panel, and the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners shall name a new panel member from the same category. 61 c. The decision of the arbitration panel shall be final. d. A hearing shall be set for a time and date as soon as practical after the panel is appointed. e. The Garfield County Vegetation Management Department or its representative shall give written notice, personally or by mail, of the hearing date and time to any complainant. The landowner or occupant is entitled to appear before the panel, individually or by representative, as is any complainant. f. The arbitration panel will be required to develop the final management plan not more than 2 calendar weeks after the hearing is completed. g. In the event of non-compliance with any management plan developed and approved by the arbitration panel, in addition to remedies set forth in paragraph 5.01(D), the arbitration panel shall have the ability to award cost s of the arbitration to the prevailing party including the arbitration panel fees and expenses. h. These fees and expenses may include, but are not limited to salary, wages, travel and per diem expenses. D. Failure to Comply. In the event the landowner or occupant fails to comply with the notice to manage the identified noxious weeds or fails to implement the plan developed by the arbitration panel, the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners has the authority to: 1. Compel management of the noxious weeds after notice to the landowner and a hearing. The Garfield County Vegetation Department or its representative shall give written notice of the hearing before the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners to the landowner personally or by certified mail which will include: a. Description of the affected land. b. Name of the noxious weeds and their location on the land. c. Date and time the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department or its representative will perform weed control on the land. d. Method of control to be applied. e. A statement that the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners may assess the whole cost of compliance, including up to 20% for inspection and other incidental costs in connection therewith, upon the lot or tract of land where the noxious weeds are located. Such assessment shall be a lien against the subject lot or tract of land until paid and shall have priority over all other liens except general taxes and prior special assessments. Such assessment may be certified to the Garfield County Treasurer and collected or paid over in the same manner as provided for the collection of taxes. Any funds collected pursuant to this section shall be deposited in the Garfield County Weed Fund or any similar fund. 62 2. Costs of providing for and compelling weed management shall not be assessed until the level of management called for in the notice or as developed by the arbitration panel has been successfully achieved. 3. Public Nuisance. If the landowner fails to comply with the notice to control the designated noxious weeds, fails to submit an acceptable management plan, or fails to comply with a management plan as determined by an arbitration panel, the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners may declare the noxious weeds a public nuisance pursuant to C.R.S. 35-5.5-113. Once declared, such nuisances are subject to all laws and remedies relating to the prevention and abatement of nuisances. E. Other occupants. Whenever the land is known to the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department or its representative to be occupied by someone other than the record owner, written notices also shall be given to the occupant, and the occupant shall be informed that pursuant to C.R.S. 35-5.5-109 and the Garfield County Weed Management Plan imposes on occupants the same responsibilities for noxious weed control as it imposes on landowners. F. Notice. 1. Whenever notice is given by mail, it shall be deemed given when deposited in a regular depository of the United States Postal Service, postage prepaid. 2. Notice to landowners shall be mailed to the affected lot or tract’s physical address and the landowner’s last known address as shown in the County Assessor’s records, and any other addresses the occupant has provided to the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department. 3. Notice to occupants shall be mailed to the affected lot or tract’s physical address and any other addresses the occupant has providedto the Garfield Count y Vegetation Management Department. G. Condition Precedent. No private land management shall be compelled without first applying the same or greater management measures to the County land or rights-of- way that are adjacent to the private property. 5.02 Compliance: Public Lands A. Municipalities. The governing body of each municipality in Garfield County shall adopt a noxious weed management plan pursuant to C.R.S. 35-5.5-106 for all lands within its jurisdiction. 1. Municipalities adopt and provide for the enforcement of such ordinances, resolutions, rules and other regulations as necessary to enforce such a plan. 2. Any municipal agent, delegate, employee, staff or contractor applying or recommending the use of chemical management methods in the administration of the Weed Management Plan shall be certified by the Colorado Department of Agriculture. 63 3. Municipalities may cooperate with counties and other municipalities to exercise any and all powers and authorities granted by the Act by entering into intergovernmental agreements. B. State Land. State boards, departments or agencies that administer or supervise state lands must manage noxious weeds pursuant to C.R.S. 35-5.5-110 on any lands under its jurisdiction, using methods prescribed by the local governing body in whose jurisdiction the state lands are located. 1. The Garfield County Board of County Commissioners, through its employees and agents, may give notice to the state board, department or agency advising of the presence of noxious weeds on public lands. This notice will specify the best available methods of integrated management. Wherever possible Garfield County shall consult with the state entity in development of a plan for the management of noxious weeds on the premises or lands in question. 2. Within a reasonable time after the receipt of the notification, not to exceed 10 days, the state entity shall do one of the following: a. Option I: Comply with the terms of the notification; b. Option II: Submit an acceptable management plan and a schedule for its completion to the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department; c. Option III: Request an arbitration panel to determine a final management plan. 3. If the state entity chooses Option I, the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department or its representative will re-inspect the land to confirm compliance within a reasonable period of time not to exceed 10 days, or 5 days for State List A species and populations of State List B species designated for eradication. 4. If the state entity chooses Option II, the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department or its representative will review the proposed weed management plan and determine its efficacy. a. If the plan is acceptable, the Department will monitor the state’s compliance with the management plan, and after completion, will re-inspect to ensure the noxious weeds have been effectively managed. 5. If the state entity chooses Option III, an arbitration panel will be selected by the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners in accordance with C.R.S. 35-5.5-110(2)(b). The arbitration panel shall be comprised of a weed management specialist or weed scientist, a landowner of similar land in Garfield County, and a third panel member chosen by agreement of the first two panel members. 6. The state entity will be entitled to challenge any one member of the panel, and the Garfield County Board of County Commissioners will name a new panel member from the same category. 7. The decision of the arbitration panel shall be final. 8. A hearing shall be set for a time and date as soon as practical after the panel is appointed. 64 9. The Garfield County Vegetation Management Department or its representative shall give written notice, personally or by mail, of the hearing date and time to any state entity. The state entity is entitled to appear before the panel, individually or by representative. 10. The arbitration panel will be required to develop the final management plan not more than 2 calendar weeks after the hearing is completed. C. Failure to Comply. In the event the state entity fails to comply with the notice to manage the identified noxious weeds, or implement the plan developed by an arbitration panel, the Garfield County Vegetation Management Department may undertake management of the noxious weeds at the expense of the state entity. 1. A written agreement for payment of the costs of noxious weed management will be reached within 2 weeks after the date such expenses are submitted to the state entity. 2. If no agreement for payment is reached, and if the costs of the noxious weed management is not immediately paid, such charge will be submitted to the controller who shall treat such amount as an encumbrance to the budget of the state entity, pursuant to C.R.S. 35-5.5-112. 3. Any state entity may enter into a contract with Garfield County to authorize management of noxious weeds on state-administered property on terms and conditions satisfactory to both parties. D. Federal land. Local governing bodies of all counties and municipalities are authorized pursuant to C.R.S. 35-5.5-111 to enter into cooperative agreements with federal and state agencies for the integrated management of noxious weeds within their jurisdictions. 1. Bureau of Land Management. The BLM within Garfield County manages its noxious weeds through its Field Offices in Silt (Colorado River Valley) and Grand Junction. Garfield County has an intergovernmental agreement with the Colorado River Valley Field Office to treat noxious weeds on BLM land as a supplement to the BLM’s own program. This agreement is reviewed and modified on an annual basis. Resources are limited and may provide for approximately 10 sites per year to be treated by County crews. 2. The White River National Forest has an intergovernmental agreement with the County to supplement the Forest program. Within Garfield County the Forest manages its noxious weeds through its Ranger Districts in Rifle, Carbondale and through the Supervisor’s Office in Glenwood Springs. 65 5.03 County Rights-of-Way Garfield County and each state entity must confirm that all public roads, highways, rights-of-way, and any easements pertaining to these, under the jurisdiction of these entities, are in compliance with C.R.S. 35-5.5-112, and any violations of the Act shall be the financial responsibility of the Garfield County or state entity. 66 SECTION VI PLAN EVALUATION 6.01 Plan Evaluation A. The goals and plan of work in the Garfield County Noxious Weed Management Plan will be reviewed and evaluated annually at the February Garfield County Weed Advisory Board meeting. Any proposed additions or changes shall be recommended by the Board and approved by ordinance by the BOCC before becoming final. B. The Garfield County Weed Management Plan shall be reviewed by the Weed Advisory Board at least every 3 years (C.R.S. 35-5.5-107(4)(a)). The management plan and any recommended amendments to the plan shall be transmitted to the BOCC for approval, modification or rejection. 67 APPENDIX A Photo s © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; and map above by Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Updated on: 08/08 Absinth wormwoodColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Absinth is well branched and gets 3 feet tall and 2 feet across. Silver-grey leaves and small yellow flowers. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts A bsinth wormwood (Artemisia absinthium) is native to Eurasia, the Middle East and North Africa. It was introduced to North America in the early 19th century to be cultivated for medicinal use. It was first reported outside cultivated gardens in 1841, along roadsides and waste grounds. A bsinth wormwood is a long- lived perennial that possesses a strong sage odor and bitter taste. Plants grow 2 to 4 feet in height and are prolific seed producers. It has a taproot that can reach 2 inches in diameter and shallow lateral fibrous root branches that can extend up to 6 feet long in all given directions. Plants are woody at the base and regrow from the soil level each spring. The stems are numerous and are covered with fine, gray hairs while the leaves area blue-olive green, alternate and highly divided. Flowers are small, yellowish and arranged in large, spike-like panicles. The seed viability is estimated to be 3 to 4 years and are easily scattered by wind, water, animals, and in hay. The seeds are less than 1/6 inch long, smooth, flattened and light gray. Key ID Points Artemisia absinthium L.Absinth wormwood Identification and Management H abitats for Absinth wormwood include disturbed sites, moist soils, and is also shade tolerant. It can occur in 5,000 to 7,000 feet elevation and is considered a weed in pastureland, cropland, and rangeland. Absinth wormwood is listed as poor palatability in horses, but good for sheep. T he key to effective control of Absinth wormwood is a combination of control methods. Compared to most perennials, it is fairly easy to control with chemicals in combination with mechanical control. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. A bsinth wormwood is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Cultural controls are possible in theory, but are very ti me consuming and expensive. Complete removal of any seedlings or newly established plants by conti nual hand pulling is also possible. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Absinth wormwood. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more informati on, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Hand pull or dig when soil is moist. Make certain to pull all the roots, including short horizontal roots. Bag specimens carefully so as to not scatt er seeds if removed during or aft er fl owering. Multi ple mowings prior to seed generati on can cause stress and may provide a control opti on. Top to bottom photos, © Chris Evans, River to River CWMA, Bugwood.org; Mary Ellen (Mel) Harte, , Bugwood.org; and Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood.org.Absinth wormwoodIntegrated Weed Management: Absinth Wormwood is easily controlled using a combination of methods such as chemical and mechanical. Compared to most perennials, it is fairly easy to control. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Picloram (Tordon 22K- restricted use) 1 pint product/acre Apply when plant is 12 inches tall through flowering growth stage. Do not use near trees, desirable shrubs or water. (Summer to Early Fall) Aminopyralid (Milestone - general use) 7 fl oz product/acre Apply when plant is 12 inches tall though flowering growth stage. (Summer to Early Fall) Clopyralid +2,4-D (Curtail - general use) 2 quarts product/acre Apply when plant is 12 inches tall through flowering growth stage. (Summer to Early Fall) Dicamba (Banvel, Vanquish, Clarity - general use) 1 quart product/acre Apply when plant is 12 inches tall through flowering growth stage. Do not use near trees, desirable shrubs or water. (Summer to Early Fall)Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © (2 on bottom, left): Steve Dewey, Utah State University; (Top left and top center): Mary Ellen Harte, forestryimages.com and Map above by Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Black henbaneColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Shallow lobed leaves that have sticky hairs. Flowers have purple centers and veins. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts B lack henbane (Hyoscyamus niger) was introduced from Europe as an ornamental and medicinal herb. In Colorado it is mostly found on the western slope. The plant blooms June through September and may be an annual or biennial. A mature plant reaches 1 to 3 feet in height with foliage that has a fowl odor. Leaves are shallowly lobed to coarsely toothed with sticky hairs. The outer part of the flower is brownish yellow in color with a purple center and veins. Fruits are approximately 1 inch long with 5 lobes. A ll parts of Black henbane are poisonous to both livestock and humans when ingested. However; the plant is usually avoided by livestock due to the foul odor. The plant is a strong competitor for moisture and nutrients and produces a persistent litter effecting germination and growth of native plants. Black henbane invades disturbed and overgrazed sites. A good preventable measure is to guard against overuse. H abitats for Black henbane included disturbed open spaces, roadsides, fields, waste places and abandoned gardens. It grows in most soil types but likes sandy or well Key ID Points Hyoscyamus nigerBlack henbane Identification and Management drained loam soils. The seed viability or longevity is considered to be 1 to 5 years. T he key to effective control of Black henbane is guarding against disturbance and overuse, this can prove to be a good preventative measure against black henbane. Mechanical control and chemicals are the most commonly recommended method. Controlling plants in the spring or early summer prior to seed production is most effective, follow-up treatments are recommended to pick up missed or late bolting plants. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. B lack henbane is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Cultural controls are possible in theory, but are very time consuming and expensive. Complete removal of any seedlings or newly established plants by continual hand pulling is also possible. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Black henbane. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Hand pull or dig from moist soil, so the entire tap root system can be removed. Tillage will control henbane, but is usually not recommended due to the land it occupies: rangeland, roadsides and pastures. Be sure to bag specimens carefully if removed during or after flowering. Top to bottom photos, © (Top 2 photos) Stevens County (Washington State) Noxious Weed Control Board; and bottom photo David Hallinan, Bannock County Weed Superintendent, Idaho Weed Awareness Campaign.Black henbaneIntegrated Weed Management: Controlling plants in the spring or early summer prior to seed production is most effective, follow-up treatments are recommended to pick up missed or late bolting plants. Constant monitoring of site after last adult flowering plant is removed is suggested since seed viability can be up to 5 years. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP) 1 oz product/acre plus 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Surfactant absolutely necessary. Apply late bolt to early flower. (Summer to Early Fall) Picloram (Tordon 22K *this is a Restricted Use Pesticide*) Apply at 1 qt/acre plus 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when soil moisture adequate and weeds rapidly growing. (Late Spring to Early Fall)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Lower left by: Ohio State Weed Lab Archive, Ohio State University, Bugwood.org; Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood.org; All others by Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. BouncingbetColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Leaves are opposite, smooth, narrow, and 2-4 inches long. Flowers have five petals and are generally light pink to white. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts B ouncingbet (Saponaria officinalis) is a perennial forb. The flowers are crowded at the ends of branches, and have five petals that are generally light pink to white and slightly notched at the apex. Flowering begins in July and continues until September. The fruits are many-seeded capsules and seeds are dull-black and roundish or kidney-shaped. Bouncingbet reproduces by seed and spreads by rhizomatous swollen nodes. Leaves are opposite, smooth, narrow, 2 to 4 inches long and have three distinct veins from the base. The stems are erect, sparingly branched, smooth, and forming. Mature plants grow up to three feet tall. B ouncingbet can be poisonous to livestock and humans. It is generally considered unpalatable to livestock. The plant contains sapogenic glycosides that cause gastrointestinal irritation and can destroy red blood cells when absorbed in the blood streams of grazing animals. T he habitat of Bouncingbet is often found in large dense patches on hillsides, along rivers, roadsides, meadows, and waste areas. It prefers moist, well-drained soil, and full sun to partial shade and is currently found primarily in municipal areas and nearby wildlands. Bouncingbet spreads rapidly, replacing Key ID Points Saponaria officinalisBouncingbet Identification and Management more valuable species (e.g. perennial grasses). Bouncingbet is increasingly common in Colorado, particularly in residential areas and local open spaces where it has escaped as an ornamental species. Bouncingbet was originally introduced from Europe as a garden ornamental. T he key to effective control of Bouncingbet is early detection and prevention of new infestations, since it is not yet widespread in Colorado. If infestations are discovered, they should be controlled immediately, and all seed production prevented. Since Bouncingbet usually grows in dense patches it is relatively easy to spot and treat. Be aware that this species is often found in wet areas, which may restrict the use of certain herbicides. As with all perennial weeds that have extensive root systems, the key to controlling Bouncingbet, is to eliminate seed production while depleting the nutrient reserves in the roots. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. B ouncingbet is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Bouncingbet. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Physical or mechanical control of Bouncingbet is NOT recommended because the plant reproduces clonally from its root system. Handpull or dig only single plants/new infestations when soil is moist to make certain entire root system is excavated.BouncingbetIntegrated Weed Management: Since Bouncingbet usually grows in dense patches it is relatively easy to spot and treat. Be aware that this species is often found in wet areas, which may restrict the use of certain herbicides. As with all perennial weeds that have extensive root systems, the key to controlling Bouncingbet is to eliminate seed production while depleting the nutrient reserves in the roots.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Chlorsulfuron (Telar)1 oz product/A + 0.25% v/v Apply at bolting to bud growth stage. (Late Spring to Mid Summer)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Top to bottom: Michael Shephard, USDA Forest Service, Bugwood.org; Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood.org; and Dale Swenarton, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture, map above by Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture, Updated on: 08/08 Bull thistleColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Leaves are prickly-hairy above and cottony below. Heads cobwebby- pubescent (hairy). Flowers are composite and purple in color. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts B ull thistle (Cirsium vulgare (Savi) Tenore) is a biennial forb that was introduced to North America as a seed contaminant and is now widespread. Gumdrop- shaped flowers are pinkish to dark purple in color and 1 ½ to 2 inches in diameter. The flower bracts are somewhat tapered and covered with spines. Seeds are capped with a circle of plume-like white hairs. Leaves are alternate. In Colorado, Bull thistles are the only species that are prickly hairy on the top and are cottony-hairy on the undersides of the leaves. In mature plants the leaves extend down, clasping the stem and are divided into segments. The plant has a short, fleshy taproot with several primary roots extending from the root crown. Seed leaves are round to spatulate, and smooth. Mature plants can produce up to 4,000 seeds per plant. H abitats for Bull thistle include dry to moist environments. It thrives on nitrogen-rich soils, and it grows on gravelly to clay-textured soils. Bull thistle cannot withstand deep shade and is commonly seen in areas such as pastures, overgrazed rangeland, roadsides, and logged areas. Within Colorado Bull thistle infestations have been reported to occur in nearly all counties west of the continental divide, this plant has also been observed in the Upper Arkansas Watershed and in pockets on the plains. It is widespread throughout the United States and parts of Canada. Key ID Points Cirsium vulgare (Savi) TenoreBull thistle Identification and ManagementHeavy infestations can reduce livestock forage. Additionally, the presence of bull thistle in hay decreases the forage value and lowers the market price. It is an aggressive weed, but it will not withstand cultivation. Bull thistle is often a transient species, appearing in recent clear cuts or disturbed areas and becoming a dominant species for several years. It has been reported to cause hay fever in some individuals and is often confused with musk thistle. T he key to effective control of Bull thistle is maintaining healthy pastures and rangeland , guarding against disturbance or overuse, and as with most biennial limit seed production. To reduce seed production, plants with buds or flowers should be collected and immediately disposed of or destroyed. Chemical control is most effective when plants are in rosette stage, spring or early fall. Mechanical controls can be used to eliminate small patches or plants in a later growth stages. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. B ull thistle is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www. colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL Urophora stylata, a fly predator, is used to help control this thistle. The female fly lays eggs in the seed head of the thistle. The maggot then consumes the seed in the flower. This species has overwintered in Colorado but the limited numbers will not allow for general redistribution. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Because biennial thistles do not reproduce from their roots, any mechanical or physical method that severs the root below the soil surface will kill the weed. It is necessary to revegetate the site with desirable plants. Tillage, hoeing, or even hand- pulling should be successful (not on rangeland), providing it is done before the reproductive growth stages. Bull thistleIntegrated Weed Management: Prevention is the most effective control with Bull thistle, maintaining healthy pastures and rangeland and continually monitor your property for new infestations. As with most biennials, limiting seed production is another key to controlling plant populations. Chemical and mechanical options to control Bull thistle are also effective. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Clopyralid (Transline or Stinger) 0.13 to 0.5 Apply to rosettes in spring or fall. Clopyralid + 2,4-D (Curtail) 0.2 + 1.0 to 0.3 + 1.5 Apply to rosettes in spring or fall. Dicamba (Banvel, Vanquish, or Clarity) 0.5 + 1.0 Apply to rosettes in spring or fall if good growing conditions exist. 2,4-D or 2,4-D + dicamba (Rangestar) 1.5 to 2.0 1.0 + 0.5 Apply to rosettes in spring. Picloram (Tordon 22K *restricted use chemical) 0.13 to 0.25 Apply to rosettes in spring or fall. Chlorsulfuron (Telar)0.047 (0.75 oz ai)Spring from bolting to bud stages; add a non- ionic surfactant Metsulfuron (Escort XP)0.019 (0.3 oz ai)Spring from bolting to bud stages; add a non- ionic surfactant.Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Top to bottom: Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; Eric Coombs, Oregon Department of Agriculture, Bugwood.org; and UAF Cooperative Extension Archive, University of Alaska - Fairbanks, Bugwood.org. Canada thistleColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street, Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Purple flowers form in clusters of 1-5 per branch. Floral bracts are spineless. Small heads, vanilla scent. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts C anada thistle (Cirsium arvense) is a non-native deep-rooted perennial that spreads by seeds and aggressive, creeping, horizontal roots (rhizomes). Canada thistle can grow 2 to 4 feet in height. The leaves are oblong, spiny, bright green in color, and are only slightly hairy on the undersurface. Flowers occur in small clusters that form on the ends of branches. They are about 1 cm in diameter, tubular shaped, and vary from white to purple in color with a strong vanilla scent (female flowers). C anada thistle emerges from its root system from late April through May. It begins to flower in late spring to early summer with increase in day length. Canada thistle only produces about 1,000 to 1,500 seeds per plant. Typically, it reproduces vegetatively through a creeping root system, and can quickly form dense stands. Every piece of root, from 1/2 to 1 inch in length, is capable of forming new plants. The key to controlling Canada thistle is to eliminate seed production and also to reduce the plant’s nutrient reserves in its root system through persistent, long-term management. Key ID Points Cirsium arvenseCanada thistle Identification and Management C anada thistle is one of the most feared noxious weeds in the U.S. as it can infest many land types, from roadsides, ditch banks, riparian zones, pastures, irrigated cropland, to the most productive dryland cropland. Forage production is severely reduced because cattle will not graze near infestations. T he key to effective control of Canada thistle is combining control methods. These weeds need to be continually stressed, forcing it to exhaust root nutrient stores and eventually die. Of all control methods, prevention is most important. Maintain healthy pastures and rangeland and continually monitor your property for new infestations. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. C anada thistle is designated as a “List B” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Program link or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations All photos © Kelly Uhing, Infestation map above, Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Canada thistle during the flowering stage. This stage typically occurs in the early summer. Seed production will follow and effective management options will then become limited. Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of Canada thistle. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bare ground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICAL Cattle, goats, and sheep will graze on Canada thistle when plants are young and succulent in the spring. Follow up grazing with a fall herbicide application. Insects are available but have not been effective. Insects can be obtained at no charge from the Colorado Department of Agriculture. Please call 970-464-7916 or visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd for more information. MECHANICAL Due to extensive root system, hand- pulling this plant is not a viable option. Mowing can be effective if done every 10 to 21 days throughout the growing sea- son. Combining mowing with herbicides will further enhance control of Canada thistle. Bindweed mite damage Canada thistleIntegrated Weed Management: Combining control methods for Canada thistle is imperative. This weed needs to be continually stressed, forcing it to exhaust root nutrient stores and eventually die. Of all control methods, prevention is most important. Maintain healthy pastures and rangeland and continually monitor your property for new infestations.www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Please read label for exact rates. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecommendationsHERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Aminopyralid (Milestone) 5-7 ounces/acre or 1 teaspoon/gal water Apply in spring at the pre-bud growth stage and/or to fall regrowth. Add non-ionic surfactant 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Chlorsulfuron (Telar DF) 1-3 ounces/acre or 0.50 grams/1 gal water Apply in spring during bud to bloom stage and/ or to fall regrowth. Add non-ionic surfactant 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Clopyralid + 2,4-D (Redeem R&P) 3 pints/acre or 1.25 oz/gal water Apply from rosette to bud stage when all plants have emerged. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. (Spring or Fall) Picloram (Tordon 22K *This is a Restricted Use Pesticide*) 1 qt/acre or 1.0 oz/gal water Spring - early bud stage and/or fall regrowth. DO NOT apply near or under trees or where soils have rapid permeability or where water level is high. Add a non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture Photos © All Photos from Kelly Uhing, Department of Agriculture; Except middle left Colorado State University Extension, East Adams County 1 ChicoryColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Identification and Impacts C hicory (Chichorium intybus) a perennial forb native to Eurasia. Plants initially appear as a basal rosette with leaves similar to a common dandelion. The leaves are lanceolate shaped and have rough hairs on the upper and lower surfaces. They are slightly lobed or dissected with toothed margins and can be 3 inches to 10 inches in length. The lobes and dissections are not opposite, like dandelions. The leaves that appear on the flowering stem are similar in shape but smaller in size. Stems can reach up to 3 to 5 feet in height and are sticky to glabrous to the touch. The plants flowering stems appear later in the growing season, producing purple to blue to white flowers. The flowers are in clusters of 1 to 3, and individual flowers are about 1 inch in diameter with toothed petals. The root system consists of a large brown taproot, which will produce a milky sap if broken. Chicory generally reproduces by seeds, that can survive up to 4 years. H abitats for Chicory include, pastures, turfgrass, hayfields, roadsides, waste ground, and any disturbed site. Plants can survive in Key ID Points Chichorium intybusIdentification and Management infertile and dry conditions. Plants can even be present after a drought period. It is found throughout Colorado from elevations of 4,000 to 7,000 feet. The milky sap released from all parts of the plant can cause dermatitis if it contacts the skin. Animals will consume Chicory. If consumed by dairy cattle, it can leave a bitter taste to the milk. T he key to effective control of Chicory is preventing the establishment of the plant on disturbed sites. The plants can not resist persistent cultivation. Mechanical and chemical treatments are effective as well. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. C hicory is designated as a “List C” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local jurisdictions managing this species. For more information, visit www.colorado.gov/ag/weeds or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List C Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/09 CULTURAL Planting desirable grasses and forbs to outcompete chicory is an effective management tool. Reestablishing a healthy plant community where disturbed or bareground is present helps with management. For specific seed recommendations contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Services for seed mixes. BIOLOGICALCurrently there is not any biocontrol available for Chicory. Biocontrol takes many years of research and development. For more information contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916 for more information. MECHANICAL Hand pull or dig when soil is moist, but make sure to wear gloves. Bag specimens carefully so as not to scatter seeds. The key to effective control is to prevent seed production and/or spread. Mowing can also be an effective management option. Chicory plants don’t respond well if mechanical treatments are persistent. Photos © Top to Bottom; (Unklnown) Viginia Tech Weed Guide; Whitney Cranshaw, colorado State University, Bugwood.org; Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture ChicoryI ntegrated Weed Management: Identifying and preventing the establishment of Chicory on disturbed sites proves to be the most effective control. Plants can also be controlled using a combination of chemical and mechanical treatments. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Aminopyralid (Milestone) 4-6 oz./acre or 1 teaspoon/gal water Spring at actively growing stage. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. 2,4-D Amine 2-4 qt./acre Apply to early growth of flower bud stage in spring. DO NOT apply when outside temperature exceed 85 degrees. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. 2,4-D+Dicamba 3 pints/acre Apply to early growth stage to early bolting stage in spring. Picloram (Tordon 22K *This is a Restricted Use Pesticide*) 1-2 pts/acre or 0.75 oz/gal water Apply in spring seedling to early growth stages. DO NOT apply near trees/shrubs/high water table.Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List C Species Photos and Map © Colorado Department of Agriculture. 1 Chinese clematisColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 1. Solitary flowers with four yellow sepals. 2. A herbaceous to woody vine climbing perennial. Identification and Impacts Chinese clematis (Clematis orientalis) is a herbaceous to woody vined perennial that is native to Eurasia. It is an escaped ornamental species that is a deciduous climber growing up to 12 feet. Solitary flowers have four yellow sepals (petal-like structures) that are often nodding. Each flower produces numerous feathery, long- tailed fruits which are conspicuous all winter. The plant flowers from August to September. Habitats for Chinese clematis include roadsides, riparian corridors and rocky slopes. It is sometimes found in open woods. Plants prefer sunny areas but have shown to be somewhat shade tolerant. Chinese clematis prefers well-drained soils. Chinese clematis can cause death to young trees and brush. It outcompetes native shrubs and herbaceous species. Plants will completely cover; rock walls, trees, bushes and fences. The juice of freshly crushed leaves and stems have blister causing agents. Key ID Points Clematis orientalisChinese clematisIdentification and Management The key to effective control of Chinese clematis is preventing the plants from going to seed. Pulling the woody stem prior to flowering can be an effective control. Chemical treatments are also effective when dealing with Chinese clematis. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. Chinese clematis is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/weeds and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 CULTURALCultural controls are possible in theory, but are very time consuming and expensive. Complete removal of any seedlings or newly established plants by continual hand pulling is also possible. BIOLOGICALThere is no biological control available for Chinese clematis. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Hand pull or dig when soil is moist. Make certain to pull all the roots and bag specimens carefully so as to not scatter seeds if flowering. Top to bottom photos, © (Top 2 photos) Stevens County (Washington State) Noxious Weed Control Board; and bottom photo David Hallinan, Bannock County Weed Superintendent, Idaho Weed Awareness Campaign.Chinese clematisIntegrated Weed Management: The most effective control method for dealing with Chinese clematis is preventing the plant from going to seed. Pulling the plant from the ground, by the woody stem, prior to the plant flowering is the most effective control. Chinese clematis also responds well to chemical treatments. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP) 1 oz product/acre plus 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply at flowering growth stage. (equivalent to 1 qt. over 100 gal. of total spray solution) (Fall) Imazapic (Plateau) 12 fl oz product/ acre plus 1 qt/acre methylated seed oil Apply at flowering growth stage. (Fall) 2, 4-D amine 2,4-D amine that is 4.0 lb active ingredient/ gallon of product Apply at flowering to early post flowering growth stages, will damage neighboring brush species, if present (2 qts.product/acre) (Fall) Picloram (Tordon 22K *this is a Restricted Use Pesticide*) 1 qt product/acre Apply at flowering growth stages, will damage neighboring brush species, if present, do NOT apply near trees or water. (Fall)Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © All Photos from Kelly Uhing, Department of Agriculture 1 Common burdockIdentification and Impacts C ommon burdock (Arctium minus) is a biennial forb that is native to Europe. The first year of growth is a basal rosette, producing large cordate, thickly hairy leaves. The second year of growth, is a coarse, multi-branched, erect stem that will grow to heights of 3 to 10 feet tall. The large, dark green leaves are alternate and appear to have toothed or wavy margins. They are broadest and the base of the leaf and diminish as they approach the tip of the leaf, and have a hairy underside. The flowers appear at the end of the branches, numerous, clustered and are pink to purple in color. At the base of the flower there are many spines that often have a hook on the end. The flower and the spines dry and becomes an easily dispersible bur. Flowering and seed production occur from July to October. The plant grows from a sturdy taproot that is brown and fleshy in color. H abitats for Common burdock include roadsides, ditch banks, waste places, pastures, and fence rows. Animals will avoid eating the plant in both years of growth, the first year due to the hairy leaves and the second Key ID Points Arctium minusIdentification and Management year due to the spines and burs. The burs can easily get entangled into livestock fur, make distribution easy over large areas. T he key to effective control of minimizing soil disturbance and preventing the establishment of plants. Using an integrated weed management approach combining chemical, cultural, and mechanical methods to control these plants is effective. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. C ommon burdock is designated as a “List C” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local jurisdictions managing this species. For more information, visit www.colorado.gov/ag/weeds or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List C Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/09 CULTURAL Minimizing soil disturbance and encouraging the establishment of desirable grasses and forbs, can assist in controlling Common burdock. For specific seed recommendations contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Services for seed mixes. BIOLOGICALCurrently there is not any biocontrol available for Common burdock. Biocontrol takes many years of research and development. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916 for more information. MECHANICAL Hand pull or dig when soil is moist, but make sure to wear gloves. Bag specimens carefully so as not to scatter seeds. Mowing is also effective, cutting the top growth of the plant. The key to effective control is to prevent seed production and/or spread. Photos © Top to Bottom; Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; Whitney Cranshaw, Colorado State University, Bugwood.org; Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture Common burdockI ntegrated Weed Management: Preventing the establishment and minimizing soil disturbance is an effective way to control Common burdock. Combining treatment methods of cultural, mechanical and chemical assist with controlling these plants.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Aminopyralid (Milestone) 4-7 oz/acre or 1 teaspoon/gal water Apply in rosette stage in spring or fall. Add non-ionic surfactact @ 0.32 oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Clopyralid (Stinger)1/2-1 1/3 pts/acre Apply to young to actively growing plants in the spring. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/gal water or 1 pt/100 gal water. 2,4-D Amine 2 pts/acre Apply to young to actively growing plants in the spring. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/gal water or 1 pt/100 gal water. 2,4-D Dicamba 1 pt/acre Apply to young to actively growing plants pre-flower stages in spring. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/gal water or 1 pt/100 gal water.Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List C Species Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Common tansyColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Button shaped flowerheads lack petals . Foliage is strong smelling when crushed . Slender leaflets. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts C ommon tansy (Tanacetum vulgare L.) is a perennial plant that reproduces by both seed and creeping rootstocks. Seeds are yellowish brown achenes with short, five-toothed crowns. Yellow flowers are numerous in flat-topped dense clusters at the tops of the plants. Button-like flower heads lack ray flowers. Flowering typically occurs from July to September. The leaves are alternate, deeply divided into numerous narrow, individual leaflets. Mature plants are 1.5 to 6 feet tall. Stems are often purplish-red in color and extensively branched towards the top. The foliage emits a strong odor when crushed. H abitats for Common tansy include along roadsides, streams, irrigation ditch banks, waste places, ornamental beds and in pastures. It grows best in full sun and on fertile, well-drained soil. Common tansy is found throughout the United States, although it is native to Europe. C ommon tansy is considered undesirable forage for livestock. The plant is considered toxic if large quantities are consumed; fortunately animals rarely ingest it as it is very unpalatable. Common tansy can impact forage quality and quantity. With adequate moisture common tansy will displace native and other desirable species. Key ID Points Tanacetum vulgare L.Common tansy Identification and Management T he key to effective control of Common tansy is to stop the establishment and spread of infestations. Mechanical and hand cutting/pulling can assist with limiting seed production, but will not eradicate plants. Common tansy is considered toxic, use protective equipment when controlling. Another effective contol method is using herbicides. A combination of these two methods, will offer desirable results. Since Common tansy grows rhizometously, depleting the storage of carbohydrates in the root system will help control the plants. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. C ommon tansy is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Common tansy. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Controls such as hand cutting are most effective in combination with other methods. Tansy regenerates from root fragments, so cultivation could expand the size of an infestation. Common tansy can be mowed just before flowering and seed set to decrease seed production. This method may have to be repeated to eliminate re-growth from the rootstocks.Common tansyIntegrated Weed Management: Preventing the establishment and seed production of the plants is the most effective control method. Combining control methods, mechanical and chemical will help deplete the storage of essential carbohydrates in the root system and control the plants.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP)1 oz product/ac. + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply to when in bolting to bud growth stages. (Late Spring to Mid Summer)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Top to bottom: Jan Samanek, State Phytosanitary Administration, Bugwood.org; Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood.org; and Michael Shephard, USDA Forest Service, Bugwood.org. Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Updated on: 08/08 Common teaselColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Grows over 6 feet tall. Leaves at the base are dark green and appear rippled. Flowers are purple or white. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts C ommon teasel (Dipsacus spp.) is a biennial or sometimes monocarpic perennial forb. The fruits are a four-angled achene, each containing a single seed. Common teasel can produce more than 2,000 seeds per plant. The flowers are purple or white with spiny, awned bracts at the base. The flower head is generally egg-shaped, with a square base. The floral bracts at the base of the head are generally longer than the head. Rosette leaves are conspicuously veined, with stiff prickles on the lower midrib and appear to be wrinkled. Stem leaves are simple, opposite, net- veined, stalkless, and clasp the stem. Mature plants can grow up to or over six feet tall. The taprooted stem is rigid with several rows of downward turned prickles. Plants die after production of seed has occurred. H abitats for Common teasel include open, sunny habitats that range from wet to dry levels. It is generally found along irrigation ditches, rivers, abandoned fields, pastures, waste places, and forests. Common teasel is spreading rapidly in America, particularly in the Pacific Northwest. In Colorado, teasel is usually found in relatively moist, disturbed situations but is moving into drier areas. Seeds can stay viable for at least 2 years. Seeds don’t generally disperse far form the parent plant. Plants can regenerate Key ID Points Dipsacus spp.Common teasel Identification and Management fairly easily, due to the bare ground where the basal leaves were. Common teasel is native to Europe where it historically had many uses. T he key to effective control of Common teasel is prevention. Eliminate seed production to decrease the spread of this forb, and continue to deplete the seed bank for four to six years. Reseeding areas with perennial grasses for several years will reduce an infestation. Mechanical and chemical control methods are effective when dealing with Common teasel. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. C ommon teasel is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Common teasel. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Treatments such as digging and cutting can be effective in certain situations. Digging at the rosette and bolting stage, making sure that the majority of the root comes up, can be effective. Cutting plants when near the flowering stage is also effective. When using either of these methods, revisiting the site frequently is recommended to ensure regrowth does not occur. Common teaselIntegrated Weed Management: The key to controlling Common teasel is to eliminate seed production and exhaust the seed bank in the soil. Common teasel does not reproduce vegetatively and dies after seed production. Mechanical and chemical control methods can be effective.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP)1 oz. of product/ac. + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when in rosette or bolting growth stage. (Spring or Fall rosettes or Early summer bolting) Aminopyralid (Milestone) 4 to 7 fl. oz./ac. (start with 7 fl. oz.) + 0.25% v/v non-ionice surfactant Apply when in rosette or bolting growth stage. Best choice of herbicide to use in riparian areas. (Spring or Fall rosettes or Early summer bolting) Imazapic (Plateau)8 to 12 fl. oz./ac. + 2 pt/ac. methylated seed oil Apply when in rosette or bolting growth stage. Good choice of herbicide to use in riparian areas. (Spring or Fall rosettes or Early summer bolting)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Steve Dewey, Utah State University, Bugwood.org. Photos © Clockwise from lower left: 1995 Dean Wm. Taylor, Jepson Herbarium; Updated on: 08/08 Corn chamomileColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Has no odor. Small daisy-like flowers. Small, bushy forb that is 10 to 30 inches in height. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts C orn chamomile (Anthemis arvensis L.) is an annual forb. The flowers are 0.75 inches in diameter and are borne at the ends of branched stems. Flowers resemble daisies with white ray flowers and yellow disk centers. The seeds are 10 ribbed with out glandular bumps. Leaves are alternate and finely dissected and mature plants are 10 to 30 inches tall. There is no odor when leaves are crushed, unlike Mayweed chamomile. Stems are erect, smooth, and highly branched above. Corn chamomile germinates readily in the spring and fall. It has a dense, fibrous root system, which spreads rapidly during wet periods. L ate summer and fall-germinated seedlings may overwinter as rosettes. In the spring, bolting commences with the elongation of the central stem. Overwintering plants flower in mid-May and spring germinated seedlings flower in June. Flowering stops after a killing frost, usually in October. The plant reproduces primarily by seeds. H abitats for Corn chamomile include: roadsides, ditches, in urban areas, waste places, cultivated Key ID Points Anthemis arvenisis L.Corn chamomile Identification and Management fields, and pastures. It can grow in a wide range of soils but seems to prefer moist, poorly drained soils. Corn chamomile prefers moist areas and increases in abundance during years of above average precipitation. T he key to effective control of Corn chamomile is prevention. Eliminate seed production to decrease the spread of this annual forb. Mowing is effective if done before the seed sets. Reseeding areas with perennial grasses for several years will reduce an infestation. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. C orn chamomile is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Corn chamomile. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICALFrequent, shallow tillage can help exhaust the seed bank in non-native areas. Mowing is not an effective long-term control method due to the fact the plant will prostate, in the short-term mowing will assist with limiting seed production. Hand pulling can prevent spread into new areas and is effective on small infestations. Corn chamomileIntegrated Weed Management: Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal. Eliminate seed production to decrease the spread of this annual forb, and continue to deplete the seed bank for four to six years. Reseeding areas with perennial grasses for several years will reduce an infestation. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP)0.33 oz product/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette to bolting growth stage. (Early Spring to Early Summer, sometimes Fall rosettes) Chlorsulfuron (Telar)0.33 oz product/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette or bolting growth stage. (Early Spring to Early Summer, sometimes Fall rosettes) Aminopyralid (Milestone) 7 fl oz/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette growth stage. (Early Spring to Early Summer, sometimes Fall rosettes)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture Photos © Clockwise from lower left: Chris Evans, CWMA River to River; Richard Old, XID Services Inc., Bugwood.org; Todd Pfeiffer, Klamath County Updated on: 08/08 Cutleaf teaselColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Grows over 6 feet tall. Leaves are dark green and appear rippled. Flowers are purple or white. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts C utleaf teasel (Dipsacus spp.) is a biennial or sometimes monocarpic perennial forb. The plant grows as a basal rosette for a minimum of one year then sends up a tall flowering stalk and dies after flowering. The period of time in the rosette stage varies depending on the amount of time needed to acquire enough resources for flowering to occur. The flowers are almost white (taninsh) or white with spiny, awned bracts at the base. The floral bracts at the base of the head are generally longer than the head and wider than Common teasel. Flowering plants have large, oblong, opposite leaves that form cups and are prickly. The fruits are a four-angled achene, each contains a single seed. A single teasel plant can produce over 2,000 seeds. Rosette leaves are conspicuously veined, vary from somewhat ovoid in young plants to large and oblong leaves that are quite hairy in older plants. Stem leaves are simple, opposite, broad and feathering lobed. Mature plants can grow up to or over six feet tall. Cutleaf teasel blooms from July through September. H abitats for Cutleaf teasel include open, sunny habitats that range from wet to dry levels. It is generally found along irrigation ditches, rivers, abandoned fields, pastures, waste places, and forests. Teasels are an aggressive exotic species that have the capacity to take over prairies Key ID Points Dipsacus spp.Cutleaf teasel Identification and Management and savannas if allowed to become established. S eeds typically don’t disperse far; most seedlings will be located around the parent plant. Parent plants often provide an optimal nursery site for new teasel plants after the adult dies. Dead adult plants leave a relatively large area of bare ground, formerly occupied by their own basal leaves, that new plants readily occupy. Seeds may have the capacity to be water-dispersed, which may allow seeds to be dispersed over longer distances. Immature seed heads of Cutleaf teasel are capable of producing viable seed. Lack of natural enemies allows teasel to proliferate. If left unchecked, teasel can quickly form large monocultures excluding all native vegetation. Cutleaf teasel is more aggressive than Common teasel. T he key to effective control of Cutleaf teasel is prevention. Eliminate seed production to decrease the spread of this forb, and continue to deplete the seed bank for four to six years. Reseeding areas with perennial grasses for several years will reduce an infestation. Mechanical and chemical control methods are effective when dealing with Cutleaf teasel. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. C utleaf teasel is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Cutleaf teasel. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Treatments such as digging and cutting can be effective in certain situations. Digging at the rosette and bolting stage making sure that the majority of the root comes up can be effective. Cutting plants when plants near the flowering stage is also effective. When using either of these methods, revisiting the site frequently is recommended to ensure regrowth does not occur. HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP)1 oz. of product/ac. + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when in rosette or bolting growth stage. (Spring or Fall rosettes or Early summer bolting) Aminopyralid (Milestone) 4 to 7 fl. oz./ac. (start with 7 fl. oz.) + 0.25% v/v non-ionice surfactant Apply when in rosette or bolting growth stage. Best choice of herbicide to use in riparian areas. (Spring or Fall rosettes or Early summer bolting) Imazapic (Plateau)8 to 12 fl. oz./ac. + 2 pt/ac. methylated seed oil Apply when in rosette or bolting growth stage. Good choice of herbicide to use in riparian areas. (Spring or Fall rosettes or Early summer bolting)Cutleaf teaselIntegrated Weed Management: The key to controlling Cutleaf teasel is to eliminate seed production and exhaust the seed bank in the soil. Cutleaf teasel does not reproduce vegetatively and dies after seed production. Mechanical and chemical control methods can be effective.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © (Top and bottom) Chris Evans, River to River CWMA, Bugwood.org; (Middle Photo) Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood. org. Clockwise, from lower left, photos: Unknown, Rich- ard Casagrande, University of Rhode Island; Stacey Leicht, University of Connecticut; Steve Dewey, Utah State University; and Kelly Uhing, Colorado Depart- ment of Agriculture.. Map by Crystal Andrews, CDA. Map of cypress spurge infestation. 1 Cypress SpurgeColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 1. Flowers are yellowish-green in color. 2. There are many branched stems that are covered with numerous narrow leaves. Identification and Impacts C ypress spurge (Euphorbia cyparissias) is a low growing perennial that overwinters as root and crown tissue. Cypress spurge reproduces by seed and lateral root buds. Leaves are linear, approximately 1/2 to 1 1/4 inches long and 1 to 2 mm wide. Upper stem leaves that occur near the inflorescence are yellow or yellowish-green in color. Leaves are stalkless, alternate, narrow and linear to lance-shaped. Stems are 4 to 32 inches high, hairless, green to yellowish green in color and branch in the upper portions. The leaves and stems emit a milky, toxic sap when broken. Flowers are yellowish-green usually turning reddish green towards maturity and are clustered in bunches at the ends of stems. T he plants milky sap is an irritant and may cause dermatitis or rashes. Although sheep may eat it, the plant is toxic to horses and cattle. Animals should not be pastured where spurges grow. Humans should be careful and avoid contacting the plant with bare skin as it can cause skin irritation for some people. C ypress spurge is an invasive ornamental plant that is native to Eurasia. It prefers direct sunlight, but is tolerant to the shade. It commonly occurs in dry to moderately moist meadows, pastures, forest edges, Key ID Points Euphorbia cyparissiasCypress spurge Identification and Management roadsides, Rights-of-Way, cemeteries, and gardens. Cypress spurge is popular in xeriscaping and rock gardens and generally does not occur on intensively cultivated soils. The soil seed reserve is estimated to be at least eight years. T he key to effective control of cypress spurge is preventing the establishment of viable plant communities. When establishment has occurred, there are different control methods to consider. Like most perennial plants, exhausting the nutrient reserves in the root system is important in controlling cypress spurge. Using a combination of mechanical and herbicide treatments in combination can achieve eradication over time. C ypress spurge is designated as a “List A” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be eradicated wherever found in the State. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/weeds and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program link. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List A Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 01/09 CULTURAL Keeping desirable vegetation healthy and thick will help keep invaders out. Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal. Survey your land regularly to detect new invaders and eradicate any new populations quickly. BIOLOGICALBiocontrol agents are not included in the prescribed management plans by the State for List A Species. Eradication is the management objective of all List A’s. No biocontrol agent for Cypress spurge is available. For more information on biocontrol in Colorado, please contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Hand pulling or digging is a viable option when managing new, small cypress spurge infestations. Tillage may simply encourage its spread. Be sure soil is moist and extract the entire root system. When handling plants wear rubber gloves and eye protection to protect yourself from the irritating milky sap. Top photo, © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; Bottom photo Todd Pfieffer Klamath County.Cypress spurgeIntegrated Weed Management: Since Cypress spurge has been identified in small quantities around Colorado, preventing the populations from spreading is important in management of the weed. Using a combination of control methods proves to be the most effective way to control populations. Using mechanical and herbicide control methods together proves to be key in eradicating established infestations. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands unless otherwise noted. Not all products listed are for use near homes. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Quinclorac (Paramount - non-crop - general use) 16 oz product/A + 2 pt/A methylated seed oil or crop oil concentrate Apply at the flowering stage. (Spring time) 2,4-D + dicamba (Rangestar - general use) 2 qt. 2,4-D (2.0 lb/ai) + 1 qt dicamba/A (1 lb ai) Apply at the flowering stage. (Spring time) Picloram (Tordon 22K-restricted use) 2-4 pints product/acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring at full bloom, or in the fall during regrowth.Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List A Species Clockwise, from lower left, photos © John M. Randall of The Nature Conservancy; and Linda Wilson and Susan Turner of Invasive.org. Infesta- tion map by Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Updated on: 08/08 Dalmatian toadflaxColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Showy yellow snapdragon-like flowers with an orange throat on elongated racemes. Thick, waxy, bluish heart- shaped leaves that wrap the stem. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts D almatian toadflax (Linaria dalmatica) is a non-native, perennial forb introduced from the Mediterranean region as a folk remedy, fabric dye and ornamental. It reproduces both by seed and by extensive, creeping rhizomes. A single plant produces 500,000 seeds, most of which fall within 18 inches of the parent plant. Seeds can remain viable for at least 10 years. Dalmatian toadflax grows to 3 feet, and has bright yellow snapdragon-like flowers with an orange throat on elongated racemes. The alternate leaves are broad, with a thick, waxy cuticle and a bluish cast. Each leaf is heart-shaped and wraps the stem. H abitats for Dalmatian toadflax include disturbed open sites, fields, pastures, rangeland, roadsides, cropland and forest clearings. Infestations can begin in small disturbed sites, then spread even to rangeland and wildlife habitats in excellent condition. Dalmatian toadflax is a highly aggressive plant that can genetically adapt to varied environmental conditions and herbicide controls. Its extreme competitiveness is due to early spring regeneration from vegetative buds on roots that are not dependent on soil moisture or native plant competition. Once established, toadflax quickly overruns native plants and becomes Key ID Points Linaria dalmaticaDalmatian toadflax Identification and Management a monoculture that severely reduces forage, productivity, biodiversity and wildlife habitat. T he key to effective control of Dalmatian toadflax is prevention and integrating as many management strategies as possible. Prevention is always desirable when dealing with Dalmatian toadflax. Early detection and eradication can keep populations from exploding, making more management options available. With the plants varying genetically using many different approaches is important such as; chemical, mechanical, cultural and biological methods. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. D almatian toadflax is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL It is imperative to seed managed areas with competitive grasses such as thickspike wheatgrass and streambank wheatgrass. The combination of herbicide spraying and seeding competitive grasses controls Dalmatian toadflax better than spraying alone. (K.G. Beck, CSU) BIOLOGICAL Calophasia lunula, a predatory noctuid moth, feeds on leaves and flowers of Dalmatian toadflax. Eteobalea intermediella, a root boring moth, and Mecinus janthinus, a stem boring weevil, are also available. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL For small infestations, pulling toadflax by hand can be effective. Pull every year for 5 to 6 years to deplete the reserves of the root system. Monitor the site for 10 - 15 years to remove seedlings produced from dormant seeds. Top photo, © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Calophasia lunula larva photo © Bob Richard, USDA APHIS, Invasive.org. Handpulling toadflax photo © Lake Tahoe Environmental Education Coalition.Dalmatian toadflaxIntegrated Weed Management: Because of the high genetic variability of the toadflax species, it is critical to integrate as many management strategies as possible into the control program. Two local populations may respond differently to the same herbicides. Keys to management are to prevent seed formation and vegetative spread by roots. Controlling toadflaxes is expensive and difficult, prevention is the best option. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Picloram (Tordon 22K) *Avoid spraying near trees and/or water 2-4 pints/acre Apply when flowering in spring and/or in the fall. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Chlorsulfuron (Telar)2-3 oz./acre Apply at flower stage in spring and/or in the fall. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/gal. water or 1 qt./100 gal. water. 2,4-D + Dicamba (Rangestar) 2 qt. + 2 qt/ acre Apply during pre-bloom to flower stage in spring. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/ gal. water or 1 qt/100gal water. Retreatment is required for several years. Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Clockwise from lower left: Richard Old, XID Services Inc., Bugwood.org; dnr.state.wi.us; Tom Heutte, USDA Forest Service, Bugwood.org; Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; and map above by Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Updated on: 08/08 Dame’s rocketColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Flowers are white or purple in color with four petals. Leaves are lanced shaped with toothed margins and 2- 4” long. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts D ame’s rocket (Hesperis matronalis) is a native Eurasia and is a biennial or short lived perennial forb belonging to the mustard family. The flowers are white to purple with four petals and are clustered in loose terminal stalks. Flowers appear from May to August and the plant can produce seeds and flowers on any flower cluster at the same time. The fruits are long, narrow and cylindrically shaped that contains many seeds. The seeds are small, angular, grooved and dark reddish brown. The seed pods are about 1 ½ inches long and very narrow. Leaves are slightly hairy, alternate, and 2 to 4 inches long. The leaves are lance shaped with toothed margins. A mature plant ranges from 4 inches to 3 feet in height. Dame’s rocket has a shallow fibrous root system. H abitats for Dame’s rocket include: gardens, partly shaded woodlands, ditches, roadsides, pastures, rangelands, thickets, open woods, disturbed sites, and other areas that have moist well drained soils and full sun to light shade. Many people think that it is a native wildflower and is planted as a garden ornamental, however; the plant quickly escapes cultivation due to its prolific seed production. It is often sold in “native wildflower” mixes, so please be sure to check the contents of “native wildflower” seed mixes and Key ID Points Hesperis matronalisDame’s rocket Identification and Management do not plant those that carry Dame’s rocket. T he key to effective control of Dame’s rocket is prevention. Locate and remove plants immediately before plants set seed to prevent the spread of Dame’s rocket. Since the plant reproduces solely by seed, integrated management efforts must include the elimination of seed production and depletion of seed bank. Combing control methods of herbicide and mechanical can be effective. Mechanical methods include removal of rosettes, and removal of seed heads from any plants that have bolted to prevent seed dispersal. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. D ame’s rocket is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Dame’s rocket. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Hand pull or dig when soil is moist, making sure to get the roots to prevent resprouting. Removing flowers before the plant sets seed will also be effective. Be sure to bag specimens carefully so the spread of seeds does not occur. Dame’s rocketIntegrated Weed Management: Locate and remove plants immediately before plants set seed to prevent the spread of Dame’s rocket. Since the plant reproduces solely by seed, integrated management efforts must include the elimination of seed production and depletion of seed bank. Combing control methods such as herbicide and mechanical can be effective. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING NO INFORMATION AVAILABLE: Colorado State University is conducting experiments to provide data and recommendations. Recommedations should control, but waiting official data. Metsulfuron (Escort XP)1 oz product/ac. + 0.25% non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette or bolting growth stage. (Early Spring) Chlorsulfuron (Telar)1 oz product/ac. + 0.25% non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette or bolting growth stage. (Early Spring) Imazypic (Plateau)9 to 10 fl oz/ac. + 2 pt/ ac. methylated seed oil Apply when plant is in late flower growth stages. (Late Spring to Fall)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © (Top and middle) Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood.org; (Bottom) Tom Heutte, USDA Forest Service, Bugwood.org. Diffuse knapweedColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Floral bracts have yellow spines with teeth appearing as a comb and a distrinct terminal spinte. Flowers are white or lavender. Seedlings have finely divided leaves 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts D iffuse knapweed (Centaurea diffusa) is a non-native biennial forb that reproduces solely by seed. A biennial is a plant that completes its lifecycle within two years. During the first year of growth, diffuse knapweed appears as a rosette in spring or fall. During the second year in mid to late spring – the stem bolts, flowers, sets seed, and the plant dies. Once the plant dries up, it breaks off at ground level and becomes a tumbleweed which disperses the still viable seeds over long distances. A prolific seed producer, diffuse knapweed can produce up to 18,000 seeds per plant. Therefore, the key to managing this plant is to prevent seed production. Diffuse knapweed can grow 1 to 3 feet tall, and is diffusely branched above ground. This gives the plant a ball- shaped appearance and tumble-weed mobility when broken off. Leaves are small, and are reduced in size near the flowering heads. Flowers are mostly white, sometimes purple, urn-shaped, and are located on each branch tip. Bracts that enclose the flowerheads are divided like the teeth of a comb, and are tipped with a distinct slender spine. Upon drying, the bracts become rough, rendering them injurious to the touch. Flowers bloom July through August. Seed set usually occurs by mid-August. D iffuse knapweed tends to invade disturbed, overgrazed areas. Other habitats may also include rangeland, roadsides, riparian areas, and trails. It is a tough competitor Key ID Points Centaurea diffusaDiffuse knapweed Identification and Management on dry sites and rapidly invades and dominates disturbed areas. Once established, diffuse knapweed outcompetes and reduces the quantity of desirable native species such as perennial grasses. As a result, biodiversity and land values are reduced, and soil erosion is increased. T he key to effective control of Diffuse knapweed is to prevent the plant from flowering and going to seed. An integrated weed management approach dealing with Diffuse knapweed is highly recommended. There are many options of mechanical, chemical, and biological controls, available. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. D iffuse knapweed is designated as a “List B” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information, visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Program link or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division at 303-239-4100. Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Plant photo, top © Kelly Uhing. Infestation map above, Crystal Andrews. Flower photo © Cindy Roche. Rosette and leaf photos © Dale Swenarton. List B Species Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of diffuse knapweed. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICAL The seedhead weevil (Larinus minutus) and the root weevil fly (Cyphocleonus achates) provide fair to good control when used in combination with each other. Expect to wait at least 3 to 5 years for the insects to establish and achieve optimum results. This is an option for large infestations. To obtain the insects, contact the Colorado Department of Agriculture, 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Any mechanical or physical method that severs the root below the soil surface will kill diffuse knapweed. Mowing or chopping is most effective when diffuse knapweed plants are at full-bloom. Be sure to properly dispose of the flowering cut plants, since seeds can mature and become viable after the plant has been cut down. Diffuse knapweedIntegrated Weed Management: Diffuse knapweed is best controlled in the rosette stage. It is imperative to prevent seed production. Do not allow diffuse knapweed flowers to appear. Management must be persistent in order to deplete the seed bank in the soil. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES : The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecomendationsHERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Aminopyralid (Milestone) 5-7 ounces/acre or 1 teaspsoon/gal water Spring at rosette to early bolt stage and/or in the fall to rosettes. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. 2,4-D Amine 1 qt./acre or 1 oz/gal water Apply to spring/fall rosettes - before flowering stalk lengthens. DO NOT apply when outside temperatures will exceed 85 degrees. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1qt/100 gal water. Clopyralid + Triclopyr (Redeem R&P) 1.5-2 pints/acre or 0.75 oz/gal water Apply from rosette to early bolt stage of growth and/or in the fall to rosettes. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1qt/100 gal water. Picloram (Tordon 22K *this is a Restricted Use Pesticide*) 1-2 pts/acre or 0.75 oz/gal water Apply to spring rosettes through mid-bolt and in fall to rosettes. DO NOT apply near trees/ shrubs/high water table. Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Weevil photo © J. Johnson, Univ. Idaho, bugwood.org. All other photos © Kelly Uhing. Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; Above map: Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture,Updated on: 05/09 Hoary cressColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 White flowers. Grows erect 10- 24” in height. Leaf is 3/4-4” long with blunt end and fine white hairs. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts H oary cress (Cardaria draba), commonly known as whitetop, is a creeping perennial that is a member of the mustard family and native to Europe. The stems, in the rosette stage, may grow up to 2 inches in height and produce grayish-green leaves that are lance shaped. The leaves are alternate and 3/4 to 4 inches long. The upper leaves have 2 lobes that clasp the stem. The plant has numerous small, white flowers with 4 petals on stalks radiating from a stem. Seed capsules are heart- shaped with two small, flat, reddish brown seeds. One plant can produce from 1,200 to 4,800 seeds. The plants emerge in early spring with stems emerging from the center of each rosette in late April. Hoary cress flowers from May to June and plants set seed by mid-summer. H abitats for Hoary Cress include: fields, waste places, meadows, pastures, croplands and along roadsides. It is typically found on unshaded, generally open areas of disturbed ground. It generally does better with moderate amounts of precipitation and grows well on alkaline soils. Key ID Points Cardaria drabaHoary cress Identification and Management T he key to effective control of Hoary cress is prevention. Preventing the encroachment of these weeds is the most cost-effective management. Preventing invasions by limiting seed dispersal, monitoring and using weed free hay, and quarantine animals that may have grazed in infested areas. Beyond prevention, the key is early detection when infestations are small, and aggressive management. Integrated Weed Management is required for proper control. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. H oary cress is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Planting competitive legumes, such as alfalfa, can reduce Hoary cress in crop rotations. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control avaiable for Hoary cress. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Mowing several times before the plants bolt stresses Hoary cress and forces the plant to use nutrient reserves stored in the root system. Combining mowing with herbicides will further enhance control of this weed. Mow repeatedly during the summer, then apply a herbicide in the fall. Top to bottom photos, © R. Old, XID Servisces; A. Sparks Jr., University of Georgia; and Kelly Uhing Hoary cressIntegrated Weed Management: No single treatment provides effective, long term control. The best and first defense is always prevention. Once established, integrate a variety of combinations of competitive planting, crop rotations, and herbicides. This can reduce Hoary cress to manageable levels. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP)1 oz. product/acre 0.25 v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply at the early bud growth stage; i.e. “broccoli” growth stage. (Early Spring to Early Summer) Chlorsulfuron (Telar)1 oz. product/acre 0.25 v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply at the early bud growth stage; i.e. “broccoli” growth stage. (Early Spring to Early Summer) Imazapic (Plateau)12 fl. oz./acre + 2 pints/acre methylated seed oil or crop oil concentrate Apply at late flower to post-flower growth stage. (Late Spring to Mid Summer)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos: top left Aspen County, CO; all other Kelly Uhing , Colorado Department of Agriculture. HoundstongueColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Panicles of reddish-purple flowers with 5 petals and 5 soft, hairy sepals. Velcro-like seeds with 4 nutlets. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts H oundstongue (Cynoglossum officianale) is a short lived perennial or biennial forb. It produces rosettes in the first year, and bolts a stout, erect stem that is 1 to 4 feet tall, by mid-summer of the second year. Then it flowers and produces fruit. Flowers are reddish-purple (occasionally white) and droop slightly from densely clustered panicles. The five rounded petals are cupped by five sepals covered with long, soft white hairs. Flowering occurs May to July. The simple leaves are lance or oblong shaped, with a smooth edge and no teeth or lobes. Leaves are alternate, 1 to 12 inches long and 1 to 3 inches wide. The leaf tip is sharply pointed, like a hound’s tongue, yet are covered with long-soft white hairs. Leaves often appear dusty and insect-ridden. A thick, dark, woody taproot can reach 3 to 4 feet deep. R eproduction is solely by seeds. Seeds are 4 prickly teardrop- shaped nutlets, which are packed in a pyramid-shaped receptacle. Most seeds fall close to the parent plant, but the seeds can travel great distances. The seeds have barbs like Velcro, with a hooked tip that clings to animals, clothing and machinery. A mature plant can produce 2,000 seeds. Seed viability is 1 to 3 years. Houndstongue is poisonous. Toxic pyrrolizidine alkaloids in Houndstongue stop liver cells from reproducing. Livestock and Key ID Points Cynoglossum officianaleHoundstongue Identification and Management wildlife may live up to six months after ingesting a lethal dose. Though the plant has a distinctive odor that repels animals, it is more palatable when dried. Animals rarely eat it unless it is dried and mixed with hay. Houndstongue’s toxicity effects horses and cattle more severely, sheep seem more resistant. Burs will reduce the value of sheep wool if present. H abitats for Houndstongue are open to shady, moist, disturbed areas, along trails, roadsides, fields, pasture, rangeland, along the edge of forests, sand dunes and ditch banks. Houndstongue prefers moist areas, but often grows on sandy or gravelly alkaline soil up to 9,000 feet elevation. Areas with more than 10% bare ground are particularly vulnerable to Houndstongue invasions. T he key to effective control of Houndstongue is preventing establishment and to prevent seed production. Planting competing and desirable grasses and forbs can be effective. Helping with reestablishment of disturbed sites. An integrated weed management approach can also be successful. Chemical, mechanical, and biological controls can be effective when dealing with Houndstongue. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. H oundstongue is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL A root weevil, Mogulones cruciger, has been successful in Canada and introduced in Montana, but has not yet been approved for use in Colorado. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Cut or pull plants, and remove entire root crown when plants are in the rosette stage. Remove dense litter layer (up to 4 inches) to stimulate germination of desired plants. To reduce seed production, mow or cut flowering stems before seed nutlets develop, this can significantly reduce seed production. Top photo, © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Mogulones cruciger photo ©H. Goulet. Mechanical management by Kelly Uhing.HoundstongueIntegrated Weed Management: Prevention is the best option when dealing with Houndstongue. Use only certified weed-free hay. If an infestations does occur, reducing the seed production is key in controlling Houndstongue. Chemical, mechanical and the developing biological controls can also be effective management techniques. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to specific areas. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal./acre. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron Methyl + Chlorsulfuron (Cimarron X-tra) 2.0 oz. product/acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring rosette to early bud growth stages. Picloram + 2,4-D (Grazon P+D) 4 pints/acre + 0.25% v/ v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring rosette stage.Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © From Bottom left; (first 3) Steve Dewey, Utah State University, Bugwood. org; Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture, Map from Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture 1 Jointed goatgrassColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Identification and Impacts J ointed goatgrass (Aegilops cylindrica) is a winter annual that is native to southern Europe and Russia. The plants can grow as a single or multiple stems or tillers, it will grow 15 to 30 inches tall. Leaves are simple and alternate. The auricles of the leaf are at the base. Leaf blades are hairy and are 1/8 to 1/4 of an inch in width. The cylindrical spikes, contain 2 to 12 spikelets. The spikelets are 1/2 inch long and contain 1 to 3 viable seeds. The spikelets appear to be “jointed,” they fit into the contour of the rachis. On top of the spikelets the glumes will appear with long awns. In the seedling stage, Jointed goatgrass looks similar to Winter wheat. H abits for Jointed goatgrass includes, grasslands, wheat fields, fence rows, waste places, roadsides, alfalfa fields, and pastures. When found in Winter wheat fields, jointed goatgrass can contribute to a significant economic loss. Jointed goatgrass seeds are similar to size and weight of small grain seeds, such as Winter wheat, making separation almost impossible and costly. Once Jointed goatgrass seed has been determined to Key ID Points Aegilops cylindricaIdentification and Management contaminate Winter wheat fields, fields will not be certified for grain use, again become costly to wheat growers. In some cases when found in the wheat fields, certifications will not be given for several years, until it can be proven that Jointed goatgrass is no longer in the field. Jointed goatgrass and Winter wheat will cross pollinate producing a sterile hybrid, causing more issues. T he key to effective control of Jointed goatgrass is preventing the establishment in fields by cleaning equipment prior to moving into the fields, preventing Jointed goatgrass going to seed, and rotating crops to spring grown plants. Jointed goatgrass can be controlled using a variety of methods. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. J ointed goatgrass is designated as a “List C” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local jurisdictions managing this species. For more information, visit www.colorado.gov/ag/weeds or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/09 CULTURAL Depending on where it is found, there are ways to control infestations using cultural methods. If found in pastures or CRP, plant competitive native grasses or forbs. For specific seed recommendations contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Services for seed mixes. If found in crops, rotate fields to spring grown crops. BIOLOGICALCurrently there is not any biocontrol available for Jointed goatgrass. Biocontrol takes many years of research and development. For more information please contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464- 7916. MECHANICAL Tillage can be effective, when plants are in the seedling stage, and crops have not been planted. Otherwise, the main goal of preventing the establishment of large infestations is to prevent seed production and/or spread. Photos © Top to Bottom; (middle) Whitney Cranshaw, Colorado State University, Bugwood.org; (other 2)Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture Jointed goatgrassIntegrated Weed Management: Preventing the establishment and the spread of existing plant populations. Depending where infestations of Jointed goatgrass are found an integrated management approach can be an effective control option. Combing cultural, chemical and mechanical control methods will provide effective control.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Glyphosate (Roundup)22 oz/acre if weeds are < 6” in height - 1 to 2.7 qt/acre if weeds are > 6” in height Apply before first spikelets begin to emerge from the boot. Imazapic + Glyphosate (Journey) 10.7 to 16 oz/Acre Apply in early stages of growth before spikelets. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/gal of water or 1 pt/100 gal of water. Imazapic (Plateau)4 to 6 oz/Acre Apply pre-emergance, late summer in this case, and in early stages of growth before spikelets. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32 oz/gal of water or 1 pt/100 gal of water.Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Updated on: 08/08 Leafy spurgeColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Flowers are yellowish-green and have a pair of heart shaped yellow- green bracts below each inconspicuous flower. The entire plant contains white, milky latex. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts L eafy spurge (Euphorbia esula) is a non-native deep-rooted perennial that spreads by seed and extensive, creeping roots. The roots can extend as deep as 30 feet into the soil and are extremely wide-spreading. The roots are brown and contain numerous pink buds that generally produce new shoots or roots. Leafy spurge can grow from 1 to 3 feet in height. The stems are smooth, pale green, and thickly clustered. Leaves are alternate, narrow, linear, and 1 to 4 inches long. The flowers are very small and yellowish-green. They are enclosed by very visible yellowish-green, heart-shaped bracts. The entire plant contains white, milky sap that exudes readily upon stem or leaf breakage. This sap can damage eyes and sensitive skin. Leafy spurge is one of the earliest plants to emerge in the spring. Flower clusters develop 1 to 2 weeks after stem emergence which is from mid-April to late May. One large leafy spurge plant can produce up to 130,000 seeds. Three-sided seed capsules explode when ripe and project the seeds up to 15 feet away from the parent plant. L eafy spurge has adapted to a wide variety of habitats in the state and is very competitive with other plant species. Where it becomes established in rangeland, pasture, and riparian sites, it crowds out practically all other vegetation. The competitive, Key ID Points Euphorbia esulaLeafy spurge Identification and Management rapidly growing, and extensive root system makes leafy spurge very difficult to manage. Develop a management plan that uses several control methods that are compatible with your site. T he most effective method of control for Leafy spurge is to prevent its establishment through proper land management. Maintain healthy pastures and rangeland and continually monitor your property for new infestations. New infestations are much more easily controlled than established infestations. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. L eafy spurge is designated as a “List B” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. On the back of this sheet are leafy spurge management recommendations. For more information, please visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Program link. Or contact the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Flower photo, top, © Norman Rees, USDA, APHIS. Invasive.org. All other photos © Kelly Uhing. CULTURAL Establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of leafy spurge. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICAL Both sheep and goats can be effective grazers of leafy spurge. The flea beetles Apthona nigriscutis, A. lacertosa, and A. cyparissiae, are effective especially when combined with grazing and/or herbicides. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture, 970-464-7916. Photo © USDA. MECHANICAL Due to the extensive root system, hand- pulling this plant is not a viable option. Mowing will reduce seed production if repeated every 2 to 4 weeks during the growing season, but will provide little long-term control. Leafy spurgeIntegrated Weed Management: Persistent monitoring of areas with known or potential infestations is crucial to managing leafy spurge. A combination of management methods in a long- term management plan is imperative. The management objective is to exhaust the root system and deplete the soil seed bank. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecomendationsHERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Fosamine (Krenite S)1.5 gal/acre or 6.5 oz/gal water Spring only, during bloom to post-bloom stage. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Picloram (Tordon 22K *this is a Restricted Use Pesticide*) 1 qt./acre or 1 oz/gal water Spring, just after full-bloom and/or fall. DO NOT apply near or under trees/shrubs or where soils have rapid permeability. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1qt/100 gal water. Imazapic (Plateau )12 oz/acre or 0.4 oz/gal water Fall only treatment prior to hard freeze. Add a methylated seed oil surfactant (MSO) @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt./100 gal water. 2,4-D Amine 2-3 qts/acre or 2-3 oz/gal water Apply early spring and fall. Prevents seed formation only. Retreatment will be necessary. DO NOT apply when outside temperatures will exceed 85 degrees. Add non-ionic surfactant @ .32oz/gal water or 1qt/100 gal water. Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Updated on: 08/08 Mayweed chamomileColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Bushy mature plants are 0.5 to 2 ft. tall. Leaves have foul smell and are divided several times into narrow segments. White ray flowers. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts M ayweed chamomile (Anthemis cotula) is a bushy annual that can adapt to various conditions and is native to Europe. The seeds are 10 ribbed with small glandular bumps. Mayweed chamomile is a prolific seed producer, producing more than 960,000 seeds per plant. The seeds viability in soil range from 4 to 6 years. The leaves are finely dissected, alternate, and approximately 0.75 to 2.5 inches long and 1 inch wide. Leaves may have some short hairs and emit an unpleasant odor. Flowers are solitary and borne at the ends of branches. They are 0.75 to 1.25 inches in diameter with 12 white ray flowers and yellow disk centers. The white ray flowers are in bloom from June through September. Mature plants grow from 0.5 to 2 feet tall and are highly branched. C ontact with Mayweed chamomile can cause skin rashes, blistering of livestock muzzles and irritated mucus membranes of grazing livestock. The blistering can cause animals to reduce grazing resulting in weight loss and reduced milk production. In addition, it may impart a strong flavor to the milk of dairy animals. Key ID Points Anthemis cotulaMayweed chamomile Identification and Management H abitats for Mayweed chamomile include roadsides, ditches, in urban areas, waste places, cultivated fields, and pastures. It can grow in a wide range of soils but seems to prefer moist, poorly drained soils. Mayweed chamomile prefers moist areas and increases in abundance during years of above average precipitation. T he key to effective control of Mayweed chamomile is prevention. Eliminate seed production to decrease the spread of this annual forb. Mowing is effective if done before the seed sets. Reseeding areas with perennial grasses for several years will reduce an infestation. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. M ayweed chamomile is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal, eliminating seed production and maintaining healthy native communities. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control for Mayweed chamomile. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICALFrequent, shallow tillage can help exhaust the seed bank in non-native areas. Mowing is not an effective long-term control method due to the fact the plant will prostate, in the short-term mowing will assist with limiting seed production. Hand pulling can prevent spread into new areas and is effective on small infestations. Top to bottom photos, © Michael Shephard, USDA Forest Service, Bugwood.org; Unknown photographer; Charles T. Bryson, USDA Agricultural Research Service, Bugwood.org.Mayweed chamomileIntegrated Weed Management: Prevent new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal. The key is to eliminate seed production to decrease the spread and continue to deplete the seed bank for 4 to 6 years. To help reduce an infestation, reseed with perennial grasses for several years. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP)0.33 oz product/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette to bolting growth stage. (Early Spring to Early Summer) Chlorsulfuron (Telar)0.33 oz product/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette or bolting growth stage. (Early Spring to Early Summer) Aminopyralid (Milestone) 7 fl oz/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette growth stage. (Spring) Photos © Above: Eric Coombs, Oregon Dept. of Agriculture; all others: Kelly Uhing, Colorado Deptartment of Agriculture; map: Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Map of meadow knapweed infestation. 1 Meadow knapweedColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 1. Flowers are pink to purple and are about the size of a nickel. 2. Leaves are up to 6 inches long and 1 inch wide. 3. Bracts have papery-fringed margins. Identification and Impacts M eadow knapweed (Centaurea pratensis) is a perennial that grows from a woody crown. The upright stems, grow from 20 to 40 inches tall and branch near the middle. Flower heads are solitary at tips of the branches, pink to purple in color, and 3/4 of an inch in size. Bracts are light to dark brown with papery-fringed margins. Lower leaves are lobed and upper leaves are linear. The leaves grow up to 6 inches long and more than 1 inch wide. M eadow knapweed primarily reproduces by seed, but root and crown fragments re-sprout when disturbed by heavy equipment or cultivation. Meadow knapweed seeds are carried in rivers, streams, or irrigation water, in hay or by vehicles along roadsides. It is an attractive plant which some people plant as a garden ornamental. The seed viability for meadow knapweed is unknown. The site must be monitored for at least 10 years after the last flowering adult plants have been eliminated and treatments repeated when necessary. H abitat for meadow knapweed include moist sites, irrigated pastures, moist meadows, river banks, streams, irrigation ditches, roadsides, and openings in forested areas. The plant is native to Europe where Key ID Points Centaurea pratensis Meadow knapweed Identification and Management originally it was introduced (a cross between black and brown knapweed) as a potential forage species, but it has low palatability to grazing animals. Meadow knapweed outcompetes native plants and pasture species and reduces available forage for wildlife and livestock. It is not palatable or nutritionally sufficient for livestock and disrupts wetland habitat by displacing native plant species. T he key to effective control of meadow knapweed is preventing the establishment of plant communities by maintaining healthy native plant populations. If meadow knapweed is present, using a combination of control methods including; mechanical and herbicides to eradicate populations is effective. M eadow knapweed is designated as a “List A” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be eradicated wherever found in the State. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/weeds and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List A Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 1/09 CULTURAL Preventing the establishment of the Meadow knapweed is crucial, so maintaining healthy native plant communities is a priority. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Bare ground is prime habitat for weed invasion, so prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICALBiocontrol agents are not included in the prescribed management plans by the State for List A Species. Eradication is the management objective of all List A’s. For more information on biocontrol in Colorado, please contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Hand pulling or digging is an effective control method when populations are small. Hand pulling should occur when soil is moist and be certain to pull all the roots. It is important to bag specimens carefully so as to not scatter seeds if the plant is flowering. Top to bottom photos, © A. Murray, Univ. of Florida; USDA ARS Archive; and J.Schardt, Florida D.E.P.Meadow knapweedIntegrated Weed Management: Since Meadow knapweed has been identified in small quantities around Colorado, preventing the populations from spreading is important in management of the weed. Eradication requires intensive and persistent control efforts to effectively eliminate weed infestations and soil seed reserves. If populations occur, utilize hand pulling, cultural, and herbicide control methods for effective eradication. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Aminopyralid (Milestone - general use) 7 fl. oz. product/acre plus 0.25% v/v ionic surfactant. Apply in spring to early summer during bolting to bud growth stages or in fall Cloypyralid (Transline - general use) 1 pint product/acre plus 0.25% v/v ionic surfactant. Apply in spring to early summer during bolting to bud growth stages or in fall Picloram (Tordon or Picloram 22K - restricted use herbicides) 1 qt.product/acre plus 0.25% v/v ionic surfac - tant. Apply in spring to early summer during bolting to bud growth stages or in fallManagement Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List A Species All Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Deptartment of Agriculture, map by Crystal Anderws, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Updated on: 01/09 Map of Mediterranean sage infestation. 1 Mediterranean sageColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 1. Leaves have a pungent odor when crushed. 2. Leaves are very hairy. 3. White to yellowish-white flower clusters. Identification and Impacts M editerranean sage (Salvia aethiopis) is a biennial that is an erect, coarse biennial or short- lived perennial, with a stout taproot. First year rosettes are blue-green, and are covered with woolly white hairs. Second year plants produce more leaves with a flowering stem. Leaves have a pungent odor when crushed. The flower stem can grow 2 to 3 feet tall and branch 2 to 3 feet wide resembling a candalabra. The stem breaks off in the fall and forms a tumbleweed dispersing thousands of seeds. Mature plants can produce 100,000 seeds each. The flowers are white to yellowish-white and appear in clusters. M editerranean sage is native to the Mediterranean region and northern Africa. Mediterranean sage invades primarily rangeland, but will easily invade riparian areas, forests, roadsides, and dry pastures. This invasive ornamental plant prefers south-facing slopes in loose, gravelly, well drained soils. Mediterranean sage initially invades disturbed sites, but quickly spreads to non-disturbed and natural sites. It adapts to a wide variety of environmental conditions and quickly displaces native vegetation. The plant is unpalatable to most grazing animals and is capable Key ID Points Salvia aethiopisMediterranean sage Identification and Management of forming dense monocultures. The seed viability for Mediterranean sage is unknown. The site must be monitored for at least 10 years after the last flowering adult plants have been eliminated and treatments repeated when necessary. T he key to effective control of Mediterranean sage is preventing the establishment of plant communities through the use of sound land management practices. Maintain healthy pastures and rangeland and continually monitor your property for new infestations, especially near current known infestations since tumbleweed mobility of this plant can spread the seeds far and wide. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. M editerranean sage is designated as a “List A” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be eradicated wherever found in the State. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ ag/weeds and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List A Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations CULTURAL Preventing overgrazing and promoting healthy plant communities is crucial. Disturbed, bare ground areas are prime habitat for weed invasions. Contact your local Natural Resource Conservation District for seed mix recommendations for your area. BIOLOGICALBiocontrol agents are not included in the prescribed management plans by the State for List A Species. Eradication is the management objective of all List A’s. For information on biocontrol in Colorado, please contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Hand pull or shovel when soil is moist. Make certain to pull up all the roots or sever at least 2 to 3 inches of taproot with a shovel. Shake excess soil from specimens and turn over to dry out. Bag specimens carefully so as to not scatter seeds if flowering. Top to bottom photos, © A. Murray, Univ. of Florida; USDA ARS Archives.Mediterranean sageIntegrated Weed Management: Since Mediterranean sage reproduces solely by seed, it is imperative to prevent seeds from producing as well as depleting the soil seed bank. Combining mechanical and herbicide treatments to rosettes or bolting plants can be very effective. If flowering, mechanically remove plants and bag them. Survey properties on the perimeter of known infestations to detect new infestations early. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Tordon + Telar (Tordon or Picloram 22K - restricted use herbicides & Telar - general use) 1 quart product/acre (Tordon) + 1 oz prod- uct/acre (Telar) + plus 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring during rosette to bolting (early flowring) growth stages Metsulfuron + 2,4-D (Escort or Cimarron + 2,4-D - general use) 1 oz + 1 qt product/ acre plus 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring during rosette to bolting (early flowering) growth stages Metsulfuron (Escort or Cimarron - general use) 1 oz product/acre plus 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring during rosette to bolting (early flowering) growth stagesManagement Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List A Species Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; map above by Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Musk thistleColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Broad, spine- tipped bracts located under the flower Flowering heads are terminal, solitary, and usually nodding Grows up to 6 feet tall 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts M usk thistle (Carduus nutans) is a non-native biennial forb that reproduces solely by seed. A biennial is a plant that completes its lifecycle within two years. During the first year of growth, musk thistle appears as a rosette in spring or fall. During the second year in mid to late spring, the stem bolts, flowers, sets seed, and the plant dies. Musk thistle produces many flower heads. The terminal, or tallest, shoots flower first, then lateral shoots develop in leaf axils. A robust plant may produce 100 or more flowering heads. A prolific seed producer, musk thistle can produce up to 20,000 seeds per plant, only one-third being viable. Because musk thistle reproduces solely from seed, the key for successful management is to prevent seed production. M usk thistle can grow up to 6 feet tall. The leaves are spiny, waxy, and dark green in color with a light green midrib. The flowers are purple, large in size (1.5 to 3 inches in diameter), nodding, and terminal. The flowers are surrounded by numerous, lance-shaped, spine-tipped bracts. You can expect to see flowers from late May and June. Seed set usually occurs in June or July and effective management options will then become limited. Key ID Points Carduus nutansMusk thistle Identification and Management H abitats for Musk thistle include disturbed, overgrazed areas. Once a pasture is infested, the livestock carrying capacity for that area is significantly decreased. The plant may also occur on rangeland, roadsides, ditches, riparian areas, and trails. T he key to effective control of Musk thistle is to prevent the plant’s seed production, Planting desirable grasses and forbs to out compete Musk thistle can also be effective. Dense Musk thistle stands can be treated by spot treatments of herbicides and by a persistent mechanical program. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. M usk thistle is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of Musk thistle. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICAL Livestock tend to avoid grazing on musk thistle, although horses and cattle have been known to eat the flowerheads. Biological control insects, such as the seed head weevil and the crown weevil are effective on large infestations. When used together, these insects provide fair to good control. Contact the Insectary, Colorado Department of Agriculture to get complete information at 970-464-7916. Or visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd. MECHANICAL Any mechanical or physical method that severs the root below the soil surface will kill Musk thistle. Mowing or chopping is most effective when Musk thistle plants are at full-bloom. Be sure to properly dispose of the flowering cut plants since seeds can mature and become viable after the plant has been cut down. Top to bottom photos, © Norman E. Rees, USDA Agricultural Research Service; Whitney Cranshaw, Colorado State University, Bugwood.org; and Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Musk thistleIntegrated Weed Management: The key to managing Musk thistle is to prevent seed production. Dense Musk thistle stands can be treated by spot use of herbicides and by a persistent mechanical program. Due to the long seed viability of musk thistle, up to 10 years, control methods may have to be repeated for many years to completely eliminate an infestation.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Picloram (Tordon 22K - *Restricted use chemical*) 1 pint/acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring to rosettes. Aminopyralid (Milestone)5 fl. oz./acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring rosette to early bolting growth stages or in fall to rosettes. Metsulfuron (Escort XP)1 oz. product/acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring from rosette through very early flower growth stages. (Can prevent viable seed formation if applied no later than the first viable flowers begin to open.) Chlorsulfuron (Telar)1 oz. product/acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply in spring from rosette through very early flower growth stages. (Can prevent viable seed formation if applied no later than the first viable flowers begin to open.)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture and (above) Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Map of myrtle spurge infestation. 1 Myrtle spurgeColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 1. Low growing plant with blue-green, waxy leaves. 2. Flowers are yellow-green petal like bracts that appear from March to May. Identification and Impacts M yrtle spurge (Euphorbia myrsinites) is a low growing perennial with trailing fleshy stems. The leaves are fleshy, blue-green and alternate. Flowers are inconspicuous with yellow-green, petal-like bracts that appear from March to May. Myrtle spurge spreads by seed and plants are capable of projecting seeds up to 15 feet. The plant grows from a taproot, with new stems emerging in early spring and dying back in the winter. Plants can grow up to 8- 12 inches high and 12-18 inches in width. M yrtle spurge contains a toxic, milky sap which can cause severe skin irritations, including blistering. This plant is poisonous if ingested; causing nausea, vomiting and diarrhea. Wearing gloves, long sleeves, shoes, and eye protection is highly recommended when in contact with myrtle spurge, as all plant parts are considered poisonous. M yrtle spurge is an invasive ornamental that is native to Eurasia. It is popular with xeriscapes and rock gardens, preferring sunny to partly sunny areas and well drained soils. Myrtle spurge rapidly escapes gardens and invades sensitive ecosystems, out competing native Key ID Points Euphorbia myrsinitesMyrtle spurge Identification and Management vegetation and reducing wildlife forage. Alternatives to planting myrtle spurge include native plants such as sulphur flower (Erigonum umbellatum ), Kinnikinnick (artcostaphylos uvursi), or creeping mahonia (Mahonia repens). The soil seed reserve of myrtle spurge is estimated to be eight years. The site must be monitored for at least nine years after the last flowering adult plants have been eliminated and treatments repeated when necessary. T he key to effective control of myrtle spurge is to remove plants prior to seed set and to detect and remove new populations in natural areas early on. Small areas can be easily removed by mechanical means but should be done early to prevent triggering seed launching. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. M yrtle spurge is designated as a “List A” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is designated for statewide eradication. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/weeds and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List A Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 01/09 CULTURAL Keeping desirable vegetation healthy and thick will help keep invaders out. Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal. Survey your land regularly to detect new invaders and eradicate any new populations quickly. BIOLOGICAL Biocontrol is not an approved method of contol for State List A species. Eradication as the management objective for all List A species. For more information on insect biocontrol in Colorado, please contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916 MECHANICAL Hand pull or dig when soil is moist. Make certain to pull all the roots and wear rubber gloves and eye protection to protect yourself from the toxic milky sap. Treatment follow up is important to check root fragment resprouts that will occure when the tap root is severed too shallow. Top to bottom photos © Unknown, A. Murray, Univ. of Florida; USDA ARS Archive; and unknown.Myrtle spurgeIntegrated Weed Management: Since Myrtle spurge spreads mainly by seed, it is very important to prevent seed production and deplete the seed bank. Remove mature plants prior to setting seed and seedlings whenever present. Populations can be managed mechanically and by spot treatment of herbicides. It is important to be persistent with follow up treatments for many years. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING 2,4-D ester (general use)2 quarts/acre Use a 2,4-D ester formulation that has a 4.0 lbs. active ingredient/acre. Apply during spring or during fall regrowth. Dicamba + 2,4-D (general use) 1 pint Dicamba +2 to 3 pints, 2,4-D (amine or ester) Use a 2,4-D formulation that has a 4.0 lbs. active ingredient/gallon. Apply during spring or during fall regrowth. Picloram + 2,4-D (Tordon 22K-restricted use + 2,4-D -general use) 20 fl. oz./acre +2 to 3 pints of 2,4-D (amine or ester) Apply at flowering growth stage during spring or to fall regrowth. Picloram (Tordon 22K - restricted use) 1 quart product/acre Apply at flowering growth stage during spring or to fall regrowth. Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List A Species List B Key ID Points 1. 15-30 white ray flowers on flowerheads that are 1-3 inches in diameter. 2. Rosette and lower leaves are spoon- shaped and toothed. 3. Upper leaves on the stem are narrow, toothed, and clasp the stem. O xeye daisy (Leucanthemum vulgare) was introduced from Europe as a seed contaminant and as an ornamental. It is a rhizomatous, creeping, short-lived perennial that grows 10 inches to 2 feet tall. The basal and lower leaves are spoon- shaped, toothed, and with long petioles (leaf stem). The upper leaves are narrow, toothed, and clasp the stem. Flowers bloom between June and August. The flowers are 1 to 3 inches in diameter, with 15 to 30 white ray flowers, and mostly solitary. The phyllaries beneath the flower head are green with a dark brown margin. One flower head can produce up to 200 seeds. Oxeye daisy spread vegetatively from roots, root fragments, or by seed. Seeds may be viable up to 38 years or more. Infestation sites needs to be monitored for at least 10 years after the last flowering plant has been eliminated and treatments repeated when necessary. Ornamental Shasta daisy (Leucantheum x superbum) is not an aggressive invader and looks similar to oxeye daisy, but it is 6 to 12 inches taller and has larger flowers. O xeye daisy is an strong competitor. It forms dense stands that reduce native plant diversity. It degrades pastures and natural areas because cattle and wildlife avoid feeding on oxeye daisy. Heavy infestations may reduce nutrient cycling due to a shallow root system and create areas of bare soil, thus increasing soil erosion. H abitats for oxeye daisy included mountain meadows, grasslands, pastures, streams, gardens, waste grounds, railway, and roadsides. Oxeye daisy typically grows in high elevations, up to 11,000 feet in Colorado. T he key to effective control of oxeye daisy is education and prevention. Oxeye daisy has been included in many different seed mixes, thus consumers should carefully read the label prior to planting so- called “native wildflower” mixes. Homeowners and land managers often overlook the impacts and the need to manage this weed because of the plant’s attractiveness. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. O xeye daisy is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eliminated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/weeds and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, (303) 869-9030.Oxeye daisy Leucanthemum vulgareš‡›‡ƒ‹•› †‡–‹Ƥ…ƒ–‹‘ƒ†ƒƒ‰‡‡– 2013 Quarter Quad Survey Rev. 10/14 Colorado Department of Agriculture - Conservation Services 305 Interlocken Parkway ”‘‘Ƥ‡Ž†ǡ͔͔͖͕͜ ȋ͔͗͗Ȍ͚͜͝Ǧ͔͔͗͝ ™™™Ǥ…‘Ž‘”ƒ†‘Ǥ‰‘˜Ȁƒ‰Ȁ™‡‡†• List B š‡›‡†ƒ‹•›Šƒ•„‡‡‹…Ž—†‡†‹ƒ›†‹ơ‡”‡–•‡‡†‹š‡•ǡ–Š—•…‘•—‡”••Š‘—Ž†…ƒ”‡ˆ—ŽŽ› ”‡ƒ†–Š‡Žƒ„‡Ž’”‹‘”–‘’Žƒ–‹‰•‘Ǧ…ƒŽŽ‡†Dzƒ–‹˜‡™‹Ž†ƪ‘™‡”dz‹š‡•Ǥ‡’‡ƒ–‡†Šƒ†’—ŽŽ‹‰…ƒ ‡Ž‹‹ƒ–‡•ƒŽŽ‹ˆ‡•–ƒ–‹‘•Ǥ‘™‹‰‘”‰”ƒœ‹‰„›•Š‡‡’‘”‰‘ƒ–•…ƒ„‡‡ơ‡…–‹˜‡ǡ‹ƒ††‹–‹‘™‹–Š ƒ…Š‡‹…ƒŽƒ’’”‘ƒ…ŠǤ Oxeye daisy Leucanthemum vulgare –‡‰”ƒ–‡†‡‡†ƒƒ‰‡‡–‡…‘‡†ƒ–‹‘•        Aminopyralid (Milestone) 4-6 oz/acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Optimum control when applied at the pre-flower bud growth stage. Metsulfuron (Escort XP) 1 oz product/acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Surfactant is absolutely necessary. Optimum control when applied at flowering growth stage. 1 oz product is the minimum eradication rate based on best treatment observed in several CSU experiments. Chlorsulfuron (Telar) 1 oz product/acre + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Surfactant is absolutely necessary. Optimum control when applied at flowering growth stage. CHEMICAL The table below includes recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to rangeland and pastures. 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant is equivalent to 0.32 oz/gal of water or 1 pt/100 gal of water. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! MECHANICAL Repeated hand pulling or digging when soil is moist and infestations are small. Oxeye daisy is fairly shallow rooted; pull up as much of the root as possible. If removed during or after ƪ‘™‡”‹‰ǡ„ƒ‰•’‡…‹‡•…ƒ”‡ˆ—ŽŽ›•‘ƒ•–‘‘–•…ƒ––‡”•‡‡†•Ǥ ‘™‹‰„‡ˆ‘”‡ƪ‘™‡”‹‰‘”™Š‡ƪ‘™‡”„—†•ƒ”‡’”‡•‡–…ƒ Ž‹‹–†‹•’‡”•ƒŽǢ†‘‘–‘™†—”‹‰‘”ƒˆ–‡”ƪ‘™‡”‹‰Ǥ‹ŽŽ‹‰ƒ–͚ inches or deeper, and repeated shallowly as necessary, can control patches. BIOLOGICAL ‘ƒ–•‘”•Š‡‡’…ƒ„‡‡ơ‡…–‹˜‡‹–Š‡…‘–”‘Ž‘ˆ‘š‡›‡†ƒ‹•›Ǥ There are no insect biological controls available for oxeye daisy. For more information on biocontrols, contact the Colorado Department of Agriculture-Palisade Insectary at 970-464-7916. CULTURAL Generate awareness for this noxious weed. Carefully inspect “wildflower” seed mixes; do not plant mixes that include Leucanthemum vulgare. Avoid overgrazing, disturbance, and seed dispersal. Bare ground is prime habitat for weed invasions. Tall perennial grasses that shade oxeye daisy are good competitors. y© Oh© Oh© Oh© Oh©©©©©©© Oh© Oh© OhOh© Oh© Oh©© Oh© Oh©© Oh© Oh© Oh© Oh© Oh© Oh© Oh©O©O©Oh© O©Ohh©h©O©O© OO©©©h©OhhhhOhhhOhOhio Sio Sio Sio Sio Sio Sio Sio Sio SSio Sio Sio Sio Sio SiSioo Sio Sio Sio Sio Sio SSiiio Sio Sio Sioio SSioo SStatetatetatetatetatetatetatetattateatatattatetateatetatetatetatetatetateaatatattatetatetatetatetattatttattateaatttateattetattatattettaeatataaeeaaate UniUniUniUniUniUnUniUniUnnnUniUnUniiUniiUnUninUniUniUniiiniUniiiiiUniUnniUniUiUverversversversversversversversversversversversversversversversvversversverseversversrsrerersversveressersrsssvvverssityityityityityittyityityityityitityityityityityityitytyititytyyityyyy Photos courtesy of Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Perennial pepperweedColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 White flowers in dense round clusters at branch tips. Leaves are waxy with a white midrib. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts P erennial pepperweed (Lepidium latifolium) is an extremely invasive perennial forb introduced from Europe and Asia in 1900 as a containment in sugar beet seed. Pepperweed reproduces both by seed and vegetatively by roots and shoots. Root fragments as small as 0.5 inch can grow into new plants. A serious threat, pepperweed alters ecosystems by acting as a “salt pump” absorbing salts from deep in the soil. The plant then excretes the salt through the leaves and deposits it on the surface soil. Since most desirable plants do not tolerate high saline concentrated soils, the entire plant composition and diversity of the area changes. G rowing 1 to 5 feet high, pepperweed has tiny white flowers. The flowers have four spoon-shaped petals in dense, rounded clusters on branch tips of erect stems. Stems emerge from deep, thick, woody root stocks that can penetrate 10 feet into the soil. Leaves of the mature plant are alternate, and lance or oblong in shape with serrated edges that are slightly wavy. They are glabrous (not hairy) and green to gray-green in color, with a distinctive white midrib. Upper leaves are smaller than basal leaves and have no stalks. P erennial pepperweed invades a wide variety of habitats, from intermountain, mountainous areas and marshes. It is frequently found in riparian areas, wetlands, marshes, irrigation ditches, canals, Key ID Points Lepidium latifoliumPerennial pepperweed Identification and Management and floodplains. If introduced, it can also invade roadsides, hay and alfalfa fields and rangeland. It readily invades disturbed and bareground areas . It can thrive in either low or high-saline soils. Large monocultures and dense litter layers prevent native plants from regenerating. Pepperweed displaces native plants and wildlife habitats, reduces food quality for wildlife and reduces agricultural and pasture production. P erennial pepperweed rarely produces seedlings in the field, even with extensive seed crops. Research is underway, but the lack of seedlings may be due to seeds rapidly losing viability in the field (but not in the laboratory). Reproduction is primarily from deep, perennial roots and root pieces which break off and sprout new plants. However, preventing seed production is still recommended until further research is done. T he key to effective control of Perennial pepperweed is preventing establishment of large populations. Early detection and removal of plants if found, is the key to prevention. Planting desirable and competing grasses and forbs can aid in limiting the spread of Perennial pepperweed. Herbicide treatments are a good option if used during the bud to flowering stage of the plant. Once established, containment is key. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. P erennial pepperweed is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 CULTURALProlonged spring flooding of new growth will kill pepperweed. Grazing is not recommended because the plant may be toxic. Reestablishing the native or desired plants can take years, so repeat plantings must be repeated, but it can aid in controlling populations. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. BIOLOGICAL Biological control is not a viable option because 11 other species of native Lepidium are on the Endangered species list, and the risk to these species as well as agricultural species is too great. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Due to the deep, brittle root, most mechanical methods are not recommend, and can actually propagate, spread and increase the density of pepperweed. Hand pulling can also bring seeds to the soil surface, and spread pieces of root, which will sprout. However, spring mowing combined with chemical treatments can be effective. Top photo, © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Calophasia lunula larva photo © Bob Richard, USDA APHIS, Invasive.org. Root system, Nature Conservancy.Perennial pepperweedIntegrated Weed Management: Because of the deep roots and persistence of pepperweed, it is critical to combine repeated herbicide application with monitoring and revegation of the area. Control of Perennial pepperweed can be difficult, so prevention is the best option. Early detection, eradication and containment of small populations and their source are vital. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to specific areas. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal./acre. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Chlorsulfuron (Telar)1 oz product/ac. + 0.25 v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in bolting to early flower growth stages. (Early Spring to Early Summer) Metsulfuron (Escort XP)1 oz product/ac. + 0.25 v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in botling growth stage. (Spring) Imazapyr (Plateau)12 fl oz/ac. + 2 pt/ac. methylated seed oil Apply when plant is in flower to late flower growth stages. (Early Summer to Mid Sum- mer)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species NOTE: Herbicides, when applied at the flower bud stage, are extremely effective to control pepperweed. Repeat applications for up to five years. However, the waxy leaf surface and the dense growth of this weed can make it difficult to obtain adequate coverage with the herbicide, so apply the chemical carefully and thoroughly for effective control. Photos © Map above: Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture; All other photos: Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Plumeless thistleColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Flower heads cluster 2-5 and are purple to dark red in color. Leaves are alternate, stalk- less and hairy underneath. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts P lumeless thistle (Carduus acanthoides) is a winter annual or biennial that is native to Europe and Asia. Plumeless thistle rosettes have wavy leaves with yellow spines along the white-colored leaf margins. The stems are covered with leaf-like, winged spines that extend up to the flowering heads. The flower heads, in clusters of 2 to 5, are alone at the end of the branches. They are purple to dark red in color and are 1/2 to 1 inch in diameter. Leaves are alternate, stalk-less, hairy underneath and blend into the stem. Mature plants can grow taller than 5 feet and can produce upwards of 9,000 seeds. H abitats for Plumeless thistle include pastures, fields, disturbed lands, logged-over areas, river valleys, along roadsides and in native grasslands. Plumeless thistle out competes native species and forage crops. It is one of the most aggressive thistles, due to its high seed production. Plumeless thistle is unpalatable to livestock and it may accumulate nitrates. Key ID Points Carduus acanthoidesPlumeless thistle Identification and Management P lants over winter and grow from seeds and rosettes. The seed viability for Plumeless thistle is unknown. The site must be monitored for at least 10 years after the last flowering adult plants have been eliminated and treatments repeated when necessary. T he key to effective control of Plumeless thistle is very similar to Musk thistle. Preventing Plumeless thistle seed production and planting desirable grasses and forbs to out compete plumeless thistle is effective. An integrated weed management approach is an effective tool when dealing with plumeless thistle; using herbicide, biological and cultural control methods. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. P lumeless thistle is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 Establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of Musk thistle. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions. CULTURAL Establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of Musk thistle. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICAL Biological control insects, such as the seed head weevil and the crown weevil are effective on large infestations. When used together, these insects provide fair to good control. These insects have been known to threaten native thistle populations. Contact the Insectary of Colorado Department of Agriculture to get complete information at 970-464- 7916. Or visit www.colorado.gov/ag/ csd. MECHANICAL Any mechanical or physical method that severs the root below the soil surface will kill Plumeless thistle. Mowing or chopping is most effective when Plumeless thistle plants are at full bloom. Be sure to properly dispose of the flowering cut plants since seeds can mature and become viable after the plant has been cut down. Photos Top to bottom © Loke T. Kok, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, Bugwood.org; Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood.org; and Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Plumeless thistleIntegrated Weed Management: The key to managing Plumeless thistle is to prevent seed production. Dense Plumeless thistle stands can be treated by spot use of herbicide programs. Due to the unknown seed viability of plumeless thistle, monitoring up to 10 years, and repeating control methods may need to occur for many years to completely eliminate an infestation. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Aminopyralid (Milestone) 5 fl oz product/acre Apply in spring to early summer rosette to bolting growth stages or in the fall. Clopyralid (Transline)0.67 pint product/acre Apply when plants are in the rosette growth stage. (Spring or Fall rosettes) Clopyralid +2,4-D (Curtail) 2 quarts product/acre Apply when plants are in the rosette growth stage. (Spring or Fall rosettes) Picloram (Tordon - *restricted use herbicide*) 1-2 pints product/acre Apply when plants are in the rosette growth stage. (Spring or Fall rosettes) 2, 4-D 1 quart/acre Apply when plants are in the rosette growth stage. (Spring or Fall rosettes)Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Clockwise from lower left: Ohio State Weed Lab Archive, Ohio State University, Bugwood. org; Unknown; Unknown; Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood.org; and Steve Dewey, Utah State University, Bugwood.org. 1 Poison hemlock1. Fern-like shiny green leaves. 2. Smooth, hallow stems that are rigid and have purple spots. Identification and Impacts P oison hemlock (Conium maculatum) is an erect biennial weed that is native to Europe. The plant typically grows 4 to 8 feet tall and has smooth, hallow stems that are rigid and have distinct purple spots. The plant has shiny green leaves that are pinnately compound, multi-stemmed and have a fern like appearance. The leaves are lacy, resembling parsley and have a musty odor when crushed. The first year the plant usually forms a large rosette. The second year the plant bolts a large stem, flowers and then dies. The flowers have 5 petals, clawed, notched (1 to 1.5 mm long) and are white, umbrella-like clusters at the end of the branch. They appear from June to July. The fruit matures in August- September and is flat, small and grayish-green in color. H abitats for Poison hemlock include streams, rivers, irrigation and roadside ditches, crop and pasturelands, as well as disturbed sites. All parts of the plant are poisonous, they contain alkaloids. Animals do not eat the plant, unless food is scarce. Ingestion of 0.25-0.30% of an animals body Key ID Points Conium maculatumPoison hemlockIdentification and Management weight is lethal. Poisoning of humans has occurred, the plant can easily be confused with members of the carrot family. Consumption in large quantities can be fatal. T he key to effective control of Poison hemlock is prevention and containment. Identified early enough, pulling the taproot when soil is moist can be an effective control method. When plants are already present, containment using herbicides is crucial. Other herbicide control methods include spraying plants in the rosette stage in early spring or late fall. Mechanical treatments are also effective, depleting root reserves and reducing seed production, with repeat mowings. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. P oison hemlock is designated as a “List C” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local jurisdictions managing this species. For more information, visit www.colorado.gov/ag/weeds or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List C Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/09 CULTURAL Broadcast seeding or “no-till” drill seeding can be effective by helping out compete hemlock. For specific seed recommendations contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Services for seed mixes. BIOLOGICAL The hemlock moth (Agonopterix alstroemericana) larvae feed on leaves, young stem tissue, flowers, and seeds causing severe defoliation and death of the plant. Contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916 for more information. MECHANICAL Hand pull or dig when soil is moist, but make sure to wear gloves. Bag specimens carefully so as not to scatter seeds. The key to effective control is to prevent seed production and/or spread. Photos © (Top to bottom): Steve Dewey, Utah State University, Bugwood.org and bottom two by: Jan Samanek, State Phytosanitary Administration, Bugwood.org.Poison hemlockIntegrated Weed Management: Integrated management approaches have not been an approved method of control concerning Poison hemlock. Even though it has not been a proven method, does not mean that it is ineffective. Using a combination of biological and herbicide treatments may be successful in combating Poison hemlock. Adding the promotion of desirable plants to help out compete the infestation of Poison hemlock may assist with control as well. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING 2,4-D (4 lb ai/gallon)2 qt/ac. + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette to early bolting growth stages. (36 inches tall or less) Grazon P+D 2 qt/ac. + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette to early bolting growth stages. (36 inches tall or less) Escort 1 oz product/ac. + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette to early bolting growth stages. Telar 1 oz product/ac. + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette to early bolting growth stages.Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List C Species All photos © Kelly Uhing. Infestation map above, Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Map of purple loosestrife infestation. 1 Purple loosestrifeColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street, Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 1. Showy pinkish- purple flowers bloom in long vertical racemes. 2. Lance-shaped leaves have smooth edges. 3. Four sided stem. Identification and Impacts P urple loosestrife (Lythrum salicaria) is a non-native, tap- rooted, perennial forb. It is native to Europe and was introduced to North America as an ornamental plant for gardens. It has escaped into natural areas such as streambanks and shallow ponds. Purple loosestrife reproduces primarily by seed. A single, mature plant can produce up to three million seeds per year. The seeds can remain viable in the soil for 5 to 20 years. Pieces of roots or stems also can produce new plants. Purple loosestrife produces multiple four-sided stems that can grow two to eight feet tall. Leaves are two to five inches long, lance- shaped and whorled on the stems. Flowers are tightly grouped in long, vertical heads; they bloom from the bottom up. They are pinkish-purple in color, about one inch long, and have five to seven petals. Flowers appear from late June through September. P urple loosestrife can be found along riverbanks, ditches, and wet meadows throughout the state. Infestations rapidly replace native vegetation, can impede water flow in canals and ditches, and have little wildlife habitat value. Infested wetlands eventually become a monoculture of loosestrife. I f purple loosestrife is growing in your garden, remove plants Key ID Points Lythrum salicariaPurple loosestrife Identification and Management immediately and consider a substitute. There are many planting alternatives that are better suited to Colorado and beneficial to wildlife. Alternatives include spotted gayfeather, Rocky Mountain Penstemon, beebalm, purple coneflower, and Colorado Columbine. For more information refer to Colorado Native Plant Society’s website, www. conps.org. T he key to effective control of purple loosestrife is early detection when infestations are small. It is fairly easy to control small numbers of loosestrife plants when the seed bank in the soil is low. Eradicating large populations is much more difficult. Persistent management and monitoring of site is a long-term program to ensure eradication. Small loosestrife infestations should be eradicated by hand-pulling/cutting in combination with herbicide application. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. P urple loosestrife is designated as “List A” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be eradicated wherever found in the State. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/weeds and click on the Noxious Weed Program link or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List A Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 01/09 CULTURAL Prevent the establishment of new infestations by minimizing disturbance and seed dispersal. BIOLOGICALBiocontrol agents are not included in the prescribed management plans by the State for List A Species. Eradication is the management objective of all List A’s. For more information on biocontrol in Colorado, please contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Hand removal of isolated individuals can be effective on small infestations. Hand removal should be performed prior to seed set. It is important to remove the entire rootstalk of the plant to avoid regrowth from root fragments. During the flowering stage, flowerheads must be cut and disposed of properly before a herbicide is applied. This will prevent or reduce seed production. Purple loosestrifeIntegrated Weed Management: Since purple loosestrife has been identified in Colorado, preventing the populations from spreading is important in management of the weed. Prevent new seeds from being added to the seed bank by managing purple loosestrife before it flowers or by clipping and disposing of the flowerheads prior to seed set and using herbicides to control plants. Follow up control efforts the same growing season and for several years afterwards. Maintain a healthy cover of perennial plants.www.colorado.gov/ag/weeds HERBICIDES The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Please read label for exact rates. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List A Species HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Triclopyr (Garlon 3A- general use) 1-2 qts./acre or 1.3-2.5 oz/gal water + non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Apply in summer. If plants are flowering, cut and properly dispose of flowerheads before applying Garlon 3A. Glyphosate* (Rodeo - aquatic safe) -general use *nonselective, will kill all vegetation it contacts 1-2 qts./acre or 1.3-2.5 oz/gal water + non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Apply in summer during the flowering stage. Cut and properly dispose of flowerheads before applying Rodeo. Top to bottom photos, © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Bracts photo at left, © Steve Dewey, Invasive. org. Infestation map above, Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. All other photos © Kelly Uhing.Russian knapweedColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Russian knapweed can be distinguished from other knapweeds by the pointed papery tips of the floral bracts. The roots are dark brown and have scale leaves. . . Identification and Impacts R ussian knapweed (Acroptilon repens) is a non-native deep- rooted perennial that spreads by aggressive, creeping, horizontal roots (rhizomes) and seeds. The roots are black with a scaly appearance. Russian knapweed can grow up to 3 feet in height. The stems and leaves are covered with short, stiff hairs. The flowers are urn-shaped, pink to purple in color, and are solitary at the tips of the upper branches. Russian knapweed can be distinguished from other knapweeds by the pointed papery tips of the rounded bracts that surround the flowers. Russian knapweed emerges in early spring after soil temperatures remain above freezing. It produces flowers from June to August and sets seed in late summer to early fall. Russian knapweed reproduces primarily from its root system. Buds on the horizontal roots can form adventitious shoots that can grow to be independent plants. R ussian knapweed is allelopathic, which means it contains a toxic substance that inhibits the growth of competing plants. This weed may also be toxic to horses resulting in serious injury or possibly death of the animal. Russian knapweed displaces native vegetation and reduces forage values on range and pasturelands. Key ID Points Acroptilon repensRussian knapweed Identification and Management H abitats for Russian knapweed includes many land types, from roadsides, ditch banks, riparian zones, pastures, irrigated cropland, clear cuts, and cropland. T he most effective method of control for Russian knapweed is to prevent its establishment through proper land management. Maintain healthy pastures and rangeland and continually monitor your property for new infestations. If Russian knapweed is already established, using an integrated weed management approach proves to be effective. Russian knapweed can be managed with herbicides or insects, but long-term control must include planting competitive plant species to occupy bare ground once infested by the weed. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. R ussian knapweed is designated as a “List B” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information, visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Program link or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Black, scaly root Pearl bracts with papery tips. List B species List B Species Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of Russian knapweed. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICAL A gall forming nematode, Subanguina picridis, is currently being monitored for effectiveness but is not yet available to the public. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture, 970-464- 7916. MECHANICAL Mowing several times before the plants bolt stresses Russian knapweed and forces them to use nutrient reserves stored in the root system. Combining mowing with herbicides will further enhance control of this weed. Mow repeatedly during the summer, then apply a herbicide in the fall. Russian knapweedIntegrated Weed Management: The most effective control for Russian knapweed is to prevent its establishment through proper land management. An integrated weed management approach can be effective when dealing with Russian knapweed. It can be managed with herbicides or insects, but long- term control must include planting competitive plant species to occupy bare ground once infested by the weed. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. Rates are approximate and based on equip- ment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Please read label for exact rates. The herbicide label is the LAW!Management RecomendationsHERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Aminopyralid (Milestone) 4-6 ounces/acre Apply in the spring and summer to plants in the bud and flowering stage and to dormant plants in the fall. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Picloram (Tordon 22K *this is a Restricted Use Pesticide*) 1 qt./acre or 1 oz/gal water Apply in spring to bud/early flower stage and/ or fall rosette. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1qt/100 gal water. Chlorsulfuron (Telar)1-3 oz/acre or 2 grams/3 gallons of water Apply in spring from pre-bloom to bloom and to fall rosettes. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1qt/100 gal water. Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Nematode photo © Tony Ceasar, Invasive.org. All other photos © Kelly Uhing. Photos © Clockwise from lower left: (1) Richard Old, XID Services, Inc., Bugwood.org; (2) Patrick Breen, Oregon State University, Bugwood.org; (1) Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture and map by Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Updated on: 08/08 Russian oliveColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Leaves are silvery white with dense scales. Flowers have 4 small sepals and are light yellow clusters. Red-yellow fruits on mature plants. 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts R ussian olive (Elaeagnus angustifoilia) is a perennial tree or shrub that is native in Europe and Asia. The plant has olive- shaped fruits, silver color at first then becoming yellow-red when mature. Russian olive can reproduce by seed or root suckers. Seeds can remain viable for up to 3 years and are capable of germinating in a broad range of soil types. Spring moisture and slightly alkaline soil tend to favor seedling growth. The plants extensive root system, sprouts root suckers frequently. The stems can reach up to 30 feet in height with branches and trunks that have 1 to 2 inch thorns. Leaves are 2 to 3 inches long, alternate, narrow, have simple blades, and are untoothed. The lower surface is silvery white with dense scales, while the upper surface of the leaf is light green in color. Flowers are 4 small sepals in light yellow clusters, fragrant, and appear May through June. Russian olive twigs are flexible, reddish, and have surfaces coated with gray and scaly pubescence, becoming smooth. O nce thought to be a beneficial windbreak tree, it since has been deemed detrimental to the environment. Russian olive can grow in a variety of soil and moisture conditions, but prefers open, moist riparian zones. It is shade tolerant and can be found along streams, Key ID Points Elaeagnus angustifoiliaRussian olive Identification and Management fields and open areas. Russian-olive can out compete native vegetation, interfere with natural plant succession and nutrient cycling, and tax water reserves. Because Russian-olive is capable of fixing nitrogen in its roots, it can grow on bare, mineral substrates and dominate riparian vegetation. Although Russian-olive provides a plentiful source of edible fruits for birds, ecologists have found that bird species richness is actually higher in riparian areas dominated by native vegetation. T he key to effective control of Russian olive is preventing establishment of the trees or shrubs. If plants are already present, control options include cut-stump treatments and mechanical mowing. These treatments are dependant on size and location of the plant. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. R ussian olive is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations List B Species  CULTURAL Cultural controls are not an option when dealing with Russian olive. Replacing with native trees is important once Russian olive has been removed. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for recommendations of other possible trees or shrubs. BIOLOGICALTubercularia canker overwinters on infected stems and spreads via rain-splash, animals, or pruning implements to open wounds in the bark. Infected tissue becomes discolored or sunken. Entire stems may be girdled and killed, and the disease can deform or kill stressed plants over time. For more information, contact the Colorado Department of Agriculture’s Insectary in Palisade, Colorado at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Mowing hedges with a brush type mower, followed by removal of cut material may be the most effective method for eradication. Stump sprouting commonly occurs after cutting down the tree, and excavation of the entire stump can trigger root sprouting. Burning is practical when conditions support a long hot fire and most effective in summer or early fall. Saplings are most sensitive. Above photos © (Top to Bottom): Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; Whitney Cranshaw, Colorado State University, Bugwood. org; and James H. Miller, USDA Forest Service, Bugwood.org. Integrated Weed Management: The most effective combination of control efforts has been cutting trees, followed by either spraying or burning the strumps. “Cut-stump” treatments that are applied during the winter months, using an approved herbicide seems effective. Trees are “cut” with a hatchet or chainsaw, then immediately treated with herbicide on the open wound.Russian olivehttp://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasture - lands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecommendationsHERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Triclopyr (Garlon 4, Remedy) Undiluted (100% solution) Apply to the cambial layer of the tree immediately after the cut-stump treatment. Imazapyr + Water (Habitat + Water or Arsenal + Water) Diluted by mixing 8 to 12 fl. oz / 1 gallon of water Apply to the cambial layer of the tree immediately after the cut-stump treatment. Imazapyr (Habitat or Arsenal ) 4 to 6 pt./Acre Broadcast spray/spraying individual trees; low or high volume spray. Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Plant and flower photos © Kelly Uhing. Leaf photo © USDA Aphis PPQ. Infestation photo above, © Steve Dewey, Invasive.org. Tamarisk branch © Stevens County, WA Noxious Weed Control BoardSaltcedarColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Saltcedar is a tall shrub or small tree that has white to pink flowers in clusters called racimes. Leaves are small and scaly. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts S altcedar, or tamarisk (Tamarix spp.), is a non-native deciduous evergreen shrub or small tree that grows from 5 to 20 feet tall. The bark on saplings and stems is reddish-brown. The leaves are small, scale-like and bluish-green in color. Tiny pink to white flowers have five petals and grow on slender racemes. Saltcedar reproduces by seeds as well as vegetatively. A mature plant can produce up to 600,000 seeds per year. Seeds are viable for up to 45 days under ideal conditions. Saltcedar buds break dormancy in February or March. Flowering occurs anytime between April and August. Ideal conditions for saltcedar seedling survival are saturated soil during the first few weeks of life, a high water table, and open sunny ground with little competition from other plants. S altcedar was introduced from central Asia, northern Africa, and southern Europe for ornamental purposes and for stream bank stabilization. It is now widespread in the United States. Saltcedar crowds out native stands of riparian and wetland vegetation. Saltcedar increases salinity of surface soil, rendering the soil inhospitable to native plant species. Saltcedar can be Key ID Points Tamarix spp.Saltcedar Identification and Management found along floodplains, riverbanks, streambanks, marshes, and irrigation ditches. It’s heavy use of water has contributed to the intensity of the drought. T he most effective method of control for saltcedar is to prevent its establishment through proper land management. Monitor susceptible areas for new infestations. An integrated weed management approach has proven to be an effective control when dealing with saltcedar. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. S altcedar is designated as a “List B” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information, please visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Program link. Or call the State Weed Coordinator of the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations List B species  Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL After a saltcedar infestation is managed, revegetation is necessary in order to protect the soil resource and reduce the threat of reinvasion. Seeded grasses, willow stakes, and cottonwood cuttings can reduce the chances of saltcedar reinvading managed sites. BIOLOGICAL The saltcedar leaf beetle (Diorhabda elongata) larvae and adults feed on foliage. This causes stem dieback and potential death of the plant if defoliation is consistent. The leaf beetle should be available for limited distribution. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture, 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL A bulldozer or prescribed fire can be used to open up large stands of saltcedar. These methods must be followed up with a herbicide treatment of the resprouts when they are 1 to 2 meters tall. Chainsaws, or loppers for smaller plants, are effective for cut-stump treatments to smaller infestations or in environmentally-sensitive management areas. All photos © Kelly Uhing.SaltcedarIntegrated Weed Management: Select the appropriate control method based on the size of the area and other environmental or cultural considerations. Re-seed controlled areas with desirable species to protect the soil resource and to prevent or slow saltcedar reinvasion. Follow up control efforts the same growing season and for several years afterwards. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on hand-held equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecomendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Triclopyr (Garlon 4 *approved aquatic label*) Foliar - 2-4 qts./acre Cut-stump - undiluted 100% Basal bark treatment 1:3 of herbicide:natural oil Foliar treatments - late spring to early fall Cut-stump - anytime except when snow is present Basal bark - anytime except when snow is present Glyphosate (Rodeo *approved aquatic label* **nonselective, will kill all vegetation it contacts**) Cut-stump - undiluted 100% Treat anytime except when snow is present. Treat the cambium immediately after being cut. Thor- oughly wet the surface, but not to the of run-off. Imazapyr (Arsenal or Habitat *Habitat is approved for use in aquatic sites*) Cut-stump - 8-12oz/gal water Foliar - 0.5-6.5oz/gal water + nonionic surfactant or methylated seed oil Cut-stump - anytime except spring during heavy sap flows. Foliar - late spring to late summer. Spray entire crown and 70% of plant. Avoid spray solution run- off. After application, do not disturb saltcedar for 2 years or overall control will be reduced. Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Updated on: 08/08 Scentless chamomileColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Flowers have a yellow centered disk surrounded by white petals. Leaves are alternate, finely divided, and odorless when crushed. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts S centless chamomile (Matricaria perforata) is a an annual, biennial, or short-lived perennial forb that is native to Europe. Seedlings emerge in spring and can produce a dense mat, out competing other species. Seeds and flowers are continually being formed. Each flower head can produce 300 seeds and a single plant can produce 300,000 seeds. The flowers are white in color, ¾ inches and are daisy like flowers that are solitary on each stem. Flowers have a yellow central disk surrounded by white petals. Leaves are alternate, fernlike, finely divided, and odorless when crushed. The stems can reach 6 inches to 3 feet tall and have numerous branches. H abitats for Scentless chamomile include: hayfields, pastures, roadsides, streambanks, fencelines, and moist areas such as drainages. There are limited control options in an agricultural setting because more spray is needed that can be used with crops. In addition, blistering on livestock muzzles and irritation to mucous membranes are another agricultural concern. Key ID Points Matricaria perforataScentless chamomile Identification and Management T he key to effective control of Scentless chamomile is prevention and preventing seed production. A combination of tillage, herbicide and competitive cropping can be very effective in managing Scentless chamomile. The goal is to prevent seed production and crowd out infestations through crop or natural species competition. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. S centless chamomile is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations List B Species  CULTURAL Any practice that aids in the establishment of the forage, such as seeding good forage seed shallowly into a firm, moist seedbed, will help in reducing Scentless chamomile growth. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions, so maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL There is no biological control available for Scentless chamomile. Since biological control agents take years to research, develop and release, no releases are expected in the foreseeable future. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICALFrequent, shallow tillage can help exhaust the seed bank in non-native areas. Mowing is not an effective long-term control method due to the fact the plant will prostate, in the short-term mowing will assist with limiting seed production. Hand pulling can prevent spread into new areas and is effective on small infestations. Above photos © (Top to Bottom): Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture; Whitney Cranshaw, Colorado State University, Bugwood. org; and Unknown.Scentless chamomileIntegrated Weed Management: A combination of tillage, herbicide and competitive cropping can be very effective in managing Scentless chamomile. The goal is to prevent seed production and crowd out infestations through crop competition.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasture - lands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecommendationsIntegrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Metsulfuron (Escort XP)0.33 oz product/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette to bolting growth stage. (Spring to Early Summer) Chlorsulfuron (Telar)0.33 oz product/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette or bolting growth stage. (Spring to Early Summer) Aminopyralid (Milestone) 7 fl oz/ac + 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply when plant is in rosette growth stage. (Spring to Early Summer) Photos © Map above: Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture; All other photos: Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture. 1 Scotch thistleColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 1. Flower heads cluster 2-5 and are purple to dark red in color. 2. Leaves are alternate, stalk- less and hairy underneath. Identification and Impacts S cotch thistle (Onopordum acanthium or O. tauricum) is a non-native biennial forb that reproduces solely by seed. A biennial is a plant that completes its lifecycle within two years. During the first year of growth, Scotch thistle appears as a rosette in spring or fall. Rosettes can be 1 to 2 feet in diameter. During the second year in mid to late spring the stem bolts, flowers, sets seed, and the plant dies. A prolific seed producer, Scotch thistle can produce up to 14,000 seeds per plant. S cotch thistle can grow up to 12 feet tall. Stems are numerous, branched, and have broad, spiny wings. The leaves of species acanthium are large, grayish- green, spiny, and covered with fine dense hair giving the leaf a woolly appearance. The leaves of the species tauricum are similar in size, but are not hairy, smooth and bright green. On both species, the leaves have a distinct mid-rib. The flowers are violet to reddish in color, numerous (70-100/plant), and are surrounded by spine-tipped bracts. The plants flower from mid-June to September. D ue to the robust, spiny nature of Scotch thistle, this plant can act as a living barbed wire fence, making areas impassible for wildlife, livestock, Key ID Points Onopordum acanthium or O. tauricumScotch thistleIdentification and Management and people. Scotch thistle invades rangeland, overgrazed pastures, roadsides, and irrigation ditches. It also prefers high-moist soil areas adjacent to creeks and rivers. T he key to effective control of Scotch thistle is maintaining healthy pastures and rangeland, guarding against disturbance or overuse, and as with most biennials limit seed production. To reduce seed production, plants with buds or flowers should be collected and immediately disposed of or destroyed. Chemical control is most effective when plants are in rosette stage, spring or early fall. Mechanical controls can be used to eliminate small patches or plants in a later growth stage. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. S cotch thistle is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www. colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 08/08 CULTURAL Establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of Scotch thistle. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICAL Urophora stylata, a fly predator, is used to help control this thistle. The female fly lays eggs in the seed head of the thistle. The maggot then consumes the seed in the flower. This species has overwintered in Colorado but the limited numbers will not allow for general redistribution. For more information, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Any mechanical or physical method that severs the root below the soil surface will kill Scotch thistle. Mowing or chopping is most effective when Scotch thistle plants are at full-bloom. Be sure to properly dispose of the flowering cut plants since seeds can mature and become viable after the plant has been cut down. Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Scotch thistleIntegrated Weed Management: Scotch thistle is best controlled in the rosette stage. For small infestations, Scotch thistle can be controlled by severing its taproot 1-2 inches below the ground. Control can be enhanced by a follow-up application of herbicides to the surviving rosettes. It is imperative to prevent seed production. Do not allow Scotch thistle flowers to appear. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csdHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Picloram (Tordon 22K - *Restricted Use*) 1 pint/acre + 0.25- 0.5% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply spring or fall in the rosette stage. Aminopyralid (Milestone) 7 fl. oz./acre + 0.25- 0.5% v/v non-ionic surfactant Apply spring or fall in the rosette stage. Metsulfuron (Cimarron X-tra) 2 oz. product/acre 0.25-0.5% v/v non- ionic surfactant Apply rosette to early bolt stages of growth. (Spring)Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Infestation photo, above,© John M. Randall, The Nature Conservancy. Infestation map, Crystal Andrews, Colo.Dept.of Agriculture. Flower photo, top, © Missouri Extension. Flower bract photo, left,© Paul Slichter, University of Wisconsin, Stevens Point. Leaves photo © Gary Fewless, Unviersity of Wisconsin, Stevens Point. Updated on: 08/08 Spotted knapweedColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Floral bracts have black tips, with comb-like spines of equal length. Flowers are pink to purple, but rarely white. Leaves are pin- nately divided. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts S potted knapweed (Centaurea maculosa) is a non-native short- lived perennial forb that reproduces only by seed. A prolific seed producer, Spotted knapweed can produce up to 40,000 seeds per plant. The key to distinguishing spotted from other knapweeds is the black-tipped involucral bracts (phyllaries) at the base of the flower. Unlike diffuse knapweed, there is no long, distinct terminal spine at the tip of the bracts. Spotted knapweed can grow up to 4 feet tall on erect, ridged stems that are openly branched on the upper half of the plant. Urn-shaped flowers are solitary on the end of each branch tip. Flowers are pink to purple, and rarely white. Leaves are small, oblong in shape and pinnately divided. Multiple rosettes can form on a single spotted knapweed taproot crown. Flowers bloom June to October and seed set usually occurs by mid-August. S potted knapweed tends to invade disturbed, overgrazed areas. It also occurs in dry meadows, pastures, stony hills, roadsides, sandy soils and sandy floodplains of streams and rivers. Since it can tolerate both dry conditions and high moisture areas, it is an especially versatile Key ID Points Centaurea maculosaSpotted knapweed Identification and Management invader. Spotted knapweed and diffuse knapweed infestations often occur together in Colorado. Once established, Spotted knapweed reduces livestock and wildlife forage by out competing native species. T he most effective method of control for Spotted knapweed is to prevent seed production and its establishment through proper land management. Maintain healthy pastures and rangeland and continually monitor your property for new infestations. If Spotted knapweed is already established, using an integrated weed management approach proves to be effective. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. S potted knapweed is designated as a “List B” species on the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information please visit www.colorado.gov/ag/ csd and click on the Noxious Weed Program Link or call the State Weed Coordinator, Colorado Department of Agriculture at 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations List B Species  CULTURAL Establish select grasses as an effective cultural control of spotted knapweed. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions, maintaining healthy pastures is crucial. BIOLOGICAL Root and Seed head weevils (Cyphocleonus achates and Larinus minutus) attack the roots and reduce seed production in Spotted and Diffuse knapweeds. This is an option for large infestations, though optimum results take 3-5 years. To obtain the insects, contact the Colorado Department of Agriculture’s Insectary in Palisade, Colorado at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Dig when the soil is moist, and remove all the taproot as well as all lateral roots. Mowing spotted knapweed at full-bloom will stress the plant, but not kill it. Be sure to bag the flowering cut plants, since the seeds remain viable even after cutting. Weevil photo © J. Johnson, Univ. Idaho, bugwood.org. All other photos © Kelly Uhing.Spotted KnapweedIntegrated Weed Management: Spotted knapweed is best controlled in the rosette stage. Enhance control by applying herbicides to the surviving rosettes in spring and fall. It is imperative to prevent seed production. Do not allow spotted knapweed flowers to appear. Management must be intense and persistent in order to deplete the seed bank in the soil. http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecommendationsHERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Aminopyralid (Milestone) 5-7 ounces/acre or 1 teaspsoon/gal water Spring at rosette to early bolt stage and/or in the fall to rosettes. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1 qt/100 gal water. Clopyralid (Transline, Stinger) 2/3 to 1 pint/acre Apply to spring/fall rosettes - before flowering stalk lengthens. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1qt/100 gal water. Clopyralid + 2,4-D (Curtail ) 2-3 qts./acre Apply in spring and fall to rosettes. Add non-ionic surfactant @ 0.32oz/gal water or 1qt/100 gal water. Picloram (Tordon 22K - *this is a Restricted Use Pesticide*) 1-2 pts/acre or 0.75 oz/gal water Apply to spring rosettes through mid-bolt and in fall to rosettes. DO NOT apply near trees/ shrubs/high water table. Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos © Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture.Updated on: 08/08 Sulfur cinquefoilColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Seeds coated with net-like pattern. Light yellow flowers with 5 petals. Long, right- angled hairs on the leafstalks and stems 1. 2. 3. Identification and Impacts S ulfur cinquefoil (Potentilla recta) is a perennial forb that is native to Eurasia. The flowers are pale yellow with 5 heart-shaped petals and are slightly longer than the 5 enclosing green sepals and 5 small bracts. Sulfur cinquefoil’s flowers appear from May to July with peak flowering generally occurring in late June. Each flower produces numerous small seeds that are slightly flattened and 1.3 mm long. The seeds are comma- shaped, brownish-purple in color and covered with a net-like pattern of veins. Seeds remain viable in the soil for at least three years. Leaves are numerous, alternate and compound with 5 to 7 leaflets having toothed edges. Leafstalks have conspicuous perpendicular hairs and leaves appear green on the underside. The erect stems are single to several, with few (or none) slender branches and are 12 to 28 inches in height that grow from well developed rootstock. The plant has a single taproot and may have several shallow, spreading branch roots but no rhizomes. S ulfur cinquefoil is unpalatable to grazing animals and is avoided for the most part. The low preference is believed to be a result of a high concentration of phenolic tannins (acidity) in the leaves and stems. The plant has a long life span and twenty year old plants are not uncommon. H abitats for Sulfur cinquefoil include: open grasslands, Key ID Points Potentilla rectaSulfur cinquefoil Identification and Management shrubby areas, open forest and logged areas, roadsides, clear cuts, waste areas, abandoned fields, and other disturbed sites. This plant is now becoming common in areas such as natural grasslands, shrubby areas, and open canopy forests. Sulfur cinquefoil grows on dry sandy, gravelly, and rocky soils, and prefers climates that receive from 13 to 50 inches of mean annual precipitation. T he key to effective control of Sulfur cinquefoil is an integrated weed management approach. Properly identifying sulfur cinquefoil is imperative, since it resembles the native cinquefoils. Hand pulling or digging when infestations are small and the soil is moist, is effective. What has proven to be the most effective control method for Sulfur cinquefoil, has been the use of selective herbicides. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. S ulfur cinquefoil is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations List B Species  CULTURAL Increasing the competitiveness of native species can assist in preventing establishment of Sulfur cinquefoil. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICALBiocontrol species have been used in trials, since Sulfur cinquefoil is similar to strawberries though, the insects used are considered pests. For more information, contact the Colorado Department of Agriculture’s Insectary in Palisade, Colorado at 970-464-7916. MECHANICALMowing is not effective, as new shoots will replace the cut steams. Hand dig or pull when soil is moist is effective on small infestations. Be sure to dig up as much of the root system as possible, especially since root fragments can produce new plants. Above photos © (Top & Bottom): State of Washington, King County Noxious Weed Program; (Middle) Whitney Cranshaw, Colorado State University, Bugwood.org.Sulfur cinquefoilIntegrated Weed Management: Sulfur cinquefoil is a competitive weed that uses its early emergence to establish itself and push out desirable vegetation. It is not a serious problem in cropland because it does not tolerate frequent plowing. Small infestations can be controlled by hand pulling, but larger stands are commonly controlled with herbicide. Management programs for sulfur cinquefoil should focus on improving the competitiveness of other more desirable species, and preventing the spread of this weed.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasture - lands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecommendationsHERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Picloram (Tordon 22K - *Restricted Use Chemical*) 1 pint/acre + 0.25- 0.5% v/v non-ionic surfactant Anytime during growing season summer or to fall regrowth. Aminopyralid (Milestone) 6 fl. oz./acre 0.25-0.5% v/v non-ionic surfac- tant Spray prebud growth stage, at very early stages of flower growth. (Late Spring to Early Summer) Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Photos clockwise from lower left © (3 on left side) Kelly Uhing, Colorado Department of Agriculture, Steve Dewey, Utah State University, Bugwood.org; and map by Crystal Andrews, Colorado Department of Agriculture. Map of yellow starthistle infestation. 1 Yellow starthistleColorado Dept. of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 1. Bright yellow ray and disk flowers. 2. Winged stems. 3. Stiff spines at flower base 4. Plant has a unique blue- green color. Identification and Impacts Y ellow starthistle (Centaurea solstitialis) originated from Northern Spain. It is a winter annual that is blue-green in color, has a vigorous taproot, and produces bright yellow flowers with sharp, stiff spines surrounding the base of the flower that extend up to ¾ of an inch long. Yellow starthistle grows from 1 inch tall to 4 feet tall. Basal leaves are 1-3 inches long and deeply lobed while upper leaves are smaller and narrower. Stems appear winged and both stem and leaves have a slight whitish nap covering them. Yellow starthistle spreads by seed with a single large plant producing up to 100,000 seeds. Plumed and plumeless seeds disperse at different times. Y ellow starthistle typically germinates in the fall with increased moisture, overwinters as a seedling, and forms its rosette beginning in March through May. It can however, germinate extremely fast with optimal conditions throughout the entire summer (16 hours or less with ~ 70 degrees F and ample moisture). Flowering generally occurs from June to September and often later. H abitats for yellow starthistle include rangelands, pastures, roadsides, wastelands, and lower elevations. Over utilized grasslands are particularly susceptible to invasion. Key ID Points Centaurea solstitialisYellow starthistle Identification and Management Y ellow starthistle is fatally poisonous to horses (causing chewing disease) and is considered poor forage for all livestock and wildlife. It also destroys native plant communities. The seed bank of yellow starthistle is not completely understood. The site must be monitored for at least 15 years after the last flowering adult plants have been eliminated and treatments repeated when necessary. T he key to effective control of yellow starthistle is to prevent seed set from occurring in existing populations, monitoring your land for new infestations frequently, treating newly detected invasions rapidly, and preventing new introductions from occurring. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. Y ellow starthistle is designated as a “List A” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is designated for statewide eradication. For more information visit www.colorado.gov/ ag/weeds and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303- 239-4100. List A Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations Updated on: 01/09 CULTURAL Following initial control, establishment of selected grasses can be an effective cultural control of yellow starthistle. Contact your local Natural Resource Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. Bare ground is prime habitat for weed invasions. BIOLOGICAL Insect biocontrol agents exist but are not included in the state prescribed management plan. Eradication is the management objective for all List A species. For more information on biocontrol in Colorado, contact the Palisade Insectary of the Colorado Department of Agriculture at 970-464- 7916. MECHANICAL Hand pull when soil is moist and make certain to pull all the roots. Bag specimens carefully so as to not scatter seeds if flowering. Plants vary greatly in size so be sure to look for plants that are only a few inches tall, as well as plants that are several feet tall. Include dried skeletons as they may still contain seed. Mowing is not advisable and may extend life of the plant and stimulate additional flowering. Photos, top to bottom © Stephen Ausmus, USDA Agricultural Research Service, Bugwood.org; University of Idaho Archive, University of Idaho, Bugwood.org; and Jerry Asher, USDI Bureau of Land Management, Bugwood.org.Yellow starthistleIntegrated Weed Management: The sheer number of seeds, high seed viability, and fast growth of yellow starthistle requires a persistent control program. Using herbicides and mechanical techniques to control the invasion followed by establishing a desirable plant community can be effective. Management must be persistent to deplete the seed bank in the soil. It is imperative to prevent seed production. Do not allow yellow starthistle plants to go to seed.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/weedsHERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasturelands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gal/acre. Please read label for exact rates. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! HERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Picloram (Tordon 22K- restricted use) 1.5 pint product/acre Apply during rosette growth stage or when adequate moisture is available, and plants are actively growing. (Early spring to late summer depending on conditions. Aminopyralid (Milestone - general use) 5 fl oz product/acre Apply during rosette growth and bolting growth stages. (Early spring to early summer) Clopyralid (Transline - general use) 0.67 pint product/acre Apply during rosette growth to mid-bolt growth stages. (Early spring to early summer)Management Recommendations2 Integrated Weed Management recommendations List A Species Infestation photo, above,© John M. Randall, The Nature Conservancy. Infestation map, Crystal Andrews, Colo.Dept.of Agriculture. Flower photo, top, © Missouri Extension. Flower bract photo, left,© Paul Slichter, University of Wisconsin, Stevens Point. Leaves photo © Gary Fewless, Unviersity of Wisconsin, Stevens Point. Yellow toadflaxColorado Dept. of Agriculture Conservation Services Division 700 Kipling Street Suite 4000 Lakewood, CO 80215 303-239-4100 Yellow flowers that are like snapdragons with deep orange centers. Stems that are woody at the base and smooth to the top. 1. 2. Identification and Impacts Y ellow toadflax (Linaria vulgaris) is a perennial escaped ornamental plant that is native to the Mediterranean region. The leaves are narrow, linear, and 1 to 2 inches long. The stems are woody at the base and smooth toward the top. Sparingly branched and 1 to 3 feet tall. The showy snapdragon-like flowers are bright yellow with a deep orange center and have a spur as long as the entire flower. It develops an extensive root system, making control options varied. Yellow toadflax displaces desirable plant communities reducing ecological diversity and rangeland value. Decreases forage for domestic livestock, some big game species and decreases habitat for associated animal communities. The plant is known to be mildly poisonous to cattle. Goats and sheep have been known to graze the plants with little effect. H abitats for Yellow toadflax include roadsides, vacant lots, gravel pits, fields, waste areas, other disturbed sites and rangeland. It has adapted to a variety of site conditions, from moist to dry and does well in all types of soil. The plant can even establish in areas of excellent Key ID Points Linaria vulgarisYellow toadflax Identification and Management condition in natural disturbances or small openings. T he key to effective control of Yellow toadflax is prevention and integrating as many management strategies as possible. Prevention is always desirable when dealing with Yellow toadflax. Early detection and eradication can keep populations from exploding, making more management options available. With the plants varying genetically using many different approaches is important such as; herbicide, mechanical, cultural and biological methods. Details on the back of this sheet can help to create a management plan compatible with your site ecology. Y ellow toadflax is designated as a “List B” species in the Colorado Noxious Weed Act. It is required to be either eradicated, contained, or suppressed depending on the local infestations. For more information visit www.colorado. gov/ag/csd and click on the Noxious Weed Management Program. Or call the State Weed Coordinator at the Colorado Department of Agriculture, Conservation Services Division, 303-239-4100. List B Species Rangeland, pasture, and riparian site recommendations List B Species  Updated on: 02/08 CULTURALEstablish select grasses and forbs as an effective cultural control of Yellow toadflax. Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation Service for seed mix recommendations. Bareground is prime habitat for weed invasions, so maintain healthy pastures and prevent bare spots caused by overgrazing. BIOLOGICAL Calophasia lunula, a predatory noctuid moth, feeds on leaves and flowers of Yellow toadflax. Eteobalea intermediella, a root boring moth and Mecinus janthinus a stem boring weevil are also available. For more information, contact the Colorado Department of Agriculture’s Insectary in Palisade, Colorado at 970-464-7916. MECHANICAL Handpulling or digging is not recommended for eradication of Yellow toadflax because it’s unlikely that the entire root will be excavated and a new plant is likely to occur. A single new plant might be an exception. Tillage is not recommended due to the creeping root system. Middle photo © Eric Coombs, Oregon Department of Agriculture, Bugwood.org. All other photos © Kelly Uhing.Yellow toadflaxIntegrated Weed Management: Because of the high genetic variability of the toadflax species it is critical to integrate as many management strategies as possible into the control program. Two local populations may respond differently to the same herbicides. Keys to management are to prevent seed formation and vegetative spread by roots. Controlling is expensive and difficult to treat toadflaxes, prevention is the best option.http://www.colorado.gov/ag/csd HERBICIDES NOTE: The following are recommendations for herbicides that can be applied to range and pasture - lands. Rates are approximate and based on equipment with an output of 30 gallons per acre. Always read, understand, and follow the label directions. The herbicide label is the LAW! Management RecommendationsHERBICIDE RATE APPLICATION TIMING Picloram + Chlorsulfurn (Tordon 22K - *restricted use* + Telar - general use) Apply at 1 qt.+ 1.25 oz product/A plus 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant. Apply at flowering through fall. Typically late August through September application timing has shown best results. Re-treatment may be necessary. Picloram (Tordon 22K - *restricted use*) Apply at 1.5 qt./A Apply in fall (late August through September). Add 0.25% v/v non-ionic surfactant or 1 qt/A crop oil concentrate. Integrated Weed Management recommendations List B Species Annex Cuttings Facility E&P Waste Management Facility Contingency Response Plan Laramie Energy, LLC 769 Horizon Drive, Suite 101 Grand Junction, CO 81506 November 2020 Annex Cuttings Facility Contingency Plan ACF Contingency Plan Laramie Energy, LLC Table of Contents 1.Annex Cuttings Facility Contingency Plan 2.Emergency Action Plan 3.Emergency Notification Chart 4.Health and Safety Manual 5.Emergency Access Route – North Field 6.Emergency Access Route – South Field 7.ACF Location Figure 8.ACF Access Route Map 9.Site Plan Annex Cuttings Facility Contingency Plan ACF Contingency Plan Laramie Energy, LLC Introduction Purpose: The purpose of the Annex Cuttings Facility (ACF) contingency plan is to provide employees and contractors working at Laramie’s ACF with emergency procedures and phone numbers for local emergency response agencies that should be contacted in the event of an emergency at the ACF. Associated Plans: Laramie’s Emergency Action Plan and Laramie’s Health and Safety Manual shall be utilized with working at the ACF. Employees and contractors shall familiarize themselves with both plans and emergency routes if accessing the ACF. Site Specific Details Location: The ACF location is Southwest ¼ of the Southeast ¼ of Section 15, Township 6 South, Range 97 West of the 6th Principal Meridian, Garfield County. The site is easterly located on parcel 2169- 214-00-026 within Laramie’s Cascade Creek operating field. The parcel is located 12.2 miles north of DeBeque, Colorado. The site is located approximately 16 miles northeast of DeBeque, Colorado and 21.8 miles northeast by access route. The site is located approximately 9.6 miles from the nearest public road, County Road 213. Annex Cutting Facility Description: The site will accommodate additional overflow of cuttings material from three COGCC approved well pad locations in the Cascade Creek Field: CC 610-21-4, CC 697-15-08, and CC 603- 23-32. The site will treat dried drill cuttings. Once drill cuttings meet COGCC current requirements, the cuttings will be applied as beneficial reuse for grading and contouring activities. Laramie Energy estimates that 19,800 cubic yards of untreated cuttings will need to be transported to ACF. The site will allow up to 29,000 cubic yards of material to be managed and stored. The site location was previously developed as an approved well site and annex pad. Existing equipment located on the western boundary of the CC 697-15-54 is not include in the perimeter of the proposed ACF. Annex Cuttings Facility Contingency Plan ACF Contingency Plan Laramie Energy, LLC Site Information Site Name Annex Cuttings Facility (ACF) Cascade Creek (CC) 697-15-54 Operator Laramie Energy, LLC 769 Horizon Drive, Suite 101 Grand Junction, CO 81506 Landowner Laramie Energy, LLC COGCC Location ID 335803 Physical Location SW ¼ of the SE ¼ of Section 15, Township 6 South, Range 97 West of the 6th P.M., Garfield County Lat/Long: 39.51931/-108.20153 Physical Address Parcel is accessed from County Road 213 (Conn Creek Road), Garfield County. Site is located approximately 9.6 miles from Road 213. Operating Field Cascade Creek North Field Health and Safety Coordinator For injury, vehicle, damage Laura Lancaster 970-644-1259 - Cell 970-263-3627 - Office North Production Manager Eric Lane 970-640-9172 – Cell 970-812-5313 - Office Regulatory & Env Manager For spills, environmental, wildlife Wayne Bankert 970-985-5383 - Cell 970-812-5310 - Office Fire District DeBeque Fire Protection District Emergency - 911 Non-Emergency (970) 242-6707 Fire House (970) 283-8632 Laramie Energy, LLC Emergency Action Plan Corporate: Laramie Energy, LLC 1401 Seventeenth St. Suite 1400 Denver, Colorado 80202 Field: 760 Horizon Drive, Suite 101 Grand Junction, Colorado 81506 TABLE OF CONTENTS Emergency Action Plan .......................................................................1 PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................................................ 1 OWNERSHIP ........................................................................................................................................................ 2 GENERAL, ON-SITE RESPONSIBILITY ......................................................................................................................... 2 DRILLING OPERATIONS, ON-SITE RESPONSIBILITY ....................................................................................................... 3 COMPLETION OPERATIONS, ON-SITE RESPONSIBILITY .................................................................................................. 3 EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS AND CONTACTS (TABLE 1) ......................................................................................... 4 Emergency Procedures: FIRE/EXPLOSION ................................................................................5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS RELEASE ......................................................5 VEHICLE ACCIDENT .............................................................................6 PERSONAL INJURY ..............................................................................6 SUDDEN ILLNESS OR DEATH ...............................................................7 1 Emergency Action Plan The management of Laramie Energy is genuinely concerned with the health and welfare of all personnel who enter oil and gas field operations including company employees, customer employees, contractors, contractor’s employees, visitors to the premises and the general public. While Laramie Energy engages professional contractors and drilling contractors and relies upon their expertise and their own, published, Emergency and Safety Plans, it is essential for all Laramie Energy personnel and associates to know what to do in the event of an emergency in order to minimize danger. Purpose The purpose of this emergency action plan is to provide employees and contractors working at Laramie Energy sites with emergency procedures and phone numbers for local emergency response agencies that should be contacted in the event of an emergency at a Laramie Energy work site. This Emergency Action Plan may be published independently from the Safety Plan as needed. Requirements (per 29 CFR 1910.38(c)) • Means of reporting fires and other emergencies – Laramie employees must use any means possible to contact emergency services if necessary. Cell phones, company radios, land lines and satellite phones may be used to accomplish this goal. In offices, the manual fire alarm may be pulled. All fires and incidents must be reported to the appropriate supervisor and safety department as soon as possible. • Evacuation procedures and emergency escape route assignments – written procedures and route assignments are available for larger facilities and offices. In occupied offices, you must close your door as you exit your office. A floor warden will ensure that the office floor is completely evacuated and will be the last employee to vacate the office area. Evacuation of smaller sites, such as well pad locations must be addressed during a project pre-job meeting. • Procedures for employees who remain to operate critical plant operations before they evacuate – Laramie employees will initiate shutdown procedures per facility in the event of an emergency evacuation. Laramie employees will be expected to evacuate when the signal is given. • Accounting for all employees after an emergency evacuation has been completed – the supervisor on site (or most senior employee if the supervisor is not present) will be responsible to account for all employees and contractors on site during an evacuation to ensure that everyone has safely evacuated. • Rescue and medical duties for employees performing them – Employees will be expected to perform rescue and medical duties to the level in which they were trained. Employees will be expected to not perform above their training level. • Names or job titles of persons who can be contacted: 2 Ownership OWNER RESPONSIBLE PARTY Laramie Energy, LLC 1401 Seventeenth St. Suite 1400 Denver, Colorado 80202 Office: 303-339-4400 Fax: 303-339-4399 Robert S. Boswell Chairman & Chief Executive Officer Office: 303-339-4401 Cell: 303-517-1774 General, On-Site Responsibility DENVER OFFICE RESPONSIBLE PARTY Denver Emergency 911 Laramie Energy Office 303-339-4400 Building Security 720-300-1150 Property Management 303-382-1331 GRAND JUNCTION OFFICE RESPONSIBLE PARTY Laramie Energy, LLC 760 Horizon Drive, Suite 101 Grand Junction, Colorado 81506 Phone: 970-263-3600 Chris Clark Vice President- Field Operations Office: 970-263-3607 Cell: 970-462-8375 NORTH PICEANCE OFFICE - DEBEQUE RESPONSIBLE PARTY Laramie Energy, LLC 4321 V 2/10 Rd. DeBeque, Colorado 81630 Phone: 970-263-3655 Eric Lane North Area Production Manager Office: 970-812-5313 Cell: 970-640-9172 3 SOUTH PICEANCE OFFICE- COLLBRAN RESPONSIBLE PARTY Laramie Energy, LLC 6645 64 6/10 Road Collbran, Colorado 81624 Phone: 970-487-0298 Fax: 970-487-3843 Milt Johnson South Area Production Manager Office: 970-487-3897 Cell: 970-230-1011 Fax: 970-487-3585 Home: 970-268-5503 or 970-487-0261 Drilling Operations, On-Site Responsibility DRILLSITE RESPONSIBLE PARTY Varies (to be shared during drilling activity) Aaron Duncan Drilling Manager Office: 303-339-4913 Cell: 406-498-4526 Completion Operations, On-Site Responsibility COMPLETION SITE RESPONSIBLE PARTY Varies (to be shared during completion activity) John Grubich Completions/Production Engineering Manager Office: 970-812-5312 Cell: 970-589-9496 Home: 970-245-1656 4 Emergency Phone Numbers and Contacts This section provides a list of emergency phone numbers that should be used in the event of an emergency at one of Laramie Energy’s field locations. Please note that the different Laramie Energy field locations have different local emergency response numbers. Table 1 – Emergency Phone Numbers DeBeque Area Collbran Area CareFlight 1 (800) 332-4923 CareFlight 1 (800) 332-4923 Mesa County Sheriff 970-242-6707 Mesa County Sheriff 970-242-6707 Saint Mary’s Hospital 970-244-2273 Saint Mary’s Hospital 970-244-2273 Grand River Hospital 970-625-6400 Community Hospital 970-242-0920 DeBeque Fire Dept. 970-283-8632 Plateau Valley Fire Dept. 970-268-5283 Non-Emergency 970-242-6707 Non-Emergency 970-242-6707 Colorado State Patrol 970-249-4392 Colorado State Patrol 970-249-4392 Buckhorn Draw Area CareFlight 1-800-332-4923 Rio Blanco County Sheriff 970-878-9625 Pioneers Medical Center 970-878-5047 Meeker Fire Dept. 970-878-3443 Non-Emergency 970-878-9600 Colorado State Patrol 970-826-1301 All Denver area emergencies – call 911 5 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES FOR: FIRE/EXPLOSION 1. KEEP CALM! In your haste to act, you may injure others or yourself. 2. Drilling Supervisor, Completion Supervisor, or Area Production Manager is in charge. 3. Evacuate and follow directions to a safe location. 4. Contact the appropriate local emergency response authorities from Table 1: 5. Follow directives of Sheriff, Ambulance and/or Fire Department personnel upon arrival. 6. Be available to support supervisor’s directives, including assisting with fire extinguishing and evacuation of injured personnel if trained and able. 7. Contact Area Production Manager by phone if not already onsite or previously contacted. 8. Contact Chris Clark, Vice President- Field Operations, at 970-462-8375 (cell) if not previously contacted. 9. Contact Robert Boswell, Chief Executive Officer, at 303-517-1774 (cell) if not previously contacted. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS RELEASE 1. KEEP CALM! In your haste to act, you may injure others or yourself. 2. Make sure the area is safe. If a confined area, verify that atmosphere is breathable before entering.  Assess the situation:  Is anyone injured?  What materials were released?  Are surface runoff waters impacted? 3. Depending on conditions:  If a serious injury or an associated fire: - Call appropriate emergency response authorities from Table 1.  Relay nature of emergency, location and travel instructions.  If drilling or completion rig/materials/personnel are involved, Notify: - The Drilling or Completions Supervisor and/or - The Area Production Manager 4. If release is manageable, use materials on hand to control and contain the release. 5. Follow procedures in Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures Plan. 6. Ensure that all communications notices have been made. 6 VEHICLE ACCIDENT 1. KEEP CALM! In your haste to act, you may injure others or yourself. 2. Make sure the vehicle is secured. Take notice of risk of fire or of shifting loads. 3. Assess the situation:  Is anyone hurt?  Have any hazardous materials been released?  Provide first aid to injured personnel to your training level. 4. Take steps to control traffic in area. 5. Depending on conditions:  If a serious injury or associated fire, call appropriate emergency response authorities from Table 1;  Identify the nature of the emergency, location and travel instructions.  If no injury or minor injury, document information and provide medical attention.  If on public roads, call local Sheriff from Table 1.  If reasonable, remove damaged vehicle from public thoroughfare. 6. Ensure that all communications notices have been made. PERSONAL INJURY 1. KEEP CALM! In your haste to act, you may injure others or yourself. 2. Make sure the area around injured person is safe. If a confined area, verify that atmosphere is breathable before entering. 3. Assess the condition of the injured. 4. If a serious injury, call the appropriate emergency response authorities from Emergency Notification Chart:  Nature of emergency, location and travel instructions.  Designate a well-known local site to meet incoming ambulance to guide to site.  Use map for surface transportation.  In case of major incident; use latitude-longitude or well known, easy-to-recognize landmark for helicopter response. 5. If drilling or completion rig/materials/personnel are involved, Notify:  The Drilling or Completion Supervisor and/or  The Area Production Manager. 6. Provide first aid to injured personnel to your training ability. 7. Ensure that all required notifications have been made. 7 SUDDEN ILLNESS OR DEATH 1. KEEP CALM! In your haste to act, you may injure others or yourself. 2. If ill worker is conscious and able to respond: • Make sure the area around ill person is safe. If a confined area, verify that atmosphere is breathable before entering. • Remove ill worker from harm’s way. Protect from extremes of temperature. Assure continued breathing. • Inquire as to the nature of the illness, attack or symptoms and available medication if needed. • Administer first aid to your training ability. • Call appropriate emergency response services from Table 1. 3. If ill worker is unconscious or unable to respond: • Make sure the area around ill person is safe. If a confined area, verify that atmosphere is breathable before entering. • Remove ill worker from harm’s way. Protect from extremes of temperature. Assure continued breathing. • Inquire of friends or co-workers as to the nature of the illness, attack or symptoms. • Inquire of friends or co-workers as to available medication if needed. • Administer first aid to your training ability. • Call appropriate emergency response services from Table 1. 4. Notify the Drilling Supervisor, Completions Supervisor, or Area Production Manager. 5. Contact Chris Clark, Vice President – Field Operations, at 970-462-8375 (cell) if not previously contacted. 6. Contact Robert Boswell, Chief Executive Officer, at 303-517-1774 (cell) if not previously contacted. 7. If a hospitalization, fatality, amputation or loss of an eye occurs, the Chief Operating Officer or his/her representative must notify OSHA within 8 hours of such incident. Emergency Notification Chart Operations & Facilities Completions John Grubich Completions Mgr C 970-589-9496 O 970-812-5312 Drilling Aaron Duncan Drilling Manager C 406-498-4526 O 303-339-4913 First Responder: contact emergency services as necessary 911. Direct Dispatch numbers are listed below. **Verbal contact MUST be made or move to next person in line. Voicemail, email or text are not acceptable for emergency notification** Chris Clark VP-Field Operations C 970-462-8375 O 970-263-3607 Wayne Bankert Regulatory & Env Manager C 970-985-5383 O 970-812-5310 Laura Lancaster Health & Safety Coordinator C 970-644-1259 O 970-263-3627 Eric Lane North Prod Mgr C 970-640-9172 O 970-812-5313 Milt Johnson South Prod Mgr C 970-230-1011 O 970-263-3665 Mesa County Dispatch (Debeque/Collbran) 970-242-1234 Garfield County Dispatch (Rifle) 970-625-8095 Rio Blanco County Dispatch (Buckhorn Draw/Piceance) 970-878-9625 St. Mary’s Careflight 970-332-4923 Poison Control Hotline 800-222-1222 Chemtrec 800-424-9300 For spills, environmental, wildlife For injury, fire, vehicle, damage SOUTH NORTH Laramie Health and Safety Manual October 2020 2 Table of Contents Sec 1 INTRODUCTION Sec 2 SAFETY AND HEALTH MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Sec 3 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Sec 4 VEHICULAR OPERATIONS Sec 5 WALKING AND WORKING SURFACES Sec 6 HAZARD COMMUNICATION Sec 7 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY SOURCES Sec 8 PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACES Sec 9 FIRST AID/CPR/BBP Sec 10 FALL PROTECTION Sec 11 ERGONOMICS Sec 12 ELECTRICAL SAFETY Sec 13 HYDROGEN SULFIDE Sec 14 EXCAVATION/GROUND DISTURBANCE Sec 15 HOT WORK Sec 16 FORKLIFT/INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS Sec 17 POWER AND HAND TOOLS Sec 18 MACHINE GUARDING Sec 19 FIRE PREVENTION Sec 20 CONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT Sec 21 EMERGENCY RESPONSE Sec 22 EXTRA TOPICS (housekeeping, compressed gas cylinders, liquids handling & transfer operations, fueling, pipeline & gathering systems, well completion & drilling operations) 3 Section 1 INTRODUCTION I. Purpose The purpose of this Introduction is to define and implement a Field Safety and Health Management System and appropriate safety and health programs, as identified in the subsequent sections for Laramie Energy. Laramie Energy is responsible for ensuring that employees of the company have a safe and healthful workplace that complies with the Occupational Safety and Health Act and with OSHA standards. II. Scope The instruction applies to all Laramie Energy employees. III. References A. Occupational Safety and Health Act, Public Law 91-596, December 29, 1970; as amended by Public Law 101-552, November 5, 1990; as amended by Public Law 105- 241, September 29, 1998. B. Presidential Executive Order 12196 of February 26, 1980; Title 29: Subtitle B – Regulations Relating to Labor. V. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 4 Section 2 SAFETY AND HEALTH SYSTEM SAFETY AND HEALTH MANAGEMENT SYSTEM I. Management Commitment and Leadership II. Employee Participation III. Worksite Analysis IV. Incident Reporting/Investigation Procedures V. Hazard Prevention and Control VI. Safety and Health Training VII. Specific Safety and Health Programs VIII. Revision History In general, it is Laramie Energy’s belief that: • The safety of people is more important than any property or business objective. • All workplace accidents can be prevented through proper training, planning and preparation. • Safe behavior while at work is a condition of employment. • Safety is the responsibility of all employees and contractors. Everyone should strive to improve the safety of the workplace. Laramie Energy uses professional contractors and consultants for many exploration and production related operations including: • Surveying; • Well pad, road and pipeline construction; • Well drilling, well completion and well work over activities; • Transporting produced fluids; and • Maintenance activities. By engaging these contractors and consultants to provide their professional services, Laramie Energy thereby relies upon their specific expertise, and their own Health and Safety Plans and employee training procedures to address their activities. However, it is essential that all of the Company’s personnel and associates conduct their activities in a manner that is consistent with the general safety policies established by the Company and in accordance with the Health and Safety Program and Procedures described in this plan. General Safety Policies All employees or contractors of Laramie Energy are required to perform their assigned duties in accordance with the following general safety policies: 5 1. Laramie Energy requires all employees and contractors to be fully trained and knowledgeable of their assigned duties. This includes all applicable requirements for safety, health and environmental protection associated with the full scope of the Employee’s work. 2. Any work task that potentially may expose an employee (s) to hazardous materials will be conducted only after developing a site-specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP) per OSHA requirements. 3. Smoking on company property is prohibited except in designated areas. 4. Intoxicants, narcotics or illicit drugs shall not be consumed or possessed while using company equipment, working on a job site, or while working on a company project. All Employees must comply with the directives stated in the Company’s Anti-Drug Plan and Alcohol Misuse Plan. 5. Firearms of any kind are prohibited on company property, including the possession of a firearm in a vehicle or other equipment without supervisor consent. 6. It shall be the Employee’s responsibility to practice good housekeeping methods to the extent possible. This will include the disposal of trash, keeping materials and supplies orderly, appropriately labeled, and stored safely, and keeping equipment and material from obstructing roads and walkways. 7. Employee shall operate vehicles in a responsible and safe manner on the job site and anytime they are on company property. Employee shall have a current and valid driver’s license and comply with all applicable local or state laws governing motor vehicle use. See Vehicle Policy. 8. The use of a hand held cellular telephone while operating a moving vehicle is not authorized by the Company. Employees involved in a motor vehicle accident while using a telephone in a moving vehicle will be subject to disciplinary action. Reporting Unsafe Conditions/Hazard Identification All Employees shall promptly report to the Area Production Manager, Safety Department and/or company Field Manager any unsafe condition or work practice. Anytime an unsafe condition or work practice is reported, immediate steps will be taken to correct the situation. The employee, Field and Area Production Manager will be responsible for assuring the reported condition or unsafe work practice is corrected immediately. The Field Production Manager, Area Production Manager and employee share the responsibility to make sure safe work conditions are maintained at the work site at all times. All personnel have the authority to suspend operations due to an unsafe condition. 6 Section 3 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT I. Purpose The purpose of this Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Program is to protect employees from the risk of injury by creating a barrier against workplace hazards. PPE will be provided, used and maintained when it has been determined that its use is required and that such use will lessen the likelihood of occupational injury and/or illness. II. Scope The program applies to all employees required to wear PPE. This program addresses all forms of PPE except respiratory and hearing protection, which are addressed in separate sections. III. Responsibilities A. Responsible managers have the primary responsibility for implementation of the PPE program in their work area. Responsible managers will: a. Provide and make available appropriate PPE; b. Ensure and certify completion of a PPE assessment; c. Ensure employees are trained on the proper use, care and cleaning of PPE; d. Maintain records of training and PPE supplied; e. Supervise employees to ensure that the PPE program elements are followed and that employees properly use and care for PPE; f. Ensure that defective or damaged equipment is immediately removed from service; g. Ensure proper disposal and cleaning of contaminated PPE; and h. Designate a PPE coordinator to supervise the distribution, maintenance, and care of equipment. B. Employees are responsible for conforming to the requirements of this policy. Employees will: a. Wear PPE as necessary; b. Attend PPE training sessions; c. Care for, clean, maintain and dispose of PPE as necessary; and d. Report any damaged or defective PPE to their responsible manager. IV. Procedure A. Hazard Assessment a. Based on a general assessment of all routine work sites, it is Laramie policy that all employees will utilize safety glasses, safety footwear, hard hat and flame retardant clothing on all sites. Additional PPE may be required based on a hazard assessment. 7 b. At the start of any field activity, the employee will assess the need for specific PPE based on the job tasks and the PPE assessment. c. If during the course of field activities, a hazardous condition requiring the use of PPE, not addressed by the hazard assessment, the hazardous condition will promptly be addressed and appropriate PPE will be added before proceeding unless some action eliminates the hazard. B. General Requirements a. All PPE procured will be designed to meet relevant National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), American National Standards Institute (ANSI) or other generally accepted industrial standards. b. Equipment will be maintained and worn in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. c. Care will be taken to ensure that the correct size is selected. C. Eye and Face Protection a. Eye protection with side protection that meet the requirements of ANSI Z 87.1- 2010 (and must be marked as such) will be worn during field activities. Exceptions may be in offices, field dog houses, and enclosed vehicles. b. Wherever hazards exist that may require additional eye protection, goggles or face shields will be worn. c. Equipment fitted with appropriate filter lenses will be used to protect against light radiation. Tinted or shaded lenses are not filter lenses unless they are marked or identified as such. d. Eye and face protection must be visually inspected for damage prior to each use. e. Safety glasses will be provided to employees. Those employees who need prescription safety eyewear will be reimbursed to a maximum of $200 annually for prescription safety eyewear. The eye exam will be the responsibility of the employee through their personal health/vision insurance or by other means. D. Head Protection a. The use of hard hats is mandatory in field locations for personnel except for those in offices and while in enclosed vehicles. Hard hats must comply with ANSI Z89.1 – 2003. Type 1, Class “E” hard hats are required. b. Hard hats are to be adjusted and maintained in good condition per manufacturer’s specifications. Metal and fiberglass hard hats are not allowed. Shells and suspensions of hard hats should be routinely inspected to determine their condition. c. It is recommended that shells be replaced within 5 years and suspensions within 1 year unless inspection reveals defects prior to the expiration of these periods. 8 E. Foot Protection a. All employees must wear protective footwear that complies with ANSI Z-41-1999 or ASTM F2412-05 and F-2413-05) unless in offices, field dog houses, or enclosed vehicles. b. Footwear must extend above the ankle when worn by field personnel. c. Footwear must be visually inspected for damage prior to use. d. Sandals, canvas, cloth or tennis shoes are prohibited outside of offices or enclosed vehicles. e. Field and office employees required to attend field areas on a regular basis will reimbursed to a maximum of $160 annually. F. Hand Protection a. Hand protection will be worn to protect against specific hazards such as chemical exposure, electrical hazards, heat, cuts, bruises or abrasion. b. Refer to SDS and Hazard Assessments to aid in the selection of appropriate hand protection for the job tasks. c. Gloves with excessive wear or damage shall be replaced immediately. G. Protective Clothing a. Company field employees and contractors are required to wear long sleeved shirts and full-length pants. Tank tops, sleeveless shirts and shorts are prohibited. Loose fitting clothing shall not be worn in areas where it could be caught in rotating equipment. b. The outermost layer of clothing while on field locations must be FR (flame retardant) and meet the requirements of NFPA 2112-2012. c. Because synthetic fiber is known to melt under high temperature conditions, it is recommended that cotton or natural fiber clothing be worn under FR garments. d. All FR clothing should be cared for per manufacturer’s recommendations per NFPA 2113. Torn or ragged FR clothing will be replaced. e. When working on or near a roadway, a reflective or highly visible warning vest should be worn. f. FR clothing will be provided to the employee on an as-needed basis. H. Portable gas detectors a. Gas detectors used for detecting contaminants in the breathing zone and those used for hot work or confined space entry must be calibrated and maintained to the manufacturer’s instructions and made to read zero in fresh air before use. I. Hearing Protection 9 a. Hearing protection will be required at areas with noise levels at 85 db(A) or higher. At noise levels above 100 db(A), it is recommended that double hearing protection (muffs and plugs) be used. b. High noise areas will be posted with warning signs. These areas will be periodically surveyed for noise level changes that may generate the need for a Hearing Conservation Program. c. Employees must be aware of the possibility that a high noise level area may be encountered that has no posting and must be prepared at all times to don hearing protection if needed. J. Respiratory Protection a. Respiratory protection is required anytime employees may be exposed to airborne hazards such as dusts, vapors, fumes, sprays, etc. b. Refer to the chemical’s Safety Data Sheet (SDS) prior to working with chemicals and follow all directives in the use of specialized PPE. c. At the time of this assessment, employees are not subjected to chemicals or routine work environments that require specialized respiratory protection. Employees should understand the Respiratory Protection procedure to an awareness level only. If changes in the workplace present respiratory hazards that require the employee use of respiratory protection, a Respiratory Protection Plan will be required. K. Training a. PPE training will include the following elements; i. When PPE is necessary; ii. What PPE is necessary; iii. How to properly don, doff, and adjust PPE; iv. Limitations of PPE; and v. Care, maintenance, disposal, and useful life of PPE. b. Employees will be expected to understand how to use PPE properly before they are allowed to perform work that requires the use of PPE. c. Retraining is required when: i. There are indications that PPE is not being used properly; or ii. There are changes in the PPE policy or equipment. L. Recordkeeping a. Written records will be kept of the names of persons trained, the type of training provided, and the dates when training occurred. b. All training records will be maintained at the field office for at least five years. c. PPE assessments by category and PPE hazard assessment certification will be maintained at the field office. 10 V. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: VI. Supporting Documents A. PPE Assessment B. PPE Certification C. Glove Chart 11 Section 4 VEHICULAR OPERATIONS I. Purpose The purpose of this Vehicular Operations section is to establish a policy for usage of vehicles owned or leased by Laramie Energy. The following policy is designed to ensure that drivers who are assigned owned or leased vehicles (referred to as Company vehicles and may include any company-owned or company-leased automobiles, vans, four-wheel drive vehicles, pickup trucks, SUVs, etc.) do so safely and in accordance with company policies and applicable motor vehicle laws. II. Scope This policy is applicable to all employees or contractors who are assigned or use Company vehicles. III. Responsibilities A. Management – Responsible for the overall implementation and usage of this policy throughout the field. B. Safety Department – Responsible for applicable training and providing equipment to ensure safe vehicle operation. IV. Procedure A. Use – Company vehicles will always be used in accordance with good judgement and in compliance with all local, state and federal traffic laws and according to the nature of the job. Specific requirements include the following: a. Personal use for all Company vehicles is prohibited (except as stipulated in section C). b. Driving Company vehicles on vacation or personal trips is prohibited. c. Company vehicles will only be driven by employees or designated contractors. d. Laramie Energy reserves the right to monitor company vehicle use, at any time, with or without the employee’s knowledge and as permitted by state law. This includes and is not limited to the use of GPS devices, or other electronic surveillance devices. Data monitored may include but is not limited to vehicle location, speed and distance travelled. e. Any Laramie employee whose operating license or privileges have expired or have been suspended or revoked must notify their supervisor immediately. Operating or using a Company vehicle or a personal vehicle for company business under an expired, suspended or revoked license is a violation of this policy. Laramie Energy reserves the right to use driving record review services to 12 review current operating licensure and driving records of company employees who are assigned a Company vehicle. f. Regardless of severity, any accidents, collisions or damage involving a Company vehicle, or injury resulting from a Company vehicle accident, require immediate supervisor and safety department notification and subsequent incident report (any loss or damage to a rental vehicle should be reported in accordance with the rental agreement). Registration and insurance information is located in each Company vehicle. g. Laramie Energy reserves the right to revoke Company vehicle driving privileges at management’s discretion upon violation of this policy and/or a demonstrated pattern of unsafe driving practices. Employees in violation of this policy shall also be subject to disciplinary actions up to and including termination. B. Company Vehicle Driver’s Responsibility a. It is the assigned driver’s responsibility that the assigned vehicle is kept in safe and dependable operating condition and as clean as working condition will reasonably permit. b. Use of seat belts in Company vehicles or personal vehicles driven for company business is required at all times. The driver is responsible for ensuring that all passengers are wearing seat belts prior to putting the Company vehicle into motion. c. Any tickets issued for a traffic infraction, moving or non-moving, while driving or using a Company vehicle must be reported to the employee’s supervisor as soon as reasonably possible. Fines associated with any traffic infraction are the responsibility of the employee. d. Engaging in distracting activities while driving a Company vehicle is prohibited and includes cell phone usage, unless such usage is hands-free. The use of a mobile phone or other mobile communications device while driving a Company vehicle must comply with current local and state law. e. Transporting firearms is strictly prohibited in all Company vehicles. An exception may be made with supervisor approval. f. Employees, prior to being assigned a Company vehicle, must present a valid driver’s license. g. Smoking is prohibited in Company vehicles. C. Company Vehicle Personal Use a. Examples of permitted personal use include: i. Stopping to run an errand directly on the way to or from work, ii. Going to/from a business related function, iii. Meals during the workday, or iv. Responding to an emergency. b. Examples of prohibited personal use include: i. Running personal errands (except for permitted use detailed in C.a.i) 13 ii. Use of a Company vehicle for non-business related activities (such as camping, fishing, boating, golfing, vacationing, hauling, etc.) iii. Any other non-business related use. V. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 9.28.16 adm LL VI. Supporting documents A. Monthly inspection checklist B. Statement of Compliance & Acknowledgment of Responsibilities 14 Section 5 WALKING AND WORKING SURFACES I. Purpose This program is intended to protect workers from potential health and safety hazards encountered with walking/working surfaces in the office and in the field. II. Scope All employees and contractors will comply with the requirements of this section. Only trained and authorized workers will be allowed to access ladders and other appropriate working surfaces. Employees will exercise professional judgment and limit their exposures to the absolute minimum. III. Definitions Definitions applicable to walking and working surfaces can be found in 20CFR 1910.21. IV. Responsibilities A. Managers are responsible for: a. Ensuring training is completed for all office, administrative, and field employees on the procedures in this section. b. Providing proper tools and equipment to ensure that the procedures are followed. c. Ensuring reported unsafe conditions are corrected. B. Employees are responsible for: a. Reporting all safety problems immediately to their supervisor. b. Maintaining a neat and sanitary office environment. c. Following all safety and health policies. V. Procedures A. Keep all worker areas, aisles, and passageways, including stairs, doorways, electrical panels and exits, free and clear of obstructions, and maintain them in a clean, orderly, and sanitary fashion. B. Maintain floors and stairs in a clean and dry condition (so far as possible). If a spill occurs, clean it up immediately or warn others and report it so that it can be cleaned up. C. All trip hazards must be eliminated. Common hazards include unsecured rugs, cords in walking areas, and projecting electrical outlet boxes. 15 D. Step stools, if equipped with wheels, should have an automatically locking base or wheel locks. Inspect to ensure all parts are secure and safety features, such as wheel locks and anti-slip treads, are intact and properly functioning. E. Ladders 1. Ladders will be selected for the work intended. 2. Make sure the ladder is the proper height for the job. Extension ladders will be at least 3 feet taller than the point of support and stepladders will be selected so that the worker is never required to use the top two steps. 3. Inspect ladders before use. Defective ladders will not be used. Some signs of defects include: broken rungs, split side rails, worn or broken safety feet, broken hinges and spreaders, loose nuts, bolds and/or rivets. If defective, remove ladder from service and place a warning tag reading on it “DO NOT USE.” 4. When using a straight ladder, place feet on a firm surface and secure it at the top so that it cannot slide sideways. 5. Always face the ladder when climbing or descending. Use both hands – never carry anything in your hands. You have climbed too high if your knees are above the top of the ladder or you cannot maintain a handhold on the ladder. 6. There should only be one person on a ladder at a time unless designed for multiple users. 7. Do not use metal ladders if there is a possibility of contact with electrical conductors. 8. Never use a stepladder as a straight ladder. 9. Do not use stepladders as a brace or support for a work platform or a plank. 10. Never lean from the side of a ladder. If necessary, the task will be evaluated for potential fall hazards. Other alternative solutions will be used to allow a safe approach to the task. F. Stairs, ramps and walkways will be clear and in good condition. Always use the handrail provided when ascending or descending stairs. G. Employees will be cautioned to watch for holes, concrete dividers, curbs, discarded items, paper and other tripping hazards. H. During cold weather, employees will be cautioned about icy conditions on walkways and parking lots. 16 I. Floors holes and openings will be protected by a cover or standard railing. Should the cover or railing need to be removed, the floor opening or hole will be constantly attended by an attendant assigned to warn others of the hazard. J. Open-sided floors or platforms that are four or more feet above ground level will be provided with proper standard railing. When there is equipment that could fall from these elevations, the installation of a standard toe board is required. K. Scaffolds – there are several different types of scaffolds. Access to elevated locations or work at heights requires guardrails, fall protection, or a personal fall arrest system device. Employees will be cautioned that if the work cannot be performed from the ground or by another available means, the following general requirements for scaffolding must be met: 1. Scaffolds will be used only when work cannot be performed from the ground or from solid construction. 2. Footing or anchorage for scaffolds will be sound, rigid, and capable or carrying the intended load without settling or displacement. Unstable objects, including barrels, boxes, loose bricks or concrete blocks, will not be used to support scaffolds or planks. The use of base plates and mudsills is acceptable. 3. Access to the scaffold must be provided by a ladder, ramp, or other safe means. Never use the side frames to access the scaffold. 4. Scaffolds must be fully planked. The planks will not extend less than six inches and not more than 18 inches from the end. 5. Scaffolds will not be used during storms, high wind, or when covered by ice or snow. 6. Scaffolds, over 10 feet from ground level, must have standards guardrails, toe boards, and will be properly cross-braced. 7. Mobile ladder stands and scaffolds will have positive wheel and/or swivel lock casters to prevent movement. VI. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 17 Section 6 HAZARD COMMUNICATION I. Purpose It is Laramie Energy’s policy to comply with the requirements of OSHA’s Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) and the UN Globally Harmonization System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS) and to ensure that the hazards of all chemicals are properly evaluated and that the information is available to all personnel in the workplace. II. Scope This program applies to all work operations where there is exposure to hazardous chemicals that are known to be present in the workplace in such a manner that employees may be exposed under normal conditions or use in a foreseeable emergency. The mere presence of a hazardous chemical in the workplace does not trigger coverage under the HCS. There must be actual or potential exposure to an employee. Consumer products are not covered by this program to the extent that the use of the products results in a duration and frequency of exposure that is not greater than that which could be reasonably experienced by consumers. III. Responsibilities A. Safety Department – to be responsible for implementing program, training employees on requirements and hazards, and provide training documentation upon request. B. Operations Management – a. To hold contractors accountable for providing Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each hazardous material they bring onto a Company site and the containers in which chemicals are brought on location to comply with all applicable DOT regulations and labeling requirements. b. To identify chemical hazards and to communicate chemical hazard information to onsite employees and to evaluate and provide appropriate PPE for the job. C. Employees – to ensure that all recommended and appropriate precautions specified on the SDS and by the onsite supervisor are implemented and adhered to when working with hazardous chemicals. D. Contractors – to provide SDS’s for each hazardous material they bring onto company property and have all containers labelled to meet all regulations and to ensure that training is conducted for all their employees as specified in 29CFR 1910.1200. IV. Procedure A. Common hazardous chemicals a. A list will be maintained of all hazardous chemicals used in the field and updated as necessary. 18 b. This list will identify the corresponding Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for each chemical. B. Safety Data Sheets a. A copy of a SDS for every substance on the list of hazardous chemicals in the field will be maintained. b. SDS’s for all hazardous chemicals used in the field will be readily accessible to employees at all times. c. If a hazardous chemical is ordered and/or used, the order is to include a request for the SDS. All SDS’s will be reviewed for content and completeness. d. SDS’s of new substances to be purchased must be reviewed and the chemical approved for use by a manager or designee. Whenever possible, the least hazardous substance will be obtained. C. Warning Labels a. All containers of hazardous chemicals will be properly labelled. b. All labels will identify the hazardous chemical and the appropriate hazard warning, including the target organ effects. c. Each label will be checked with the corresponding SDS to verify the information. d. Alternate labeling provisions, such as tags or markings, may be made for containers that are of unusual shape or size and do not easily accommodate a legible label. e. Chemicals that are transferred from a properly labeled container to a portable container, and that are intended only for the immediate use of the person who performs the transfer are not required to be labeled. Immediate use is defined in 29 CFR 1910.1200. D. Training a. Each employee who is potentially exposed to hazardous chemicals will receive training as outlined below. b. New employees will receive training on the contents of this program and specific training on the chemicals that the individual will be directly working with during orientation and prior to performing work where exposure may occur. c. Additional training will be provided for employees whenever a new chemical is introduced into their work area. d. As warranted, training may be provided based on the uniqueness of the hazards to be encountered at a worksite. e. The training program will emphasize the following elements: i. A summary of the Hazardous Communication Standard and the written program; ii. Hazardous chemical properties, including visual appearance and odor, and methods that can be used to detect the presence or release of hazardous chemicals; 19 iii. Physical and health hazards associated with potential exposure to hazardous chemicals; iv. Procedures to protect against hazards, such as personal protective equipment, work practices, and emergency procedures; v. Hazardous chemical spill and leak procedures; and, vi. Location of SDSs, how to understand their content, and how employees may obtain and use appropriate hazard information. E. Contractors a. Outside contractors will be advised of any chemical hazards that may be encountered in the normal course of their work. b. Outside contractors will be notified of the location and availability of SDSs. c. Each contractor bringing chemicals on-site must provide the appropriate hazard information, including SDSs. All containers of hazardous chemicals brought on- site by an outside contractor must be properly labeled. F. Non-routine tasks – if a non-routine task is planned, affected employees must be informed of any chemical hazards associated with the performance of the task(s) and appropriate measures before such work is initiated. V. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 20 Section 7 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY SOURCES I. Purpose The purpose of this program is to protect against the inadvertent or unintended release of energy, movement, or flow in electrical, mechanical, or material systems, which could result in injury to workers. Lockout of these systems must be utilized, where needed, to safely allow entrance into or close contact with equipment. These procedures will be used to ensure that machines or equipment being attended to are isolated from all potentially hazardous energy and locked out before employees perform any activity where unexpected energizing, start up, or release of stored energy could cause injury. II. Scope All employees will comply with the requirements of this program. Only authorized employees may apply locks and tags and only in accordance with this program. Compliance with 29 CFR 1910.147, 1910.269, and 1910.333 will be adhered to at all times. III. Definitions Affected employee. An employee whose job requires him or her to operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under LOTO or whose job requires him or her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed. Affected or authorized employees may disable, shut down, or turn off machines or equipment. Affected employees are not authorized to lock or tag out systems or equipment. Authorized employee. A person who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or equipment, which has a source(s) of energy that can cause injury. Furthermore, any employee who implements a lockout or tagout procedural element on machines or equipment (for servicing or maintenance purposes) is considered an authorized employee. This includes employees who: perform energy isolation, implement LOTO, dissipate stored energy, verify energy isolation, implement actions to release LOTO, and test or position machines or equipment. Capable of being locked out. An energy isolating device is capable of being locked out if it has a hap or other means of attachment to which, or through which, a lock can be affixed, or it has a locking mechanism built into it. Other energy isolating devices are capable of being locked out, if lockout can be achieved without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the energy- isolating device or permanently alter its energy control capability. Energized. Connected to an energy source or containing residual or stored energy. Conductors and parts of electrical equipment that have been de-energized, but have not been locked and tagged out in accordance with 1910.333, must be treated as energized parts. Conductors and 21 parts of electrical equipment that have been de-energized under procedures other than those required by 1910.269 must be treated as energized. Energy Isolation Device. A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of energy, including but not limited to manually operated circuit breakers, disconnect switches, line valves, block and any other similar devices. Push buttons, selector switches and other control circuits are not acceptable as energy isolation devices. Lockout Device. A device that utilizes a positive means, such as a key and lock, to hold an energy isolating device in a safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment. Each lockout device will be supplied with a tag meeting the requirements of 1910.147 and 1910.333 and identifying the lock user and the date of application. Servicing or Maintenance. Workplace activities, such as constructing, installing, setting up, adjusting, and inspecting machines or equipment. These activities include lubrication, cleaning, or un-jamming machines or equipment and making adjustments. They may also include non- exempt tool changes when the employee may be exposed to the unexpected energization, start-up, or release of hazardous energy. Tagout Device. A prominent warning device, such as a tag, and a means of attachment, that can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device in accordance with an established procedure to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed. If an item is capable of being locked out, it must be. IV. Responsibilities A. Responsible managers will ensure: a. Implementation of the program within the field operations. b. Employees are trained on program and specific procedures where needed. c. Adequate resources are provided to support the program. B. Employees (including authorized and affected) are responsible for: a. Attending training and demonstrating proficiency where appropriate. b. Following the program and procedures and incorporating their requirements into the work tasks. c. Informing the company when hazards or inadequacies are found. d. Ensuring designated contractors have a program in place, adhere to the program, and have had training. e. Ensure that all needed equipment and supplies are ready and available. f. Ensure that appropriate documentation is completed. g. Participate in periodic inspections of the program when requested to do so. 22 V. Procedures All work involving isolation of hazardous energy will be done in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147 – The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout). A. Preparation for Lockout/Tagout. Before working on, repairing, adjusting or replacing machinery and equipment, the following procedures will be utilized to place the machinery and equipment in a neutral or zero mechanical state. Before authorized or affected employees turn off a machine or piece of equipment, the authorized employee will have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the means to control the energy. If there is any question about how to implement a lockout/tagout it should be reviewed with the production manager. B. Notification of Employees. Affected employees shall be notified by the authorized employee of the application and removal of lockout/tagout devices, and the prohibition regarding attempts to restart or reenergize equipment which is locked/tagged out. C. Preparation for Shutdown. Affected employees should assist the authorized employees before shutting down equipment, such that the authorized employees shall know the types, magnitude and hazards of the energy to be controlled along with the methods to control the energy. D. Shutting down the equipment. An orderly shutdown must be utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazards to employees. Established equipment shutdown procedures for the machine or equipment should be followed to turn off or shut down the machine. E. Equipment isolation. All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the energy shall be physically located and operated as appropriate, to isolate the equipment from the energy source. F. Applying the Lockout/Tagout Device. Lockout/Tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating device by an authorized employee. A lock and/or tag shall be affixed to the energy isolation device. For clarification purposes, this means that if the energy isolation device is capable of being “locked”, then a lock and tag will be affixed. If an energy isolation cannot be locked, then a tag only will be affixed – but must be treated as equal integrity as a lock. No lock shall be affixed without a tag stating who locked out the equipment, the reason for the lockout/tagout, the date, and the appropriate warning tag, such as “Danger Do Not Operate”. Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag shall be located as closely and safely possible to the device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the equipment. Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices designed with the capability of being locked, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock would have been attached. 23 G. Releasing Stored or Residual Energy. All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained and equipment otherwise rendered safe. Stored energy (capacitors, springs, elevated members, rotating flywheels, and hydraulic/gas/air/steam systems) must be relieved or restrained by grounding, repositioning, blocking, and/or bleeding the system. If there is a possibility of re- accumulation of this energy, the verification of isolation must be continued until the job is complete of the possibility of accumulation no longer exists. H. Verifying Isolation (try out). The authorized employee shall verify that isolation and de- energization of the equipment has been accomplished prior to starting work on the locked or tagged out equipment. After ensuring that no personnel are exposed, operate/test (try out) the starting mechanism to make certain the equipment will not operate by following the normal startup procedures (depress start button, etc.) NOTE: Be certain to return the switch or START button, which was used to test the lockout, to its OFF or NEUTRAL position. At the beginning of each shift, or after any substantial absence from the job (breaks or meals), any person who has equipment locked out will check the equipment and the disconnecting device to determine and verify that all equipment is still safe for work and has not been returned to service during their absence. I. Release from Lockout/Tagout. Before energy is restored to the equipment the following steps shall be completed by the authorized employee: a. Assure that the equipment is ready to be energized and operated. The authorized employee should ensure that all nonessential items have been removed and the equipment is operationally intact (i.e. machine guards). b. Notify all affected employees that LOTO devices are being removed and ensure that all employees are in a safe position, away from the equipment and that they are to remain clear of the equipment while it is being re-energized. Re-energize the machine according to the associated procedure. Verify the machine is operating normally and safely before allowing a resumption of work in the machine’s vicinity. If the authorized employee is unavailable, the following necessary steps are required: c. Obtain approval of the Production Manager or designee for removal of lockout/tagout devices after completing the Lock Removal Form. d. Confirm that the authorized employee is not at the facility/location and unavailable to remove his or her personal lockout/tagout device. Confirm that the lockout/tagout is no longer required. Make a reasonable effort to contact the authorized employee whose lockout/tagout device is on the equipment that his or her LOTO device is to be removed. Remove the lockout/tagout device using bolt cutters or equivalent means. 24 e. Notify the authorized employee, whose lockout/tagout device has been removed, of the removal of his or her LOTO device before he or she returns to work at the facility/location. VI. Additional Guidelines A. Personal Lockout/Tagout. When only a few isolation devices need LOTO and/or only a few personnel are involved with the LOTO, then in most cases a lockbox is not needed for LOTO. In personal LOTO, each authorized employee will place his or her lock and/or tag on the energy isolation device and utilize a tracking form for documentation. The authorized employee makes the decision on which method is most appropriate. B. Group Lockout/Tagout. Each contract company must designate the primary authorized employee to conduct the verification process and ascertain the exposure status of individual group members and take the steps needed to afford the employees in their crew, craft, department or group the level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of personal LOTO devices. Each authorized employee has the right, and must be given the opportunity to participate in the verification process and apply their LOTO device should they so decide. *Note: if the contracting company has a more stringent LOTO program, it’s program may be followed. C. Tagout. Devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized. Tags may say “Do Not Start”, “Do Not Open”, “Do Not Close”, “Do Not Energize”, “Do Not Operate”, etc. Long term isolations or Out of Service tags may also be applied where appropriate. The primary authorized employee will decide which tag(s) will be used. D. Extended Lockout/Tagout. When equipment needs to be locked and/or tagged out for more than one work shift or workday, these LOTO’s must be communicated to personnel and contractors at the location/facility. If other employees are assigned to work on the affected equipment during this period, they will add their lockout/tagout devices and remove them upon completion of their tasks. E. Exclusive Control. Where the equipment or system is under the exclusive control of the employee (i.e. some pigging operations, orifice plate changes, dropping soap sticks, etc.), LOTO may not be needed. Under this exemption, a worker must be in physical control of all energy sources that may create a hazard and provide a safe level of control. F. Contractors. When it becomes necessary for a contractor to perform LOTO, the contractor will inform the Laramie representative of the LOTO plan and procedure and receive approval for the job. It will be at this time that the Laramie representative will determine if a Laramie representative will need to be present during the LOTO activity being performed. When performing group LOTO, all contractors must provide their own personal locks and tags. G. Shift or Personnel Changes. Employees involved in LOTO will ensure the continuity of lockout/tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout/tagout 25 device protection between off-going and oncoming employees. This is required to minimize exposure to the hazards from the unexpected energization or startup of the machine or equipment, or release of stored energy. VI. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: VII. Appendices A. LOTO Tracking Form B. Lock Removal Form C. LOTO Observation Form D. Annual Certification 26 Section 8 PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACES I. Purpose The objective of the Permit Required Confined Space portion is to protect employees from confined space hazards during the performance of operations and maintenance duties. II. Scope This section addresses and establishes procedures for the control and permit for entry of Confined Spaces. This procedure applies to all operating areas and facilities when Confined Space activities are performed. III. Definitions E. Authorized entrant. An employee who has been approved to enter the confined space by an appropriate manager/supervisor. F. Attendant. An individual stationed outside one or more permit spaces that monitors the authorized entrants and who performs all attendants’ duties as described in 29CFR1910.146. G. Confined Space. A space that: a. Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned work; and b. Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry); and c. Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy. H. Permit Required Confined Space (permit space). A confined space that has one or more of the following characteristics: a. Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere (as defined in 29CFR1910.146(b)); or b. Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant; or c. Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross-section; or d. Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard. IV. Responsibilities G. Company Oversight a. Managers are responsible for: i. Ensuring that employees understand the requirements of the Permit Required Confined Space Entry Program and that they have the 27 knowledge and skills required for the safe entry, if necessary, into permit- required confined spaces. ii. Complying with all requirements of the Permit Required Confined Space Entry Program. b. Employees are responsible for complying with all requirements of the Permit Required Confined Space Entry Program. H. Confined Space Entry Team Roles and Responsibilities a. Authorized Entrants and their Duties. The employer shall ensure that each authorized entrant: i. Knows the hazards that may be presented during entry, including information on how exposure might occur, signs and symptoms of exposure, and their consequences; ii. Is properly trained in permit required confined space entry procedures; iii. Knows how to properly use the equipment associated with confined space entry (testing, monitoring, communicating, etc.) iv. Communicates with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to monitor entrant status in the space and alert him of the need to evacuate. v. Alerts the attendant whenever an entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation or detects a prohibited condition; vi. Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever: 1. An order is given to evacuate, 2. The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous condition, 3. The entrant detects a prohibited condition, or, 4. An evacuation alarm is activated. b. Authorized Attendants and their duties. The employer shall ensure that each authorized attendant: i. Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure; ii. Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure to authorized entrants; iii. Continually maintains an accurate count of authorized personnel in the permit space; iv. Remains outside the permit space until relieved by another attendant; v. Communicates with authorized personnel as necessary to monitor entrant status and to alert them of the need to evacuate the space; vi. Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe to remain in the space and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space immediately under any of the following conditions; 28 1. If the attendant detects a prohibited condition; 2. If the attendant detects and behavioral effects of a hazardous exposure in authorized entrant; 3. If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the entrants; or 4. If the attendant becomes unable to effectively and safely perform all the duties required of him. vii. Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant determines that authorized personnel may need assistance to escape from permit space hazards; viii. Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons’ approach or enter a permit space while entry is underway: 1. Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the permit space; 2. Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they have entered the permit space; and 3. Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized persons have entered the permit space. ix. Perform non-entry rescue as specified by the employer rescue procedure if applicable. x. Perform no duties that might interfere with the attendant’s primary duty to monitor and protect the authorized entrants. c. Entry Supervisor Duties. The employer shall ensure that each authorized entry supervisor: i. Knows the hazards that may be presented during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure; ii. Verifies that all tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment specified by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to begin; iii. Verifies that all persons involved in permit entry are properly trained and competent in their assigned duties; iv. Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for summoning them are operable; v. Removes unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit space during entry operations; vi. Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is transferred and at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space, that entry operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry conditions are maintained; and, 29 vii. Terminates the entry and cancels the permit when the entry operations specified by the permit have been completed or when a condition not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space. (Note: Entries conducted under permitted conditions will require a minimum of three personnel: entry supervisor, entrant, and attendant plus provisions for rescue and emergency services personnel.) V. Procedures A. General. Laramie prohibits employees from entering permit spaces without the written approval of a manager. This includes permit spaces that have been reclassified or are being entered under alternative procedures as specified in 1910.146(c)(5)(ii) and (c)(7). The final determination of whether a confined space is a permit-required confined space shall be made by the employee who will be the entrant with the concurrence of their manager. If entry must take place, the guidelines below shall be employed. B. Entry Requirements. No entry will be permitted unless all the provisions of the 1910.146 standard have been met and the safety department has been consulted. Only employees who are trained in confined space entry and are medically fit to wear the necessary personal protective equipment may enter permit-required confined spaces. C. Evaluations. The Safety Department will conduct an initial evaluation on any known confined spaces and place these spaces into the Confined Space Inventory with a determination of permit requirements. In the event that a space needs to have entry (i.e. tank cleaning, valve repair, internal inspections, etc.), an additional evaluation will be completed by a trained person prior to entry. Employees, in coordination with managers, will evaluate the hazards identified by the employer which are present in the permit-required confined space. In addition, the space will be independently evaluated by the employee for any other hazards which may be present. D. PPE. In addition to personal protective equipment normally worn by employees, an employee who is conducting inspections involving entry into a permit-required confined space will be provided with and use all personal protective equipment necessary for safe entry. A self-contained escape respirator shall be worn where confined spaces have the potential to develop hazardous atmospheres. E. Attendant. A second trained employee will act as an attendant when the first employee enters the permit space. Both employees will be cross-trained in each other’s duties as an entrant and an attendant. The attendant will not enter the confined space under any circumstance. The attendant will monitor the activities in the confined space and order the entrant to evacuate if there are changes that could present a hazard. 30 F. Rescue. A safe means of rescue will be readily available on site. The attendant will not perform rescue. The attendant will confirm that personnel designated to perform rescue have been trained in accordance with 1910.146(k). If lockout is necessary to control hazards within the confined space, the entrant will follow lockout procedures. G. Conditions. The employee who will enter the confined space may use the permit entry procedures established by the employer only if all the following conditions are met: 1. The employer has a permit required confined space entry program that complies with 1910.146. 2. All hazards and potential hazards have been identified. There are no discrepancies or potential discrepancies between the employer’s assessment of the hazards and the assessment conducted by the employee. 3. The entrant verifies all entries on the permit and assures that all hazards or potential hazards have been eliminated or controlled. 4. The entrant will conduct his/her own atmospheric monitoring to confirm the space is safe to enter. H. Permit. A copy of the entry permit or certification will be given to the responsible manager for signature. Entry will not begin until a signed copy has been returned to the entrant. The permit must also be signed by the entry supervisor. The entry permit will be terminated by the responsible manager if entry conditions change or when the entry has been completed. I. Recordkeeping. Entry permits and certifications will be delivered to and be maintained in the safety department upon completion. The retention period for permits is 12 months. VI. Training A. Initial confined space entry awareness training for field employees. B. Initial site-specific permit-required confined space entry procedures and the confined space entry permit for affected personnel. C. Employees who are subject to a Confined Space Program and will be doing entry or attendance duties must comply with all training requirements as determined by the program. 31 VII. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 32 Section 9 FIRST AID/CPR/BBP FIRST AID/CPR/BBP I. Purpose II. Scope III. Definitions IV. Responsibilities V. Procedures a. Assessment b. Contractor injury c. Designated FA responder d. Administration of first aid reporting e. Exposure Control Plan i. Exposure Determination ii. Hazard Assessment iii. Method of implementation and Control iv. Hep B vaccination v. Post exposure vi. Recordkeeping VI. Training VII. First Aid Equipment VIII. Revision History IX. Supporting documents (Hep B vaccination) Incidents and First Aid Emergency phone numbers are maintained in all field vehicles. 1. In cases of emergency at remote drilling locations, Table 1 of the site-specific Emergency Action Plan will provide the appropriate emergency phone numbers. 2. If the emergency is at the corporate offices, call 911. State your name, the nature of the emergency, and the exact location of the injured person or emergency. Answer all questions completely. DO NOT use 911 for routine calls to police or fire departments. Any incident that requires notification of the emergency response system must be reported to the Laramie Energy Production Manager (PM) and the Vice President of Operations (VPO). The emergency contacts are located in your Emergency Notification Chart. Laramie Energy’s general policies addressing incidents and first aid are listed below: 1. Laramie Energy shall be responsible for providing approved first-aid supplies and first aid trained personnel on the job as required by 29 CFR 1910.151. Trained personnel and supplies must be sufficient and suitable for the job. 33 2. The Employee shall promptly report to Laramie Energy’s PM and VPO all incidents and occupational injuries or illnesses. Following an occupational injury or illness, the Employee shall furnish to Laramie Energy copies of all applicable workers’ compensation first report of injury forms so that Laramie Energy can revise the OSHA 200 log. The report shown in Attachment 1 (On The Job Injury or Accident Report) shall be completed and forwarded to the PM within 24 hours. 3. Laramie Energy shall investigate all incidents involving Employees that result in an OSHA recordable injury, spill/release to the environment, fire/explosion or damages in excess of $500. 4. Pursuant to Laramie Energy’s Drug and Alcohol programs, post-accident drug and alcohol tests may be conducted for any accident or injury. First Aid Kits First-aid kits and required contents shall be maintained in a serviceable condition as required by 29 CFR 1910.151. Unit-type kits have all items in the first-aid kit individually wrapped, sealed, and packaged in comparable sized packages. Drilling/Completion Rig Supervisors as well as the Production Manager will maintain first aid kits on site at their operations trailers and in their vehicles. 34 Sec 10 FALL PROTECTION I. Purpose The Fall Protection section is designed to protect employees against the hazards related to falls. Fall protection systems will be utilized whenever a fall exposure may exist. II. Scope All employees will comply with the requirements of this section. Only trained and authorized employees will be allowed to utilize fall protection systems. Employees who are trained and authorized will follow all applicable procedures and requirements. III. Definitions Definitions applicable to fall related devices can be found in Subpart M of the OSHA standards and ANSI A10.14-1991. IV. Responsibilities C. Responsible managers have the primary responsibility for fall protection in their work area. Responsible managers will: a. Ensure that employees understand the purpose of OSHA’s Fall Protection Program; b. Ensure that employees avoid all unexpected exposures to fall hazards; c. Provide the components needed for the particular fall protection system to be utilized; and, d. Ensure that employees have the knowledge and skills required for the safe application and use of fall protection systems. D. Employees will follow the requirements of this section. V. Procedure A. Hazard Identification a. Effectively managing working at heights begins with identifying fall hazards in the workplace. Workers shall evaluate and control fall hazards. b. Examples of situations where a fall hazard exists include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Unprotected sides and edges on walkways 4 feet or above; 2. Ramps, runways, and other walkways; 3. Wall openings; 4. Open top vessels or tanks; 5. Hoist areas; 6. Man lifts or powered platforms (at any height); 35 7. Crane baskets; 8. Personnel lifts; 9. Ladders, where three points of contact cannot be maintained; and 10. Derricks and masts. B. Hazard Assessment a. Where fall exposures are encountered on a work site, employees will assess the fall protection system(s) availability and applicability. The assessment will include any ladders, fixed and portable. b. Employees will only utilize the proper fall protection in accordance with OSHA requirements. c. Attention must be paid to whether a personal fall restraint system (PFRS) or a personal fall arrest system (PFAS) is needed. 1. A fall restraint system prevents an employee from falling any distance at all. The anchor of a fall restraint system is not called upon to withstand the force of an arrested fall, it only has to withstand the force of restraining a worker from moving further than the length of the lanyard. The anchor point must support a 3,000 pound load or have a safety factor of two. 2. A fall protection system arrests a person’s fall. 3. Fall restraint is preferred over fall arrest. C. Fall Prevention a. Fall prevention systems must always be used as the primary method of working safety at heights. If fall prevention systems are not practical, then fall protection systems must be used. Fall prevention consists of using engineered or administrative controls. b. Examples of fall prevention systems include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Guardrails with midrails and toe boards; 2. Ladder cages; 3. Warning line systems six feet from the edge; 4. Controlled access zones; 5. Covers for holes in floors, roofs, and other walking/working surfaces; and, 6. Spotters and monitors. D. Fall Protection a. If a fall prevention system cannot be used, fall hazards can be controlled by implementing fall protection systems. b. Workers must be protected from fall hazards where the worker could fall 4 feet or more or falling less than 4 feet onto dangerous equipment. 36 c. Where the worker will be within 6 feet or less from a fall hazard (typically a horizontal distance), identify the appropriate means of protection (i.e., netting, scaffolding, 100% tie-off, or other fall arrest means). d. 100% tie-off is required when working in man lifts or powered platforms using a harness and lanyard with a deceleration device. e. Fall protection is not required when personnel are working on permanent ramps, runways, work platforms, other walkways, or tank landings equipped with top rails, midrails, and toe boards. f. Tether tools or secure them with other means to prevent objects from falling. E. Equipment Selection a. Select components for PFAS/PFRS in accordance with current ANSI requirements. b. Only appropriate full body harnesses will be used. c. Only appropriate lanyard(s) and connecting hardware will be used. F. Equipment Implementation a. Equipment selected will be appropriate for the operation. b. Equipment will be inspected before each use for any defects that could affect the system’s safe operation and function. c. Equipment will be inspected annually by a competent person for safe working condition. If equipment does not meet the requirement, it will be destroyed or recertified by a qualified source. d. Fixed anchor points must be adequate and verified to meet requirements including documented inspection. e. Ladder climbing devices must be adequate and verified to meet requirements including documented inspection. f. Defective ladders will not be used. G. Rescue Plans – Prompt rescue in the event of a fall must be planned for before initiation of working at heights. Verification that a worker is able to perform self-rescue is also allowed. VI. Training A. Training will be provided to employees on hazard recognition, care and safe use of equipment, storage and maintenance, and limitations of fall protection systems. B. Each user must demonstrate an understanding of the proper use of the devices. C. Retraining will be conducted when site, job duties, or systems change, which presents new fall hazards; when the type of equipment to be used has changed; previous training becomes obsolete; or when it appears an employee does not have the required understanding or skill regarding fall hazards or protective measures. 37 VII. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 38 Section 11 ERGONOMICS I. Purpose The purpose of this section is to ensure ergonomic risk factors are managed to prevent work- related injuries or illnesses. The program will provide a framework for the activities that are necessary to identify, manage, control and eliminate ergonomic hazards in the workplace. II. Scope This program applies to all employees while performing work tasks and is intended to address activities that require significant forces, awkward and static postures, repetitive motion, vibration and other work-related risk factors. III. Definitions A. Administrative controls – changes in the way that work in a job is assigned or scheduled that reduces the magnitude, frequency or duration of exposure to ergonomic risk factors. B. Ergonomics - the science of fitting jobs to people encompassing the body of knowledge about physical abilities and limitations as well as other human characteristics that are relevant to job design. C. Engineering Controls – physical changes to a job that eliminate or reduce the presence of ergonomic hazards. Examples of engineering controls may include changing, modifying, or redesigning work stations, tools, facilities, equipment, materials or processes. D. Ergonomic Risk Factors – aspects of a job that post a biomechanical stress to the employee, such as forceful exertion, repetition, awkward or static postures, contact stress and vibration. E. Ergonomic Injuries and Illnesses – injuries and illnesses of the muscles, nerves, tendons, ligaments, joints, cartilage and spinal discs. It does not included injuries caused by slips, trips, falls or other similar accidents. Examples of ergonomic injuries and illnesses include: carpal tunnel syndrome, De Quervain’s disease, Sciatica, Epicondylitis, Tendonitis and herniated spinal disc. F. Signs and Symptoms – objective physical findings or physical indications that an employee may be developing an ergonomic injury or illness. IV. Responsibilities A. The manager will ensure the following activities are completed. a. Ensure all employees are provided the opportunity to participate in the program. 39 b. Identify any ergonomic risk factors. c. Develop and implement feasible controls to reduce ergonomic hazards. d. Ensure implementation of a medical management program for diagnosis and treatment of injuries and illnesses if necessary. e. Ensure training is provided on this program. f. Maintain worksite surveillance of the effectiveness of the program and develop action items as necessary. B. Employee Responsibilities. a. Notify management of signs and symptoms of ergonomic injuries and illnesses and work-related ergonomic risk factors. b. Participate in all aspects of the program, such as submitting concerns related to risk factors, discussing work methods, offering suggestions in problem solving exercises, and participating in all related education and training. C. Safety Department Responsibilities. a. Oversee and coordinate the medical management of ergonomic injury/illness cases. b. Coordinate any work restrictions. c. Assist in evaluation and improvement of the work environment. V. Procedure A. Reporting Procedures a. Reported signs or symptoms of ergonomic injuries/illnesses must be recorded, managed, and investigated for potential immediate fixes. Ergonomic injuries or illnesses that meet the criteria for recordability must be also recorded on the OSHA 300 log. b. If the condition cannot be immediately addressed and a long-term corrective action is needed, the affected employee will be kept apprised regarding the status of the reported issue(s). B. Worksite Analysis a. An analysis will be conducted on an as-need basis and should include risk factors associated with force, repetition, awkward and static postures, contact stress, vibration, and other work-related risk factors. b. Management will monitor the workplace to detect new or additional risk factors and ensure the adequacy of the completed analyses. C. Hazard Prevention and Control – the standard hierarchy of controls followed should be: a. Elimination; b. Engineering Controls; c. Work practice or administrative Controls; d. Personal Protective Equipment; e. Controls should be identified and implemented for work-related ergonomic hazards. Lifts should be monitored and machinery used whenever possible. 40 D. Medical Management a. Employees must report work-related ergonomic injuries and illnesses promptly. b. Access to health care professionals will be in accordance with existing Worker’s Compensation policies. c. Information will be provided to the health care professional about the job tasks and/or existing Worker’s Compensation policies when directed. d. Management will provide restricted employees work that is consistent with the employee’s capabilities per existing policies. E. Education and Training – training will be provided as needed and will include: a. Ergonomic risk factors relative to the work. b. Controls used to minimize or eliminate ergonomic hazards. c. Signs and symptoms of ergonomic related injuries and illnesses. d. Reporting and recording procedures. e. The employee’s role in evaluating the effectiveness of the ergonomic program. VI. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 41 Section 12 ELECTRICAL SAFETY I. Purpose The purpose of this section is to protect employees, contractors, and sub-contractors from injury associated with electrical hazards in the workplace. Compliance with this section will ensure that the company achieves a consistent standard of care as it relates to electrical safety. II. Scope The program applies to all employees who work on or near electrical hazards in the workplace. All workers must comply with OSHA, NFPA 70E, and other regulatory standards. III. Definitions A. Electrical Hazard. A dangerous condition such that contact or equipment failure can result in electric shock, flash burn, thermal burn, or blast. B. Flash Hazard Analysis. A study investigating a worker’s potential exposure to arc flash energy, conducted for injury prevention and the determination of safe work practices and the appropriate levels of PPE. C. Flash Protection Boundary. An approach limit at a distance from exposed live parts within which an employee could receive a second-degree burn if an electrical arc flash were to occur. D. PPE. Personal Protective Equipment. E. Qualified Employee. An employee trained on and knowledgeable of the electrical equipment to be evaluated, safe methods of using test equipment, and in the recognition of electrical hazards that might be present with respect to that equipment and the voltage involved. These are the only employees allowed to enter a flash protection boundary after approved by a manager. IV. Responsibilities A. Managers: a. Implementation of and adherence to the program. b. Providing and make available appropriate PPE to employees. c. Providing appropriate and approved electrical testing equipment. d. Ensure that PPE and electrical testing equipment are properly tested and in good condition. e. Ensure employees are trained on electrical hazards, the safe use of field testing equipment and the use, care and cleaning of PPE. B. Safety Department: a. Maintain records of training and electrical field testing equipment and PPE supplied. b. Ensure defective or damaged equipment is immediately removed from service. c. Conduct walk-thru inspections to ensure labeling and other regulatory requirements are met. d. Ensure appropriate assistance is provided to employees where questions or concerns arise regarding inspection situations. 42 C. Employees: a. Attend electrical safe work practices training. b. Know how to determine the nature and extent of the potential electrical hazard. c. Be familiar with appropriate PPE and safe approach distances. d. Be familiar with the use and hazard of appropriate electrical test equipment. V. Procedures A. General 1. Safety-related work practices will be used to safeguard employees from injury while working on or near exposed electrical conductors or circuit parts that are on or can become energized. The specific safety-related work practice shall be consistent with the nature and extent of associated electrical hazards. 2. The nature and extent of the electrical hazard shall be determined, including any flash hazard, prior to proceeding with any work. 3. Only qualified, approved, and properly equipped employees or contractors will be permitted within the flash protection boundary of energized electrical equipment. 4. Unqualified employees will not be permitted to enter the flash protection boundary unless the electrical conductors and equipment involved are in an electrically safe work condition (i.e. LOTO, de-energized, etc.). B. Specific 1. Laramie will select approved and qualified electrical contractors to perform most tasks including construction, maintenance and troubleshooting. The contracting company will be responsible for providing workers, PPE and equipment appropriate to the job and that meet all industry standards. 2. Live parts to which an employee or contractor may be exposed shall be de-energized before work can begin on or near them, unless it can be demonstrated that de-energizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is infeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations. If it is necessary to work live (greater than 50V to ground), an arc flash hazard calculation shall be conducted. 3. Protective measures will be implemented. Examples of this include, but is not limited to: selection of proper PPE, guarding of all live parts 50V or greater, ground and bonding of electrical equipment, distance requirements from live overhead lines, precautions to ensure electrical equipment/systems are de-energized and the use of electric tools for the intended design/rating. 4. A Job Safety Analysis will be conducted for any non-routine work that may expose workers to the hazards of electrical energy and include the required measures to mitigate the identified hazards. VI. Training 43 A. Qualified workers. Qualified Workers will receive the necessary training on and be knowledgeable of: a. Electrical tasks they are qualified to perform; b. Electrical hazard assessment results and permits if required; c. Determination of PPE selection for tasks being performed; d. Safe work practices to be used for each task; e. Determination of minimum approach distances from energized equipment; f. Determination of safe stand-off distances from energized overhead power lines; g. Assess intended use of electrical testing equipment and verify proper testing range. B. Unqualified workers. Unqualified Workers will receive the necessary training on and understand: a. How to identify electrical hazards in the workplace; b. Electrical warning sign identification and meaning in the workplace; c. Limitations of their training and allowances. C. Qualified and Unqualified workers will receive additional training on this program when there is reason to believe that electrical safety-related work practices were not followed. VII. Recordkeeping A. Written records will include the source of the training, the employees trained, a description of the training provided, and the dates that the training occurred. B. All training records will be maintained in the safety department. VIII. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 44 Section 13 HYDROGEN SULFIDE I. Purpose The purpose of the Hydrogen Sulfide program is to provide guidance to Laramie Energy employees and contractors for safe work around facilities with varying levels of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) and to ensure that information about the dangers of this toxic gas are known by all affected personnel, and to ensure that proper controls are in place to mitigate the hazards associated with H2S. II. Scope H2S is a flammable, acidic, and toxic gas that is present at many petroleum exploration and production sites as a component of crude oil, natural gas, produced water, and condensate. This program provides an awareness of the protective measures that are required when working around H2S as well as the physical properties, symptoms of exposure, and associated hazards. Laramie expects all personnel accessing a site where the potential for H2S exposure exists to be aware of the properties and hazards associated with H2S gas. III. Definitions Ceiling - A ceiling is an exposure limit that is not to be exceeded at any time during a workday. Exposure is typically monitored using a direct-reading devise with an alarm to give an instant indication. Exposure limit - An exposure limit is the maximum permitted employee and contractor exposure level in company workplaces for the time period listed. Four types of exposure limits exist based on potential exposure time. They are as follows: Exposure type Exposure time Exposure Limit (ppmv) Ceiling Instant 15 TWA 8 8 hours 10 TW10 10 hours 7 TW12 12 hours 5 45 Time-Weighted Average - Airborne concentration of a substance as an average over a specified time period, which is generally given after the acronym (e.g., in TWA8, the specified time is 8 hours). Immediately Dangerous Any atmosphere where the concentration of oxygen, flammable, To Life or Health (IDLH) - or toxic air contaminants would cause a person without respirator protection to be fatally injured or cause irreversible and incapacitating effects to that person’s health. IV. Responsibilities A. Safety department is responsible for developing, communicating, evaluating, maintaining, and improving this program. They will also be responsible for making the program available to employees and contractors when needed and providing appropriate training materials and system tools. B. Managers are responsible for implementing this practice, making aware when changes or updates to the program are needed and, ensuring that all personnel under their authority, inclusive of contractor personnel, are adequately trained and knowledgeable in the fundamentals of the H2S program to a level reflective of their individual responsibility within the program. C. Employees and contractors are responsible for following the H2S program and incorporating its requirements into all associated work. V. Procedures A. Associated Hazards a. Iron sulfide (FeS) – A pyrophoric material that is the byproduct of H2S reacting with carbon steel, such as in a pipeline or equipment. Typically, this material is a gray powder, but may be attached to rust particles making it difficult to distinguish from rust or other gas pipeline material. It will self-ignite when dried and exposed to air. Control measures include continually wetting it or covering it with another material, such as soil or lime, so as to separate it from the air. b. Sulfur dioxide (SO2) – A gas that results from the combustion of H2S. This material is almost always present at the tip of an active flare particularly in sour gas areas. It distributes readily in air such that if it is released from an elevated area, it will rarely sink to ground level. SO2 gas reacts with mucus membranes of the eyes and nose to form sulfuric acid. The resulting irritation rarely enables an individual to remain exposed to the gas for a significant period of time. The ACGIH short-term exposure limit (STEL) for SO2 is 0.25 ppm. The OSHA permissible exposure limit (PEL) is 5 ppm. 46 c. Carbon disulfide (CS2) – A yellow, sweet (or potentially very foul) smelling liquid sometimes found with condensate or other pipeline liquids. Typical routes of exposures are vapor inhalation and skin absorption. Overexposure may cause various neural effects – the material is also a reproductive toxin. The PEL of CS2 is 20 ppm. d. Internal pipeline or equipment corrosion – Condensed liquids (water) combined with H2S – contaminated gas in the presence of very little oxygen or carbon dioxide will result in severe corrosion to carbon steel over time and can lead to a containment failure. This corrosion type is characterized by pitting. e. Sulfide stress cracking (SSC) – The failure of steel caused by the simultaneous action of stress and hydrogen absorbed from corrosion by H2S in water. This failure will typically occur near welds or other potential areas of metal stress and will lead to a breach of containment. B. Identifying and testing H2S sources Identify and document all areas where greater than 10 ppm sources of H2S gas exists. Such areas must be listed by the maximum level of H2S in stream or vapor space, whichever is greater. Production facilities must be monitored following the addition of new well flow. H2S concentrations shall be determined for both liquid hydrocarbon oil and produced water tanks. H2S can be generated by biological activity. The potential is present in areas containing frac or flowback water (tanks, pits) or at water treatment facilities. These areas must be tested and documented as well. Risks of H2S generation by biological agents can be controlled by actively monitoring flowback water quality and by using biocides as the need indicates. Measure H2S using direct reading instruments, colorimetric tubes, or stream analysis. Retest areas with H2S concentrations greater than 50 ppm at least annually. Conduct the tests when the maximum H2S concentration would be expected, such as during the warmer months of the year. Follow confined space entry procedures when testing cellars, bellholes, or any other confined spaces. Areas where concentrations of H2S are known or suspected to exceed 10 ppm in the breathing zone or 100 ppm in the vapor space will need to comply with respiratory protection requirements. C. Warning signs and access control Included below are the minimum standards for H2S signage and access control. State and local jurisdictions may have different or more stringent requirements and should be referenced in conjunction with this program. 47 To warn both employees and the public of H2S hazard, install or provide signs or labels to be readable at a distance of 50 feet. The signs should read Caution Poison Gas at: • The normal access point to a facility in which process or production equipment contain greater than 100 ppm H2S. • On roads which provide direct access to any facility handling H2S gas with 100 ppm or greater concentration. In addition, • Signs reading Respiratory Protection Required Beyond this Point shall be included in areas where greater than 10 ppm measured in the breathing zone has been demonstrated to exist under normal maintenance or operations (such as tank gauging) and Wind socks or other suitable wind direction indicators will be provided at the following locations: • Plant sites where the 100 ppm radius of exposure is 50 feet or greater; • Tank batteries where concentrations of H2S exceeding 100 ppm are present in the vapor space of stock tanks; and, • Compressor facilities where concentrations of H2S exceeds 100 ppm in the gas stream. D. Respiratory protection All personnel assigned to work in operations where the workplace breathing zone concentrations of H2S have been demonstrated to exceed the occupational exposure limit (OEL) of 10 ppm shall have access to respiratory protection. Personnel shall be trained in the selection, use, inspection, and maintenance of equipment; must undergo a medical evaluation; and be fit tested. At a minimum, PPE will be: • Self-contained, positive pressure breathing equipment (SCBA) • Positive pressure, air-line breathing equipment with an auxiliary self-contained air supply (minimum 5 minute rated) for emergency egress use only. The use of respiratory equipment is mandatory in areas measuring 10 ppm H2S or greater in the breathing zone or when gauging or opening equipment containing 100 ppm H2S measured in the vapor space. Where H2S is likely to be present in compressors or piping, test the area before beginning work. This is particularly important when working below grade in pits, vaults, or excavations due to their heavier nature of H2S relative to other gases and the tendency of it to settle in low lying areas. When possible, residual gas containing H2S should be allowed to dissipate over time. 48 Emergency respiratory protection must be provided at manned locations where H2S in concentrations greater than 100 ppm is known to exist in the gas stream. Such protection may be provided in other situations and circumstances as determined by risk or the authority having jurisdiction (i.e. BLM). Emergency respirators must undergo a documented monthly inspection. Personnel who may be required to don respiratory protection in an emergency situation cannot have facial hair that interferes with the seal of the respirator mask. Well drilling operations occurring in or near a zone known to contain H2S may be subject to additional requirements. E. Monitoring and detection Personal monitoring refers to portable quantitative equipment that is worn within the breathing zone (i.e. within one foot of the face). Personal monitors are designed to provide fast and reliable warnings against hazardous concentrations of H2S. Such monitors must have an audible and vibrating alarms set at 10 ppm and a concentration readout on the unit. Personal H2S monitors shall be used in the following situations: • In areas of limited dilution ventilation where no fixed detection is provided and the concentration of H2S could exceed 10 ppm in the breathing zone. • During activities which may release H2S into the atmosphere in the immediate work area. If an alarm activates on a personal H2S monitor, workers shall evacuate in a direction that is perpendicular to that of the wind. When possible, work in known or suspected H2S areas should occur downwind of personnel. Fixed monitoring refers to quantitative detection or monitoring equipment that continuously measures the concentration of H2S in ambient air. The sensors are normally connected to a central controller and alarm system that is activated upon detection of an H2S concentration. Fixed monitoring may be installed under these conditions: • In the work area of a manned facility where there is a possibility for the accumulation of H2S in concentrations greater than 10 ppm. • In manned areas where the material contained in piping and equipment is of sufficient H2S concentration (gas treaters and other H2S processing equipment) that would result in large areas of potential employee exposures exceeding 10 ppm if a release occurred. • At a minimum, at all unmanned facilities where the 100 ppm radius of exposure is greater than 3,000 feet or includes a dwelling, public place, or public road (state and local regulations may have additional requirements) 49 If a high alarm activates, personnel shall immediately move upwind and crosswind from the area. If re-entry to the area is deemed necessary to investigate and correct the cause, personnel shall don respiratory protective equipment and monitor their personal H2S detector during re-entry. The worker shall not re-enter the area if the concentration exceeds 100 ppm until a second worker arrives. The stand-by worker, equipped with an SCBA, shall maintain audible or visual contact with the first worker and be prepared to perform rescue if required. When an alarm activates at an unmanned facility, personnel responsible for the facility shall be notified of the alarm condition. It shall be his or her responsibility to assess the situation and either control the source of the release or activate the Emergency Response Plan for the facility. F. Risk assessment and controls For sites where the potential for H2S to occur in production, storage, transportation, or processing, the risk of release shall be evaluated and controlled as determined through a risk assessment process. Risks may be addressed by using any of the following methods individually or in combination: Engineering Controls – automatic shutoff valves or equipment shutdowns actuated by fixed H2S monitors, fencing and site entry controls where H2S concentrations exceed 100 ppm, and automatic tank gauges Administrative Controls – signage and windsocks, training of appropriate personnel, Emergency Response Plans or H2S Contingency Plans, standard operating procedures Personal Protective Equipment – Personal H2S monitors with alarms, Supplied air respirators or SCBA. G. Well Drilling and Completions Where drilling and completions operations are in effect or planned to be, precautions must be taken to ensure operations are safe when working around H2S or the potential for H2S. Personnel must adhere to regulations including, but not limited to: a. COGCC Rule 607 b. BLM Onshore Order 6 c. API RP 49 (API conditions I, II, and III) H. Emergency Response In the event of an H2S release or high alarm, personnel must evacuate upwind and crosswind if possible and comply with existing escape routes if designated. Personnel should use appropriate escape equipment if available. VI. Training 50 A. Training shall occur upon initial assignment, when conditions change to the level that additional or refresher training is deemed necessary, or when a worker demonstrates that their lack of knowledge or understanding would indicate refresher training is needed. B. The H2S training agenda and content shall adhere to the requirements set forth in ANSI Z390.1: a. Hazards, characteristics and properties of H2S. b. Sources of H2S. c. Proper use of H2S detection methods used. d. Recognition of and proper response to warning signals for H2S release. e. Symptoms of H2S exposure. f. Emergency rescue response safety precautions. g. Wind direction awareness and routes of egress. h. Operation of respiratory equipment and practice in its use, including restrictions regarding facial hair. i. Basic first aid and CPR procedures as they relate to H2S exposures. j. Corrosion effects on metals. k. Contingency planning. C. Managers and supervisors responsible for operations with potential H2S exposure will have current H2S training. D. Contractors working in areas where H2S is present at greater than 10 ppm shall provide current documentation of their employee H2S training and respirator fit testing and be advised of location safety and emergency procedures. E. If it can be avoided, visitors must stay away from H2S locations. But, if it cannot be avoided, at sites that have concentrations of 100 ppm or greater, they shall be accompanied by a trained employee with an H2S monitor and be briefed on: a. Site specific sources of H2S b. Routes of egress and muster points in case of alarm c. Alarm signals and meaning d. Hazards and health effects of H2S VII. Recordkeeping A. Site H2S measurement results will be kept by the company and distributed as necessary. B. Employee respiratory protection training and fit testing documentation shall be maintained by the company. Medical evaluations will be kept in compliance with local, state and federal standards. 51 VIII. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 52 Section 14 EXCAVATION/GROUND DISTURBANCE EXCAVATION/GROUND DISTURBANCE I. Purpose II. Scope III. Definitions IV. Responsibilities V. Procedures a. Requirements b. Inspections c. Access and Egress d. Air monitoring e. Falling objects f. Protective systems g. Entry VI. Training VII. Recordkeeping VIII. Revision History IX. Supporting Documents (authorization form) Excavations Prior to beginning any excavation activity, the Employee shall locate subsurface pipelines or other buried utilities that may cross any proposed excavation or subsurface investigative activity using the state "One-Call" system(s). The Employee shall determine the exact location of buried facilities by hand digging the final 18" or by other safe method when excavation approaches the estimated location of a buried structure. The Employee shall ensure that exposed underground facilities are properly supported and protected. The PM shall ensure that a person the company deems competent to oversee, to monitor, and to inspect an excavation site, is on-site whenever work is occurring in an excavation. This person shall be trained and certified as specified by the OSHA standard per 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P. OSHA sloping or shoring rules shall be strictly followed as specified in 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P. Such competent person shall inspect excavations, the adjacent areas and protective shoring systems (or benching) for evidence of possible cave-ins, failures, hazardous atmospheres or other hazardous conditions. Employees exposed to a hazardous condition shall be removed from the area until necessary precautions have been taken. The Competent Person must conduct inspections: • Each day, prior to the start of work; • As needed throughout the shift; and • After a change in weather conditions (i.e., rainstorm, snow, etc.) or other event that could pose a hazard. 53 The Employee shall obtain ladders or sloped walkways for safe entrance and exit for personnel working in trenches or excavations four (4) feet or more in depth. The Employee shall provide emergency exits within 25 feet laterally from any point where personnel are working in a trench. No person will be permitted to work in excavations while excavation or other heavy equipment is being operated nearby. All materials and equipment must be kept at least two (2) feet from the excavation to protect Employees from the hazard of material and/or equipment falling or rolling into the excavation. 54 Section 15 HOT WORK I. Purpose This section provides a summary of Laramie Energy’s Hot Work Permit program. It applies to employees and contractors at all facilities owned and operated by Laramie Energy. All hot work will be conducted in accordance with this Hot Work program. II. Scope The purpose of this section is to ensure employees and contractors safely manage hazards involved with hot work. This section complies with all regulatory requirements including 29CFR 1910.252(a). This will: • Cover welding, cutting, brazing, burning, grinding or other forms of hot work that can produce a spark or flame in an area or on equipment, which contains or has the potential to contain flammable or hazardous materials; • Create and maintain a safe work environment for any work that may create an ignition source in a potentially hazardous work environment; • Set minimum standards for hot work that must be supplemented with separate procedures at the site as required by local conditions or special situations; • Prevent the accidental ignition of explosive, flammable, or combustible materials by ensuring that flammable or combustible materials are absent, isolated, protected, or removed from the work areas within which any type of hot work will be conducted; • Prevent unnecessary exposure of personnel to the potential hazards associated with hot work, thereby mitigating the risk of potential injury or damage to the assets; and • Define an Authorized Permit Writer, describe their role and responsibilities, and recognize requirement of an authorized contractor performing the work to also sign the permit. This program requires that all Hot Work Permits be signed by an authorized Laramie Energy representative and an authorized contractor representative. III. Definitions Hazardous location A location or area where fire or explosion hazards may exist due to the presence of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers or flyings. Hot Work A work activity or operation that can produce enough heat from flame, sparks, or other sources of ignition with sufficient energy to cause the ignition of fires or explosions from flammable vapors, gases, liquids, or dust. This will include but is not limited to: 55 • Welding, cutting, grinding, brazing, burning, soldering, heating, drilling, riveting, air gouging, chipping and all open flames; • Use of any AC or DC powered tool or electrical equipment that is not intrinsically safe; and • Introducing internal combustion engines/sources within a potentially hazardous area. Hot Work Permit Area Areas that are near any potential hydrocarbon or flammable vapor or liquid source (e.g. wellheads, process vessels, storage tanks or bullets, vents, PSVs and drains) and combustible materials. Authorized Permit Writer An employee or person working under contract to Laramie Energy who: • Has been designated by management and is trained and competent to perform the hot work writing and • Is directed by Laramie Energy to oversee contractors on Laramie Energy locations. IV. Responsibilities Managers Responsible for implementation of program, providing adequate resources to support this program, and approving, in writing, any hot work to be conducted in areas where the measured LEL cannot be mitigated to less than 10%. Safety Staff Responsible for implementing program, providing training and resources for program, and reviewing permits upon completion. Authorized Permit Writer Responsibilities include: • Ensure that atmospheric testing is conducted as required on the Hot Work Permit (continuous or intermittent). • Inspect the job site and ensure that compliance requirements on Hot Work Permit are met. • Provide appropriate isolation methods as indicated on the permit (lock out/tag out, etc.). • Ensure barriers cover or seal all openings in floors (e.g. drains and sewers), walls or ducts within 35 feet of work as required. • Ensure fireproof welding blanket, curtain, pads, water fog or other protection necessary to contain ignition sources from combustible or 56 flammable materials and nearby equipment is available and utilized as required. • Ensure proper ventilation, as required. • Ensure fire watch personnel are trained and properly equipped. • Conduct a JSA with all involved personnel including Laramie Energy employees and contractors working in the area or that may be affected by the hot work. • Inspect the work site and adjacent area 30 minutes after the work is completed (one hour in Colorado). • Ensure a copy of the Hot Work Permit is turned into Safety Department for review and filing. Ensure the hot work has been completed and the area is returned to routine operations. • Review the Hot Work Permit with operations personnel, pumper, lead or manager. • Stop any operations that may conflict with the permitted work. Instruct all personnel to stop work if a change occurs that may create a hazardous or unsafe condition. • Verify within 35 feet of work: floors have been swept clean, combustible floors kept wet, combustible materials relocated or protected, combustible or explosive atmospheres have been eliminated. • Make sure the Hot Work Permit has been filled out completely. • Obtain proper signatures on permit including those performing the work and the fire watch, as required. • Issue the Hot Work Permit only after all site preparation has been completed, relevant personnel have been notified and the permit is signed by both Laramie representative and contractor representative. • Conduct follow-up testing as required and after any interruptions or breaks of more than one hour. • Remain at the work site until the first arc, spark or ignition source is created. • Ability to transfer authority to another Authorized Permit Writer. Fire Watch The fire watch shall be required during welding, cutting, brazing, grinding and other flame-producing activities. Fire watch personnel must be properly trained on the Hot Work program and on the use of fire extinguishing equipment. Fire watch responsibilities include: • Have the fire extinguishing equipment readily available (minimum 20-lb of Type ABC). This does not include site fire protection equipment. • Attempt to extinguish fires within the obvious capacity of the equipment; otherwise, sound the alarm. 57 • Assess conditions during the hot work and for at least 30 minutes after completion of the work (one hour in Colorado). • Stop work if sparks, flame, slag or heat moves beyond the permitted area. • Alert any personnel entering the permitted area of existing hazards. • Be properly trained in Emergency Response Plans and Procedures. V. Procedures a. Preliminary Requirements. Every hot work job has unique hazards. All precautions must be made to provide a safe work environment prior to commencing work. Before beginning any hot work, the following situations and requirements must be considered: • A Job Safety Analysis (JSA) is required to be completed before issuing a Hot Work Permit and communicating the job scope to all affected personnel. The contractor performing the hot work may use their JSA to communicate these hazards. • Local government restrictions may supersede this practice (e.g. fire restrictions or burn bans). • Special precautions must be taken to avoid accidental operation of automatic fire detection/suppression systems and fire eyes. • Fire prevention and protection for the Hot Work Permit requires that a minimum of at least one 20-lb dry chemical fire extinguisher shall be available in the immediate area during welding or cutting operations. This fire extinguisher is in addition to the general fire protection equipment on site. In addition, one should consider first protecting combustibles from ignition before commencing hot work or requiring a Hot Work Permit by: • Considering alternative methods to the hot work (where practical); • Moving the work to a location that is free from combustibles; • If the work cannot be moved, moving the combustibles to a safe distance or having the combustibles properly shielded or protected against ignition; or • Scheduling hot work so that operations that could expose combustibles to ignition are not started. b. Conditions Restricting Work. Hot work will not be permitted in the following situations: • In confined spaces without following the requirements of the Confined Space Program; • In the presence of an explosive atmosphere; • In areas near storage of large quantities of exposed, readily ignitable materials; • Where ignition can be caused by heat conduction; or • On used containers, such as drums and tanks, unless properly cleaned. 58 • When work is not started within one hour or the hot work is delayed or suspended for more than one hour, a retest of the LEL and oxygen is required. The permit may be voided and a new one issued in this case at the Authorized Permit Writer’s discretion. c. Requirements. The three primary types of hot work may or may not require a Hot Work Permit as discussed in the following sections. 1. Cutting, welding, grinding, brazing, and open flames. These are the most critical hot work activities that have a potential for creating a fire or explosion. A Hot Work Permit and a Fire Watch shall be required when: • Combustible or flammable materials are closer than 35 feet or further if conditions warrant; • Combustible or flammable materials are more than 35 feet away but are easily ignited by sparks; • Wall or floor openings within 35 feet of exposed combustible material in adjacent areas (e.g. concealed spaces in walls or floors). • Combustible or flammable materials are adjacent to the opposite side of partitions, walls, ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited; and • When welding or cutting is performed on locations where a fire might develop. 2. Non-intrinsically safe/electrical equipment. Fixed or portable (non-intrinsically safe) non-classified electrical equipment should be used at a safe distance. Where flammable gas vapor may be present, atmospheric testing is required. In this case, atmospheric testing may be done without the use of a Hot Work Permit if a risk assessment has been completed and standard operating procedures are used. A fire watch is not required in these situations. 3. Combustion engines and external sources. Combustion engines that are temporarily positioned in areas where flammable gas vapor may be present require atmospheric testing and may require a Hot Work Permit. Individuals must document atmospheric testing results. Internal combustion engines including vehicles that operate within 10 feet of a classified area shall require notification to Laramie employee or designee, but not a permit: transit, snow removal, routine well servicing, delivery of parts and materials, and manned well servicing operations such as coiled tubing units, slickline units, boom cranes, etc. Other vehicle usage situations may require a risk assessment or other means to ensure safe usage of the vehicle within a classified area or hot work permit area. External combustion sources, such as temporary heaters and flares, also may introduce hazards related to contact with open flames. For external combustion sources where a flammable gas vapor may be present, atmospheric testing is required and a Hot Work 59 Permit may be required. The atmospheric testing results must be documented. A fire watch is not required in this situation. d. Permitting. A JSA must be completed and a Hot Work Permit shall be obtained before starting any work that may involve a source of ignition and is within 50 feet of a potential hydrocarbon or flammable vapor, liquid source, or combustible materials. The permit shall be in writing and should include the following: • The fire prevention/protection requirements and special precautions that must be implemented before commencing the hot work; • The type of work (welding, grinding, electric tools, etc.), the object on which the hot work is to be performed, and the date and permit expiration; • The person initiating the Hot Work Permit, who must be designated and trained and must be an Authorized Permit Writer. • Atmospheric testing for lower explosive limit (LEL) and oxygen monitoring including if monitoring was intermittent or continuous; • Fire Watch requirements; • Personal Protective Equipment requirements; • Isolation requirements and methods where applicable (e.g. purging, blinding, double block & bleed, energy isolation, flushing, and ventilation); and • Signatures by both the Laramie Energy representative and the contracting company’s representative. The following are also required for hot work permitting: • The Hot Work Permit is to be issued at the physical job site where the work is to be performed. • Hot Work Permits are approved for only one shift (12 hours maximum). A new permit must be issued for a new shift. • All affected personnel shall be notified of the Hot Work. • A change in conditions making continuation of the hot work hazardous voids the permit (STOP WORK) and a new permit must be issued. • A change in the make-up of the crew performing the hot work (welder, fire watch, helpers, etc. who are directly involved in the hot work) requires that the new member of the hot work team be properly oriented on the aspects of the hot work process. A JSA must be reviewed/completed by this person before commencing the hot work. The new member will also sign the hot work permit. e. Atmospheric testing during hot work. Atmospheric testing shall be conducted for any Hot Work. Monitoring for toxic substances should be based on the information from the JSA. In addition, the following must be completed for atmospheric testing: 60 • Atmospheric gas testing shall be conducted in the presence of the work group. • Continuous and intermittent atmospheric monitoring for LEL and oxygen may be required as deemed necessary by the Authorized Permit Writer and will be indicated on the Hot Work Permit. • If the LEL consistently reads 10 percent or higher, hot work must stop and the source of flammable atmosphere identified and eliminated or controlled before work resumes. If the LEL cannot be mitigated below 10 percent, an attachment to the Hot Work Permit will be written that details procedures for controlling the ignition source. The procedures shall be approved in writing by the manager responsible for the work. • Oxygen tests results must be between 19.5 and 23.5 percent. • It is the permit issuer’s responsibility to ensure the gas detection equipment being used is appropriate and calibrated before use. • Fixed gas detection shall not be used for the gas checks or continuous monitoring. VI. Training Awareness level, Fire Watch and Authorized Permit Writer training will be conducted as applicable for all personnel whose work assignments may involve hot work and may include the following topics: • Fire extinguisher operation, • Hot work program and permit, • Fire protection, • Atmospheric gas monitor operation, maintenance and calibration, • Emergency Response Plans and Procedures, • Job Safety Analysis, • Lockout/Tagout and hazardous energy isolation, • Hazardous communication (SDS), • Hydrogen Sulfide awareness, and • Confined space (applicable to the job). Refresher training will be provided whenever ignition or flammable hazards in the workplace change significantly or an evaluation of the program reveals inadequacies in the worker’s knowledge of the program. VII. Recordkeeping The Hot Work Permit must be kept on location for the duration of the hot work activity. Completed Hot Work Permits will be kept on file with the safety department. A sample of these permits will be kept for 12 consecutive months for program review. VIII. Revision History 61 The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: IX. Appendix a. Hot Work Permit b. Hot Work Permit guide 62 Section 16 FORKLIFT/INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS FORKLIFT/INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS I. Purpose II. Scope III. Definitions IV. Responsibilities V. Procedures VI. Training VII. Recordkeeping VIII. Revision History IX. Appendices (pre-trip checklist) Industrial Trucks and Heavy Equipment The most common type of heavy equipment used by Laramie Energy is for road or well pad construction and maintenance activities or for over the road hauling. While earth-moving and over-the-road trucks are excluded from the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.178, all types of heavy equipment that are covered by these regulations must comply. In general, Laramie Energy requires that all personnel and contractors who operate equipment must be properly trained and have the required certification/license to operate heavy equipment including: industrial trucks, skid loaders, bulldozers, back hoes, forklifts, dump trucks, front-end loaders, motor graders, or cranes. All heavy equipment must have a warning horn, whistle, gong, or other device which can be clearly heard above the normal noise in the area where operated. Before using these vehicles, check that the brakes on each industrial truck are capable of bringing the vehicle to a complete and safe stop when fully loaded. The parking brake must effectively prevent the vehicle from moving when unattended. 63 Section 17 POWER AND HAND TOOLS POWER AND HAND TOOLS I. Purpose II. Scope III. Definitions IV. Responsibilities V. Procedures a. OSHA and NEC compliance b. Maintenance c. Safety shut offs d. Guards e. Cords/GFCI VI. Training VII. Revision History Tool Maintenance Faulty or improperly used hand tools are a safety hazard. All workers shall be responsible for ensuring that tools and equipment (both company and operator-owned) used by them or other workers at their workplace are in good condition and properly maintained as required by 29 CFR 1910.242. Hand tools must be reconditioned or replaced as necessary. Broken or fractured handles on hammers, shovels, axes and similar equipment must be replaced promptly. Appropriate handles must be used on files and similar tools. Appropriate safety glasses, face shields, etc., must be worn while using hand tools or equipment which might produce flying materials or be subject to breakage. Check your tools often for wear or defects. Jacks must be checked periodically to assure they are in good operating condition. Tool handles must be wedged tightly into the heads of tools. Tool cutting edges should be kept sharp enough so the tool will move smoothly without binding or skipping. When not in use, tools should be stored in a dry, secure location. Machine and Power Tools Personnel operating power equipment must be trained on safe methods of machine or power tool operations before operating any machine or power tool. It is the primary purpose of supervision to ensure that workers are following safe machine or power tool operating procedures. All machinery and equipment and power tools must be kept clean and properly maintained. There must be sufficient clearance provided around and between machines or power tools to allow for safe operations, set up, servicing, material handling, and waste removal. There must be a power shut-off switch within reach of the operator's position at each machine or power tool. Electrical power to each machine or power tool shall be capable of being locked out for maintenance, repair, or security. The non-current carrying metal parts of electrically operated tools must be grounded. All manually operated valves and switches controlling the operation of equipment and machines must be clearly identified and readily accessible. Portable Power Tools Portable power tools pose a special danger to workers because they are small and light, yet they can do great bodily harm if used improperly or poorly maintained. These rules apply to all power tools, but are 64 especially important when handling portable saws, drills, and power screwdrivers. Check your equipment before you use it. All grinders, saws, and similar equipment should be equipped with appropriate safety guards as provided in 29 CFR 1910.215. Power tools should not be used without the correct shield, guard, or attachment, recommended by the manufacturer. Portable circular saws must be equipped with guards above and below the base shoe. Circular saw guards should be checked periodically and before each use to assure they are not wedged up, thus leaving the lower portion of the blade unguarded. All rotating or moving parts of equipment should be guarded to prevent physical contact. All cord-connected, electrically operated tools and equipment should be effectively grounded or of the approved double insulated type. Effective guards must be in place over belts, pulleys, chains, sprockets, on equipment such as concrete mixers, air compressors, etc. If portable fans are provided, they must be equipped with full guards or screens having openings 1/2 inch or less. Do not attempt to lift heavy objects without proper equipment. Hoisting equipment will be made available for lifting heavy objects, with hoist ratings and characteristics appropriate for the task. Power tools are either battery- operated or wired. If battery operated, don't under-estimate their power. A small electric drill or power screwdriver can cause a severe injury if it lands in the wrong place. While not usually a shock hazard, the battery pack contains toxic chemicals and does emit a low voltage electric current. Don't drop or incinerate the battery pack, or a tool with a self-contained power source. Hard-wired equipment can be portable or fixed. Typically used with extension cords, the more powerful hard-wired equipment presents a double safety problem: the actual equipment plus its electrical power source. Ground-fault circuit interrupters must be provided on all temporary electrical 15 and 20 ampere circuits used during periods of construction. Pneumatic and hydraulic hoses on power-operated tools should be checked regularly for deterioration or damage. All power tools shall be used in compliance with appropriate NEC codes. 65 Section 18 MACHINE GUARDING I. Purpose The purpose of this section is to provide guidance on the minimum safety requirements related to machine safeguards which are used to protect employees when the operation of machines/equipment or accidental contact with it could cause an injury. II. Scope The program applies to all Laramie employees and contractors who work in areas where potential exposures to any machine where parts, functions, or processes may cause an injury. III. Definitions Device. A press control or attachment that restrains the operator from inadvertently reaching into the point of operation. Enclosure. Guarding by fixed physical barriers that are either mounted on or around the moving parts of the machine/equipment. Fencing. A locked fence or rail enclosure that restricts access to the machine, except by authorized personnel. The dangerous operation of the machinery must be at least 42 inches away from the fencing. Guard. A barrier (fixed or movable) that prevents contact with moving parts. Guards are more protective and are preferred over devices. Hazards. A source of potential harm or damage, or a situation with potential for harm or damage. In-going Nip Points. Two or more mechanical components rotating in opposite directions in the same plane and in close conjunction or interaction. Pinch Point. Any place where a body part can be caught between two or more moving parts. Point-of-operation. The point at which cutting, shaping, boring, forming, or processing is accomplished on or within the equipment. IV. Responsibilities A. Safety Department a. Ensure that program and associated documentation is completed and maintained. 66 b. Develops training materials and trains employees on the topics required by this program. c. Reviews the effectiveness of the program to make sure it satisfies the requirements of all applicable federal, state, or local requirements. d. Assists with or completes assessments and inspections, when required. B. Field Supervisors a. Ensures workers follow safe work practices when working with or near machines. b. Ensures workers do not remove or operate machines without machine guards in-place. c. Ensures safe operating and maintenance procedures are current and are followed by workers. C. Employees and Contractors a. Operate machines with all safeguards in place and follow all applicable safety requirements (e.g., lockout/tagout) b. Understand hazards related to machines being worked with and proper safeguarding methods. c. Participates in all required training. V. General Requirements and Procedures A. Guards must be placed on machines to protect the operator(s) and other workers in the area from hazards such as those created by the point of operation, in-going nip points, rotating parts, moving belts, cutting teeth, flying chips/sparks, and any other parts that impact or shear. B. Safeguards must prevent contact, be secure, protect workers from falling objects, create no new hazards, create no interference, and allow for safe lubrication of equipment. C. Safeguarding methods: a. Guards – prevents entry i. Fixed – a barrier or enclosure that permits material to enter into the operation zone, but not the operator’s body or body parts. Fixed guards are not dependent upon moving parts to perform its intended function. ii. Interlocked – When guard is opened or removed, the tripping mechanism and/or power automatically shuts off or disengages, and the equipment cannot operate until the guard is back in place. iii. Adjustable – protects the operator by placing a barrier between dangerous areas and the operator. iv. Self-adjusting – the guard is automatic, and the opening is determined by the movement of parts of the equipment. b. Device – controls entry (may be used to replace or as supplement to guard) 67 i. Gate – a moveable barrier that protects the operator at the point of operation before the equipment can be started. ii. Presence sensing device – equipment is either stopped or the cycle will not start, if a hand or any part of the body is inadvertently placed into a dangerous area. iii. Safety trip controls – a quick means for deactivating the equipment in an emergency situation. iv. Two hand control/trip – prevent operator from reaching into the point of operation by requiring concurrent pressure of operator’s control buttons to activate the equipment. c. Additional Methods i. When guards or devices cannot be used, there are additional methods that can be used such as fencing, safe distance, safe opening, and safe position of controls. ii. These additional methods do not provide the same level of protection of guards or devices. They depend on specific procedures, work rules, training, and/or supervision to prevent entry into dangerous areas. VI. Equipment Maintenance A. All equipment must be properly maintained per the manufacturer’s and/or the equipment owner’s requirements. B. All Laramie employees and contractors shall follow lockout/tagout procedures for shutting down equipment prior to removing any safeguards or accessing any equipment where he/she could be exposed to hazardous moving parts. C. If maintenance requires testing or adjustment of equipment with it’s safeguards removed, equipment specific procedures should be developed and followed for performing the task(s) safely. D. After maintenance is complete, replace safeguards before equipment restart. VII. Training A. Employees who work with or may be exposed to machines/equipment which require safeguarding will receive classroom training to ensure he/she is familiar with safeguarding methods and hazards. B. Employees who work with specific equipment will receive on-the-job training for that equipment. C. Classroom training records will be maintained by the safety department. 68 VIII. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 69 Section 19 FIRE PREVENTION I. Purpose This section is to assist in the prevention of fire and explosions on Laramie worksites. II. Scope The purpose of this section is to establish safe work requirements for preventing fires and explosions and protecting workers if a fire or explosion occurs. These safe work requirements include identifying and controlling hazards and instituting fire protection requirements. III. Definitions Bonding – The act of causing two metallic conductive elements to be at the same voltage level (not necessarily the same voltage as earth). Combustible liquids – Any liquid having a flash point at or above 100° F. Combustible liquids shall be divided into two classes: Class II liquids shall include those with flash points at or above 100° F and below 140° F, except any mixture having components with flash points of 200° F or higher, the volume of which makes up 99% or more of the total volume of the mixture (e.g., diesel). Class III liquids shall include those with flash points at or above 140° F. Class III liquids are subdivided into two subclasses: Class IIIA liquids, which include liquids with flash points at or above 140° F and below 200° F, except any mixture having components with flash points of 200° F or higher, the total volume of which makes up 99% or more of the total volume of the mixture (e.g. phenol). Class IIIB liquids, which include liquids with flash points at or above 200° F (e.g., motor oil). When a combustible liquid is heated to within 30° F of its flash point, it shall be handled in accordance with the requirements for the next lower class of liquids. Combustible solids – Combustible solids include oil-soaked rags, trash, grasses, paper, wood, etc. Explosion – A rapid increase in volume and violent release of energy resulting from a rapid chemical reaction, usually resulting in the release of high temperatures and gases. Fire – A rapid, persistent chemical change that releases heat and light and is accompanied by flame, especially the exothermic oxidation of a combustible substance. 70 Fire classification – Classes of fires are listed: Class “A” fire - involves ordinary combustible materials such as paper, wood, cloth, and some rubber and plastic materials. Class “B” fire - involves flammable or combustible liquids, flammable gases, greases, and similar materials, and some rubber and plastic materials. Class “C” fire – involves energized electrical equipment where safety to the employee requires the use of electrically nonconductive extinguishing media. Class “D” fire – involves combustible metals such as magnesium, titanium, zirconium, sodium, lithium and potassium. Flammable liquid – Any liquid having a flash point below 100° F, except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 100° F or higher, the total of which make up 99% or more of the total volume of the mixture. Flammable liquids shall be known as Class I liquids. Class I liquids are listed below: Class IA shall include liquids having flash points below 73° F and having a boiling point below 100° F. (e.g., ethyl ether). Class IB shall include liquids having flash points below 73° F and having a boiling point at or above 100° F. (e.g., methanol and gasoline). Class IC shall include liquids having flash points at or above 73° F and below 100° F (e.g., propyl alcohol). Flash point is the basis for classification of flammable and combustible liquids because it is directly related to a liquid’s ability to generate vapor, i.e. it’s volatility. Since it is the vapor of the liquid, not the liquid itself that burns, vapor generation becomes the primary factor in determining a fire hazard. Grounding – The act of causing a metallic conductive element to be at the same voltage level as earth. Hazardous location – A location where concentrations of flammable gases, vapors, or dusts occur. Electrical installations at such locations shall be specifically designed and tested to ensure it does not initiate an explosion, due to arcing contacts or high surface temperature of equipment. Ignition source – Any process or event capable of causing a fire or explosion. Open flames, sparks, static electricity, and hot surfaces are all possible ignition sources. Incipient stage fire – A fire which is in the initial or beginning stage and which can be controlled or extinguished by portable fire extinguishers, Class II standpipe or small hose systems without the need for protective clothing or breathing apparatus. 71 Portable tank – A closed container having a liquid capacity over 60 US gallons and not intended for fixed installation. Safety can – An approved container of not more than 5-gallon capacity having a spring-closing lid and spout cover, and so designed that it will safely relieve internal pressure when subjected to fire exposure. IV. Responsibilities A. Responsible managers will ensure: a. Development, implementation, communication, evaluation, maintenance and improving this section and making it available to workers. b. Training and materials are provided as necessary to applicable workers. B. Employees are responsible for: a. Adhering to the requirements of this section. b. Following proper equipment lighting procedures. c. Identifying and managing ignition source controls, fire protection requirements and signage. d. Maintaining and properly using personal gas monitors, portable fire extinguishers, fixed fire suppression systems, containers and portable tanks, storage cabinets, etc. e. Following proper maintenance, inspection and testing schedules and duties. C. Contractors are responsible for: a. Adhering to the requirements of this section at Laramie sites. b. Identifying fire and explosion hazards through JSAs, SOPs, MOCs, and/or safety permits. c. Conducting work in accordance with appropriate SOPs and any site safety permits. d. Controlling fuel and ignition sources in accordance with regulations or requirements. e. Providing properly selected, inspected, and maintained fire extinguishers in accordance with site and job requirements. V. Procedures A. Gas Detection Systems – Gas detection systems are used to monitor the air for oxygen levels, hydrogen sulfide (H2S), LEL, and carbon monoxide (CO). Many of these gases are monitored to detect health hazards, however; these measurements also indicate the presence of fire and explosion hazards such as LEL. Gas detection systems can be fixed systems, built into a facility, or personal gas detection monitors which are worn as monitors on a person. Requirements for these two types of gas detection systems are given below. 72 1. Fixed gas detection and suppression systems – A fire suppression system (i.e. automatic sprinkler system, deluge system and detection system) may be used where determined necessary. These systems must be properly maintained and tested for proper operation. Fixed gas detection must not be used in lieu of portable gas monitors for periodic or continuous gas monitoring requirements associated with a Hot Work Permit. 2. Personal gas detection – Personal gas detection refers to portable quantitative equipment that is used to detect various gases. Personal monitors are designed to provide fast and reliable warnings against flammable gases, dangerous oxygen concentrations and toxins. Personal monitors shall be used in the following situations: • When required by another section (Hydrogen Sulfide, Hot Work, Confined Space, etc.) • When working in an area where hydrocarbon or toxic gases may be present. • When lighting heaters, flares, burners or other fired equipment. • When working in enclosed areas where carbon monoxide may be present. • When working in areas where dangerous concentrations of oxygen may be present. • In areas where concentration of HsS could exceed 10 ppm in a breathing zone with limited dilution ventilation where no fixed detection is provided. • During activities which may release H2S into the atmosphere in the immediate work area. Monitor requirements: Personal monitors must have an audible and vibrating alarm and concentration readout on the unit. Alarms must be set at or below the PEL. All monitors must be intrinsically safe or explosion proof and must be calibrated, zeroed, bump-tested and maintained per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Direct gas readings should be analyzed and evaluated as per the manufacturer’s instrument operating instructions. B. Fire brigades – It is recommended that the use of local fire protection districts or fire departments be used for facility fire protection requirements for fire brigades. If one is determined to be needed on site, 29CFR 1910.156 requirements must be followed. C. Portable fire extinguishers – Fire extinguishers must be available for use at all Laramie facilities. They must be fully charged, inspected, and operational. They must remain in their designated location unless they are being used for emergency response, maintenance or servicing. 1. Selecting and locating fire extinguishers • The type of fire extinguisher must be selected based on the type of fuel source, such as combustible solids or flammable liquids. Maximum distances to a fire 73 extinguisher must follows regulations outlined in CFR 190.157(d). (Class A – 75 feet, Class B, C and D – 50 feet). • Determine the number of fire extinguishers required to protect property by considering: area and arrangement of buildings, severity of hazard, potential classes of fires, distances between extinguishers, etc.) • Mount portable fire extinguishers in plants, compressor stations, and offices as follows: in a conspicuous location, free from obstructions, with a maximum of five feet from the floor to the top of the extinguisher, with signage reading “fire extinguisher” to identify the location. • All field company vehicles must have a 20-lb. minimum fire extinguisher installed in a readily accessible location. 2. Inspecting fire extinguishers • Inspect all extinguishers monthly and annually. Extinguishers that do not pass inspection shall be repaired per the manufacturer’s recommendation or permanently taken out of service. Monthly fire extinguisher inspections for vehicles will be recorded on the Vehicle Inspection Form. Inspections for field locations will be recorded on the individual fire extinguisher tags. • All fire extinguishers shall be inspected annually by a qualified, approved inspector. This inspection will include the extinguisher’s shell, gauge, hose and nozzle, weighing and retagging. All service, maintenance or hydrostatic testing shall also be documented and retained. • Hydrostatic testing – if an extinguisher has severe corrosion, the shell is damaged or other detrimental conditions exist, the unit will be removed from service, discarded or hydrostatic tested to ensure that the shell is in good condition. Only personnel with proper testing equipment and knowledge shall test the extinguishers. All fire extinguishers will be hydrostatically tested at intervals listed in 29CFR 1910.157 Table L-1. D. Wildfire equipment – Wildfire equipment requirements are normally based on fire restrictions or bans in the working area and fall under local jurisdiction (BLM, Forest Service, county, etc.). Laramie employees will comply with any requirements or restrictions set forth. E. Signage – Fire prevention signs shall be posted in conspicuous locations and kept in good condition. F. Combustible solids – As a fuel source, non-essential combustible solids (oil soaked rags, trash, grasses, paper, vegetation, combustible waste materials, spent spill containment/absorbent wastes, and contaminated filters) shall be properly removed from the work area. When possible, select non-flammable or non-combustible materials as an alternative to reduce the fire and explosion hazard. G. Storage 74 1. Containers and portable tanks – Those used for flammable and combustible liquids must meet the following requirements: • Containers and tanks must remain closed when not in use. • The size and type of container and tank must meet storage requirements in compliance with 29CFR1910.106(d)(2)(iii) Table H-12 and NFPA 30 Table 9.4.3 • Each portable tank shall be provided with one or more devices installed in the top with sufficient emergency venting capacity to limit internal pressure under fire exposure conditions. • Non-conductive portable tanks (plastic or fiberglass) shall be equipped and configured to eliminate any static discharge that may occur during the handling of flammable liquids. 2. Storage cabinets – must meet the following requirements: • The quantity of liquids stored in cabinets shall not exceed 60 gallons of Class I or II or 120 gallons of Class III. • Shall be labeled “Flammable” • Shall meet design criteria listed in 29CFR1910.106(d)(3)(ii). • Water reactive materials (e.g., sulfuric acid) shall not be stored in the same area with flammable liquids. 3. Outdoor storage – must meet the following requirements: • Maximum of 1100 gallons of flammable liquids may be kept in containers or portable tanks adjacent to buildings. • For quantities over 1100 gallons, a minimum distance of 10 feet shall be maintained between buildings and the nearest container or portable tank. • Storage areas shall be graded to divert possible spills away from buildings or other exposures or shall be barricaded. • Drains shall terminate at a safe location and shall be accessible to operation under fire conditions. H. Handling – The following requirements shall be followed when flammable and combustible liquids are drawn from or transferred into containers or tanks: • The location of the liquid transfer shall be separated from ignition sources. • Ventilation (natural or mechanical) should be adequate to maintain LEL below 10% in the work zone. • Proper bonding and grounding practices shall be followed. • Inside buildings, flammable and combustible liquids may only be transferred: through a closed pipe system, from safety cans, by means of device drawing through the top, or by gravity through an approved self-closing valve. 75 • Mechanical equipment shall be cleaned with only fire-safe solvents, which are classified as Class IIIA combustible liquids. Equipment must not be cleaned with gasoline or other flammable liquids. I. Ventilation - In enclosed areas or buildings with the potential for accumulation of flammable vapors and gases, adequate natural or artificial ventilation shall be maintained to prevent concentration from exceeding dangerous LEL levels. VI. Training A. Fire prevention training will be provided for employees to an awareness level. Training may include fire watch, hands-on fire extinguisher, as applicable, Hot Work, and atmospheric gas monitor operation. B. Training documentation will be kept by the safety department. VII. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: 76 Section 20 CONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT CONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT I. Purpose II. Scope III. Definitions IV. Responsibilities V. Procedures VI. Training VII. Revision History 77 Section 21 EMERGENCY RESPONSE I. Purpose The purpose of this section is to ensure each employee and contractor of Laramie Energy is provided a safe working environment. The emergency response procedures have been developed to provide an organized plan of action to prepare and respond to major natural and human-caused emergencies that threaten operations. Laramie employees responding to emergencies will follow procedures and plans specified in the Emergency Action Plan. II. Scope The program applies to all Laramie employees and addresses emergencies affecting the continued operations. This section includes the following emergency plans. A. Shelter in Place Plan. This plan protects occupants in the event of a hazardous materials release in the community or for other scenarios when it would be safer to remain in the building. B. Office Emergency Plan. This plan contains procedures to keep employees and visitors safe at the office. The plan covers medical emergencies, fire, bomb threats and the handling of suspicious packages. C. Emergency Action Plan. This plan contains procedures to keep employees safe in the event of a hazardous condition or scenario while performing field operations. III. Definitions A. Emergency. Any incident, human-caused or natural, that requires responsive action to protect life, property and environment. B. Event. A planned, non-emergency activity. C. Natural Emergencies. Major fires, hurricanes, earthquakes, tornadoes, snow and severe weather. D. Human-Caused Emergencies. Hazardous chemical releases, civil disorders, riots, bombings, hostage situations, etc. IV. Responsibilities A. Responsible managers will ensure: a. Development and implementation of specific emergency programs. b. Employees are trained on emergency procedures. c. Exercises are conducted to evaluate the effectiveness of the emergency action plans; and 78 d. Maintenance of training records and documentation related to incidents and exercises. e. Emergency service organizations responding to an emergency will be advised of any area that may be contaminated by flammable or toxic gases, vapors or dusts or any other hazardous atmosphere which could endanger life. f. That all employees, contractors and/or emergency responders are provided with proper PPE before entering an incident location that may have the potential for hazardous conditions. g. Every shift must have at least two persons who have a current CPR certification. B. Employees are responsible for: a. Attending emergency training; b. Reporting potential emergency situations to their responsible manager; and c. Following emergency action plans as directed. V. Procedures A. Emergencies will be assessed by the responsible manager(s) and/or emergency personnel for size and the potential to cause injury and illness to employees. The appropriate emergency plan will be implemented based upon the nature and seriousness of the emergency. B. Exercises will be conducted annually to evaluate the effectiveness of the plans. C. Any time an emergency plan is implemented, whether it is for an actual emergency or an exercise, the response will be documented. The documentation will include the date, description of the scenario, actions taken or parts of the plan implemented, participants, and critique. The critique will identify what went well and what areas need improvement. Plans will be modified as necessary to correct deficiencies. VI. Training A. Records of all post-incident evaluation (actual emergencies or exercises) will be retained by the safety department. B. Written records will indicate the source of the training, the employees trained, a description of the training provided, and the date when the training occurred. C. All training records will be maintained by the safety department. 79 VII. Revision History The table below lists all changes made to this section since the implementation of the program: VIII. Supporting Documents A. Shelter in Place Plan B. Office Emergency Plan C. Emergency Action Plan D. Emergency Notification Chart 80 Section 22 OTHER TOPICS Other Topics as listed below: Cleanliness All work sites must be clean and orderly as required by 29 CFR 1910.22. All work surfaces must be kept dry or appropriate means taken to assure that surfaces are slip-resistant. Spills must be reported and cleaned up immediately. All combustible scrap, debris, and waste must be stored safely and removed promptly. Waste containers must be covered. Oily and paint soaked rags are combustible and should be discarded in sealable metal containers only. Rags with spent solvent must be properly disposed of. Compressed Gas Cylinders - Compressed gas cylinders should be regularly examined for obvious signs of defects, deep rusting, or leakage. Use care in handling and storing cylinders, safety valves, and relief valves to prevent damage. Precaution must be taken to prevent mixture of air or oxygen with flammable gases, except at a burner or in a standard torch. Only approved apparatus (torches, regulators, pressure-reducing valves, acetylene generators, manifolds) may be used. Cylinders must be kept away from sources of heat. It is prohibited to use cylinders as rollers or supports. Empty cylinders must be appropriately marked, their valves closed and valve-protection caps on. Cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings, regulators, hoses and apparatus must be kept free of oily or greasy substances. Care must be taken not to drop or strike cylinders. Unless secured on special trucks, all regulators must be removed and valve-protection caps put in place before moving cylinders. All cylinders without fixed hand wheels must have keys, handles, or non-adjustable wrenches on stem valves when in service. Liquefied gases must be stored and shipped valve-end up with valve covers in place. Stored cylinders shall be kept separate in “Used/Unused” sections and marked as such. Areas where cylinders are stored must be clearly marked with signs that read: DANGER - NO SMOKING, MATCHES, OR OPEN FLAMES/LIGHTS Regulators and Hoses - Before a regulator is removed, the valve must be closed and gas released from the regulator. All workers are instructed never to crack a fuel-gas cylinder valve near sources of ignition. Gas hoses shall be color-coded: • Red for acetylene (and other fuel-gas); • Green for oxygen hose, and • Black for inert gas and air hose. All pressure-reducing regulators must be used only for the gas and pressures for which they are intended. Liquids Handling and Transfer Operations Liquids handling and transfer operations occur on a regular basis for condensate and produced water. Laramie Energy retains competent contractors to complete these activities and the companies providing 81 these services are required to develop and maintain their own corporate safety programs and procedures. At a minimum, Laramie Energy requires: • All drivers must comply with DOT regulations in 49 CFR Part 177 and facility standard operating procedures posted at the facility; and • Drivers must be authorized by Laramie Energy to load or unload product at any facility; • No smoking during liquids transfer operations. • Drivers must park their vehicle upwind or cross wind of the tank containing the liquids. • The vehicle must be grounded and turned off during liquids transfer operations. • The use of drip pans under hose connections is required. In addition, drivers must observe the requirements of the SPCC plan. Fueling Fueling and refueling operations are not common activities during the operation of a natural gas field, except where power equipment, generators, or similar equipment are temporarily in use. Workers involved with fueling activities must be trained in proper handling and storage of flammable liquids, how to operate and shut off the fueling system and in spill response operations. The applicable Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures Plan should be reviewed by all personnel involved with fueling operations. Pipelines and Gathering Systems All pipelines must be constructed and maintained in accordance with the standard for interstate pipeline regulations. The location of all buried pipelines must be clearly marked and signs must be posted identifying the pipeline contents, the potential hazards (i.e. high pressure, toxicity or flammable) and where turn-off valves, connections and outlets are located. All tags used for labeling will be of a durable material with distinguishable and clearly written print. When non-potable water is piped through a facility’s outlets or taps, notices will be posted to alert workers that it is unsafe and not to be used for drinking, washing or personal use. Well Drilling and Completion Operations Laramie Energy retains independent professional contractors for all services related to well drilling from initial staking through drilling, completion and hook-up. These contractors are fully competent and trained and they maintain their own corporate safety programs and procedures. All contractors are responsible for the implementation and enforcement of their own safety policies and procedures. Laramie Energy fully supports those measures. Even so, Laramie Energy feels that supplemental safety policies, complementary to the contractor’s regulations in place, are warranted. The following section summarizes the Company’s policies concerning well drilling, well completion and well workover activities. 4.3.1 General Drilling Safety Spudding shall not commence until all guards are in place on all equipment to be operated; all platforms, stairways, and handrails are secured in position; the escape line with buggy is installed; and 82 A-leg pins are instead in their proper A-leg holes and secured by safety pins to prevent their displacement. An escape line shall be a wire rope of suitable diameter and type. It shall be kept free of obstructions. An approved safety buggy with an adequate braking device (Geronimo) shall be installed on the escape line and kept at the derrick man’s working platform. The safety buggy and escape line shall be checked by the derrick man each trip. Tension on the escape line shall be such that a 200- pound worker sitting in the safety buggy will touch the ground at least twenty feet (20') from the anchor. The minimum length of the escape line, which shall be securely anchored both at the ground and to the rig, shall be adequate to assure no less than 45-degree descent from the vertical plane. OSHA safety regulations that address common drilling-related safety concerns include: • 29 CFR 1910.23 – Floor openings; • 29 CFR 1910.24 – Guarding of Stairs; • 29 CFR 1910.27 – Ladders and Climbing Devices; • 20 CFR 1910.132 - Hazard Assessment; and • 29 CFR 1910.132 - Fall Protection Devices and Rescue Plans; • 29 CFR 1910.184 - Slings and Lifting Devices. Every person, when engaged in work at ten feet (10') or more above the derrick floor or other working surfaces, shall wear a safety harness with an attached safety line secured to the derrick except during rig up and rig down. Where these regulations prescribe the use of safety harness, the operator shall use an approved safety harness suitable for the particular job and in good condition, which safety harness and lifeline is to be provided by the employer. The safety harness shall be attached by means of a tail rope or lanyard to a fixed anchor and adjusted to allow the minimum of drop in case of fall. A separate lifeline shall be provided for each operator requiring a life line, and safety belts and life lines shall be checked before each use and maintained in good condition. Every automatic cat head shall have a separate control. Where dual-purpose controls are used, a positive locking device shall be installed to prevent one automatic cat head from accidentally engaging while the other is in operation. When practical, draw works master controls shall be effectively locked out when not in use. Guards shall be installed so that controls may not be accidentally engaged through contract by cat lines or other equipment. The engine room, pump house, derrick floor and fourble board shall be enclosed to a sufficient height to provide protection against inclement weather. Exits shall be provided to the outside on at least three sides of the derrick floor. The pump house shall have two doors leading in different directions to the outside. No exit door of a derrick, including all doors of the doghouse, shall be held closed with a lock or outside latch while anyone is on the derrick floor. The suction pit or tanks used for the circulation of flammable materials shall not be located inside the pump house. No operator shall handle a traveling hoisting line unless he uses a suitable hand guard, which shall be secured to the derrick. No operator shall slide down any pipe, kelly hose, cable, or rope line except in the event of an extreme emergency. No operator shall ride a traveling block with which pipe is being moved at any time. When riding a traveling block or elevators, a safety belt with lanyard shall be worn and the lanyard shall be attached to the block above the hook. No operator shall use the cat line as a means of ascending to or descending from any point in the derrick except in an emergency. Even then the rotary table shall be locked out and qualified workers shall operate the cat head and controls. 83 When working on hydraulic tong heads, the input pressure line shall be disconnected. High pressure lines (hydraulic or air) shall have a safety pressure relief valve which shall never be set higher than manufacturer's specifications for the working pressure of the lines or valve. Hydraulic tongs shall be backed up with a safety device able to withstand the full torque of the power tool. Auxiliary power tong units which employ internal combustion engines shall have the power unit placed seventy-five feet (75') upwind of the well bore, considering the normal prevailing wind at the rig location, where location and terrain permit. The rotary table shall not be used for the final making up or initial breaking out of a pipe connection. All pipe and drill collars racked in a derrick shall be secured with rope or otherwise adequately secured to prevent them from falling across the derrick. Safety clamps, used on drill collars, flush joint pipe, or similar equipment for the purpose of preventing its falling in the well when not held by the elevator, shall be removed from the drill collars, pipe, or similar equipment before being hoisted up into the derrick. Racking foundations shall be designed to withstand the load or racked pipe and drill collars and be secured to prevent turnover. 4.3.2 General Drilling Rules Surface casing shall be run to reach a depth to prevent blowouts or uncontrolled wells. In areas where pressures and formations are unknown, surface casing shall be of sufficient size to permit the use of an intermediate string or strings of casing. Surface casing shall be set in or through an impervious formation and shall be cemented by the pump and plug or displacement or other approved method with sufficient cement to fill annulus to the top of the hole. If cement is not circulated to the surface during the primary operation, supplemental cemented operations shall be performed to assure that the annular space from the casing shoe to the surface is filled with cement. The cemented casing string shall stand under pressure until the cement has reached a compressive strength of 300 pounds per square inch; providing, however, that no further operation shall be commenced until the cement has been in place for at least eight (8) hours. The term "under pressure" as used herein shall be complied with if one float valve is used or if pressure is otherwise held. Setting depths of all casing strings shall be determined by taking into account formation fracture gradients and the maximum anticipated pressure to be maintained within the well bore. If and when it becomes necessary to run a production string, such string shall be cemented by the pump and plug method and shall be properly tested by the pressure method before cement plugs are drilled. Natural gas which may be encountered in a substantial quantity in any section of a cable tool drilled hole above the ultimate objective shall be shut off with reasonable diligence either by mudding or casing, or other approved method and confined to its original source. Any gas escaping from the well during drilling operations shall be, as far as practicable, conducted to a safe distance from the well site and burned. An approved safety harness (as provided in 29 CFR 1910.66) suitable for the particular job or hazard exposure, which shall be attached by means of a tail-rope or lanyard to a fixed anchor and adjusted to allow the minimum of drop in case of a fall, shall be provided and worn. Every person, when engaged in work at ten feet (10') or more above the derrick floor or other working surfaces, shall wear a safety belt with an attached safety line secured to a fixed point, or be supported from the tugger line by a safety harness or tree trimmer-type belt. The tugger line shall not be freewheeling. Special protective wearing 84 apparel shall be provided and worn as deemed necessary because of unusually hazardous situations not normal to the job. 4.3.3 Blowout Equipment Blowout prevention equipment (BOP) in all drilling operations shall be in accordance with recognized safe practices, reasonably adequate to keep the well under control at all times, as well as inclusive of blowout preventers, choke and kill lines, as necessary, and maintained in good working condition at all times. One or more workers employed on the rig shall have an adequate understanding of, and be able to operate, the blowout preventer system. At least one person who is trained in blowout prevention and well control procedures shall be on the well site. Blowout preventer controls shall be readily accessible on the floor and/or at least twenty feet (20') from the well bore and outside the substructure. All blowout preventers, choke lines and manifold shall be installed above ground level. Casing heads and optional spools may be installed below ground level provided they are visible and accessible. All pipe fittings and valves placed on, or connected with a blowout preventer, well casing, casing head, or the drill pipe or tubing, shall be of a type suitable for the purpose for which they are to be used and adequate to withstand the pressure which may be encountered. All ram type blowout preventers and related equipment, including casing, shall be tested to the full working pressure rating of said equipment upon installation, provided that components need not be tested to levels higher than the lowest working pressure rated component. Annular type blowout preventers shall be tested in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If, for any reason, a pressure seal in the assembly is disassembled, a test to a full working pressure rating of that seal shall be conducted prior to the resumption of any drilling operation. In addition to the initial pressure tests, ram type preventers shall be checked for physical operation each trip and all components, again with exception of the annular type blowout preventer, tested monthly to at least fifty percent (50%) of the rated pressure of the blowout preventer equipment and/or to the maximum anticipated pressure of the blowout preventer equipment and/or to the maximum anticipated pressure to be contained at the surface, whichever is greater. The working pressure rating of all blowout preventers and related equipment shall equal or exceed the maximum anticipated pressure to be contained at the surface. The entire blowout preventer and wellhead assembly shall be kept reasonably clean of mud and ice. Studs on all wellhead and blowout preventer flanges shall be checked weekly for tightness. Where locking screws are provided on blowout preventers, hand wheels shall be kept installed and operational, and readily accessible. A drill stem safety valve shall be available on the rig floor at all times. While a well is being drilled, tested, completed, or reconditioned, the appropriate blowout equipment shall be mechanically tested periodically, and the blind rams shall be mechanically tested daily (provided that this requirement does not necessitate a special trip of the tools from the hole). If found defective, any such equipment or rams shall be made serviceable before operations are resumed. All tests shall be documented in the daily drilling logbook, and in the case of a pressure test, the pressure applied and the duration shall be recorded. BOP equipment installed on wells in which formation pressures to be encountered are abnormal or unknown shall consist of a double-gate, hydraulically operated preventer with pipe and blind rams or two single-ram type preventers, one equipped with pipe rams, the other with blind rams and an annular 85 type preventer. In addition, upper and lower kelly cocks, pit level indicators with alarms and/or flow sensors with alarms, and surface facilities to handle pressure kicks shall be installed prior to drilling any formation with known abnormal pressure. Accumulators shall maintain a pressure capacity reserve at all times to provide for operation of the hydraulic preventer and valves with no outside source. Areas in which abnormal pressures are likely to be encountered are those as defined by the Oil and Gas Conservation Commission's staff and posted on a map to be available in the State Oil and Gas Supervisor's office. This map, to be updated as information becomes available, will also segregate, vertically, formations where abnormal pressures are likely to be encountered. In all other drilling operations, BOP equipment shall consist of at least one double-gate preventer with pipe and blind rams or two single-ram type preventers, one equipped with pipe rams, the other with blind rams, and sufficient valving to permit fluid circulation at the surface, or shall be as approved by the State Oil and Gas Supervisor's Office and/or the U.S. Geological Survey District Engineer's office, as filed on the drilling permit. Blowout preventer equipment and related casing heads and spools shall have a vertical bore no smaller than the inside diameter of the casing to which they are attached. 4.3.4 Mud Pits and Tanks Portable tanks shall be located where it is not possible for workers or equipment to come into contact with overhead power lines. All discharge lines shall be properly secured. No operator shall jump from one tank top to another. All fixed mud guns used for jetting shall be pinned or hobbled when unattended. Hoses used for jetting operations shall be manned and an operator stationed at the pump control to shut down the pressure in the event of an emergency. Standard railings shall be provided on the inside of all mud tank walkways. Where such walkways are four feet or more above ground level, both sides shall be provided with standard railings. ! ! ! ! ! ! ! CC 0697-03-07 632-13-22 629-01 629-23-42 632-21-41 629-31-11 620-24-43 620-21 697-20-28 620-33 620-43-32 617-24 620-01 629-2 FED604-11 CC 604-44 CC 604-41-32 CC 603-23-32 CC 610-21-41 CC 610-22-43 CC 697-15-01 CC 610-24-43 CC 697-15-54 CC 697-15-23 CC 697-16A CC 697-16-16 CC 697-09-61 CC 608-43-31 CC 697-08-53 CC 616-21-32 CC 697-16-28 CC 617-41 CC 605-13-22 CC 609-14 CC 605-23 CC 605-1 CC 604-12-13 CC 605-02 CC 608-41 CC 609-02 CC 609-01 CC 604-01 CC 609-33 FED23-15 CC 697-16D 697-17 CC 697-15-54Annex CC 697-16AIIAnnex CC 609-14Annex CC 697-16-16Annex CC 697-15-01Annex MesaStorageYard 697-05C 697-04D 604-12-13Annex 697-16-28Annex 697-08A 697-17B 06 35333134 3334 32 08 32 16 3635 07 18 31 19 17 30 LoganWashRoadLoganWashRoadSWD 629-1CASCADE CREEK SWD 604-1CASCADE CREEK Conn Creek II NorthUpperLoop Gate TC MineralsGate SouthTrailrIdgeRoad Gate 5S 97W 6S 97W 5S 96W 29 14 21 03 28 11 20 27 1009 0405 22 02 15 26 23 Copyright:© 2013 National Geographic Society, i-cubed Document Path: L:\GIS\GIS_Staging\Landmapping2019\Landmaps19\EmergencyAccess_CascadeCreekN19.mxdCASCADE CREEK NORTH EMERGENCY ACCESS MAP Date: 5/10/2019 MAP SYMBOLS Emergency Access Existing Access Roads CountyRoads040711 Laramie Surface Boundaries !FacilityPoints Existing Pad Existing Facility Existing Pond Closed PondT6S R97W Garfield Co, Colorado 0 0.5 1 1.50.25 Miles Coordinate System: NAD 1983 StatePlane Colorado Central FIPS 0502 Feet ± !! ! ! ! FED797-08-51D FED797-08-19 FED708-11 797-05-52 797-05-36 705-22-43 797-06 Shell797-09A 632-13-22 629-01 629-23-42 632-21-41 629-31-11 620-24-43 620-21 697-20-28 620-33 620-43-32 617-24 620-01 629-2 697-17 CC 697 -15-54CC 697 -16A FED23-15 Shell797-14-01 CC 697-16D Shell797-03B CC 697-15-54Annex CC 697-16AIIAnnex Shell797-03A Conn CreekPowerGeneration ConnCreek II Conn Creek I Cascade CreekField Office Cascade/MesaMeter ConnCreekRd29 14 32 1618 15 05 23 17 COUNTYRD213Mtn LoopMtn LoopLogan W ash RoadMtn Loop Mountain RoadPond 10 6S 97W 7S 97W 35 21 33 04 28 17 03 31 34 20 27 1109 18 02 07 1516 14 06 1008 19 22 26 30 Copyright:© 2013 National Geographic Society, i-cubed Document Path: L:\GIS\GIS_Staging\Landmapping2019\Landmaps19\EmergencyAccess_CascadeCreekS19.mxdCASCAD E CREEK SOUTH EMERGENCY ACCESS MAP Date: 5/10/2019 MAP SYMBOLS Cas cade_Pads Existing Reclaimed SWD Em ergency Access Mesa Co Roads !FacilityPoints Laram ie Surface BoundariesT6S R97W & T7S R97WGarfield Co, Colorado ± 0 0.5 1 1.50.25 Miles Coordinate System: NAD 1983 StatePlane Colorado Central FIPS 0502 Feet DE BEQUE COLOR A D O R I V E R CO RD213 CO RD213 CO RD492 CO RD202 CO RD200 CO RD213 CO RD213 3.9 MILESCO RD45.5 I-70 CO RD204 CO RD204 CO RD45 RD T 7 S T 8 S R 98 WR 97 W8 . 3 M ILES LARAMIE PROPERTY ACCESS POINT GARFIELD COUNTY MESA COUNTY 1414 ELK ST., ROCK SPRINGS, WY 82901 RIFFIN & ASSOCIATES, INC. (307) 362-5028 PUBLIC ACCESS DRAWN: 6/29/2020 - DEH DRG JOB No. 21379REVISED: 7/7/2020 - DEH SCALE: 1" = 4000' MISCELLANEOUS EDITS PUBLIC ACCESS ROUTE MAP LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC. CC 697-15-54 ANNEX SWSE, SECTION 15, T.6 S., R.97 W., 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADOGARFIELD CO., COLORADOCC 697-15-54 ANNEX PROPOSED ROUTE EXISTING ROAD QUADRANGLE CIRCLE DOT GULCH LONG POINT MOUNT BLAINE RED PINNACLE DEBEQUE WAGON TRACK RIDGE 2.4 MILES6.4 MILES0.4 MILES 0.4 M I L E S 0.1 MILES ±741 FEET T 7 S T 6 SR 97 WLARAMIEENERGY LLCAPN: 216921400026 LARAMIE PROPERTY ACCESS POINT 1414 ELK ST., ROCK SPRINGS, WY 82901 RIFFIN & ASSOCIATES, INC. (307) 362-5028 LARAMIE ACCESS DRAWN: 6/29/2020 - DEH DRG JOB No. 21379REVISED: 7/7/2020 - DEH SCALE: 1" = 2000' MISCELLANEOUS EDITS LARAMIE ACCESS ROUTE MAP LARAMIE ENERGY, LLC. CC 697-15-54 ANNEX SWSE, SECTION 15, T.6 S., R.97 W., 6th P.M., GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADOGARFIELD CO., COLORADOCC 697-15-54 ANNEX PROPOSED ROUTE EXISTING ROAD QUADRANGLE CIRCLE DOT GULCH LONG POINT MOUNT BLAINE RED PINNACLE DEBEQUE WAGON TRACK RIDGE PROPOSED LOCATION